Part 04 - Plumbing, Mechanical & Firefighting Specifications

HQ OF GEN.
DIRECTORATE OF BORDERS PASSPORTS,

EXPATRIATES AFFAIRS, NATIONALITY & TRAVEL DOCUMENTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
DEPARTMENT
PART 04 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Section 19 Plumbing and Irrigation Installations
1. General
2. Materials
3. Irrigation Systems
Section 20 Drainage Installation
1. General
2. System Network
Section 22 Air Conditioning Installation
1. Commercial Specifications
2. Technical Specifications
Section 23 Fire Fighting Installation
1. General
2. Products
3. Execution
Building Affairs Department PAGE NO: 1/210 VOLUME 3: PART 4 OF 5

BA-1003
HQ OF GEN. DIRECTORATE OF BORDERS PASSPORTS,
DEPARTMENT
SECTION 19
PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
SL NO. TITLE OF SPECIFICATIONS
19.1.00 Plumbing General
19.1.01 Site
19.1.02 Site Conditions
19.1.03 Definitions
19.1.04 Scope of Works
19.1.05 Compliance with Specifications and Regulation
19.1.06 Plumbing System
19.1.07 Programme
19.1.08 Contract Drawings
19.1.09 Working Drawings
19.1.10 Co-ordination of Drawings
19.1.11 Material Submittals
19.1.12 Material Inspection
19.1.13 Alternative Materials
19.1.14 Setting Out of Works
19.1.15 Safety
19.1.16 Contractor s License
19.1.17 Service Connection & Permits
19.1.18 Damage to Plant and Materials
19.1.19 Protective Finishes
19.1.20 Works Test and Inspection
19.1.21 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
19.1.22 As Built Drawings
19.1.23 Period of Maintenance

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
19.2.00 PLUMBING MATERIALS
19.2.01 General
19.2.02 Installation, Storage and Protection
19.2.03 Pipe Supports
19.2.04 Pipe Sleeves
19.2.05 Valves and Stop Cocks
19.2.06 Strainers and Drain Cocks
19.2.07 Float Ball Valves
19.2.08 Trench Excavation
19.2.09 Cold Water Services
19.2.10 Pipework Insulation
19.2.11 Cold Water Storage Tanks
19.2.12 Hot Water Service Heaters
19.2.13 Water Filters
19.2.14 Cold Water Supply Booster System
19.2.15 Pressure Reducing Valve
19.2.16 Sterilization of Water Services
19.2.17 Swimming Pool
19.2.18 Chilled Water System for Roof Water Tank
19.2.19 Testing and Commissioning
19.2.20 Schedule of Preferred Manufacturer and Suppliers

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
19.3.00 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
19.1.01 SITE
Wadi Al Banat, Doha, State of Qatar
19.1.02 SITE CONDITIONS
Unless otherwise specified, all the Plumbing Materials & Equipments

shall be capable of withstanding the following site conditions:
Maximum Ambient Temperature: 52 Deg.C (Dry Bulb) in Summer

& 0 Deg.C (Dry Bulb) in Winter
Altitude : Sea Level
Maximum Relative Humidity : 100 %
Maximum Wind Velocity : 130 Kms. per Hour
Prevailing Wind : North and North Westerly
Storms : Dusty Sporadic and
Irregular Annual Rainfall : 80mm
19.1.03 DEFINITIONS
The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications / drawings

shall mean:
Site : The Locations where the works are to be
carried out. Contractor : The Main Contractor
KAHRAMAA : Qatar General Electric and Water Corporation
QCS : Qatar Construction
Specification BS : British Standard
Specifications CP. : British Standard Code of
Practice
Tender Drawing : The Drawing on which the tender is based and the
schedules therein.
Working Drawings : The Drawings prepared by the Contractor for the

purpose of execution of work at site.
As Built Drawings : This is the true record of the actual work carried out of
si
Works : To include the provisions for al the materials and

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
works to be carried out by the contractor as per these

specifications and for the satisfactory completion of
the installation.
Approved : Shall mean APPROVED by the Engineer in
writing. Submitted : Shall mean SUBMITTED to the Engineer in
writing. Accepted : Shall mean ACCEPTED by the Engineer in
writing. Provide : Shall mean, supply, install, test and commission.
Install : Shall mean install, test and commission.
Furnish : Shall mean supply only.
Concealed : Shall mean Hidden from normal sight in the

shafts, ceiling spaces, walls, slabs or partitions.
Exposed : Shall mean visible to building occupants in spaces,

which may be reached without the use ladders or any
other temporary means of access.
19.1.04 SCOPE OF WORK
This write-up covers in brief the scope of works under the Utilities &
Services Design Works conceived under this contract and narrates various scope of
works to be considered for the design, procurement, installation and all the
equipment materials based on the approved working drawing, Testing and
Commissioning for plumbing, drainage and fire fighting to the new building and shall
cover the following facilities.
Cold & Hot Water supply, storage and distribution system
External Services works.
EXTERNAL SERVICES WORKS
Cold water system network from the Basement water storage tanks and
cold water booster system shall be handled to different consumption
points at toilets and kitchen areas as well as ablution within the building.
19.1.05 COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS AND REGULATIONS
The contractor shall supply all materials which shall be new and in new condition.
The contractor shall supply all the necessary skilled and unskilled labors under the
supervision of competent Engineers to complete the works in accordance with the
programme.
The installation of the works covered in this section shall be in accordance with this
specification and with the requirements of the relevant authorities, KAHRAMAA
(Water Division) and fire department and to the relevant B.S specification.
i. The equipments shall conform to the British Standard specifications & codes of
practice (current editions including all amendments).

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
ii. If the Contractor wishes to use materials of installations or equipments other than
the specified ones and conforming to different standards, then a written approval
from the Engineer shall be obtained. However the Engineer reserves the right
for such approval/s.
iii. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on the contract drawings
but mentioned in the specification or vice versa, or any incidental accessories or
work necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready
for operation, even if not particularly specified shall be supplied and installed or
carried out by the contractor without any additional costs.
iv. Clarification shall be obtained from the Consultant in writing for any such cases
at the tendering stage. In case of any discrepancy arises afterwards during the
construction, the consultants decision shall be final and binding on all such
matters.
v. In case of any ambiguity or discrepancy in the project specification, the

government published specifications (QCS) shall be adapted.
vi. It is the responsibility of contractor to study the specification in detail and clear all
doubts or issues that need clarification in order to execute the job. The tender
drawings are guide lines and the contractor must prepare the detailed shop
drawings and get approval from consultant prior to the execution of job at the
site, no delay or any compromise on the specification or quality of work is
accepted on any account.
Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on the contract drawings but
mentioned in the specification or vice versa, or any incidental accessories or work
necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready for
operation, even if not particularly specified shall be supplied and installed or carried
out by the contractor without any additional costs.
Clarification shall be obtained from the Engineer in writing for any such cases at the
tendering stage. In case of any discrepancy arises afterwards during the
construction, the Engineers decision shall be final and binding on all such matters.
19.1.06 PLUMBING SYSTEM
WATER SUPPLY
a. Hot and Cold Water System

nd
The Cold water system shall consist of concrete water tank located at the 2
basement of the bldg, which act as the main storage tank coming from Municipality
for the entire building. Lift pump will be available to transfer water from main storage
tank to roof tank. A dedicated water supply booster system with pressure vessel will
distribute domestic water.
A complete pipe works shall feed the internal cold water supply distribution network in
the building.
The water supply shall pass thru the multimedia water filter with flow rate as stated
in the tender drawings. Individual water heater of capacity indicated on the tender
drawings shall be used supplying hot water to each consumption point within the
building.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
19.1.07 PROGRAMME
The Contractor shall produce the work program based on CPM (Critical Path Method
or Bar chart, indicating the time required for various activities and operations to
complete the project in time. The following points shall be highlighted in the
Program:
1. Mobilization
2. Drawings and Material Submittals
3. Approvals
4. Equipment Deliveries
5. First Fix
6. Main and Sub-Main Piping Works
7. Second Fix
8. Fixing of Accessories
9. Testing
10. Commissioning and Handing Over
19.1.08 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
The Plumbing tender drawings related to this project have been listed in the
Schedule of Drawings enclosed with the specifications. The tender drawings have
been prepared to show the tenderer the principal equipment and general
arrangement required for the project.
Drawings do not indicate every detail of the work. It is the Contractor s responsibility
to check the positions / locations at site. All dimensions are tentative and shall be
checked with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Any discrepancy shall be
brought to the attenti`on of the Engineer in writing at the time of tender.
Particular attention shall be paid to the positioning of draw offs, valves, and other
accessories, in relation to the Interior finishes and locations of various appliances.
The Contractor is deemed to have studied the services drawings based on all the
local regulations and have included in his prices for all builders work associated with
these drawings.
19.1.09 WORKING DRAWINGS
The contractor shall prepare the working drawings in a scale of 1:50 for plans, 1:5 for
details and 1:200 for site plan, and submit them for the Engineer s approval. The
contractor shall project the following in the above drawings:
i. Actual pipework routes boxes indicating the sizes of all branches, bends and
other accessories and fittings.
ii Typical connection details of the various Plumbing requirements of appliances,

like Water Closets, Wash Basins, Faucets, Bidets, Sinks etc.,
iii Sections and Elevations of Installations with co-ordination details in respect to

the other services Installations like, Electricals, Air-conditioning & Ventilation and
Drainage.
iv Levels, Center Lines of the pipework installations and the details of supports.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
19.1.10 CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS
The Main contractor shall produce working drawings for building works required for
the services showing the integration of all the services i.e., Electrical, Mechanical
and Drainage systems.
The Main contractor shall ensure that all the working drawings are properly
coordinated before submitting to the Engineer for approval. All the services shall be
installed in such a manner so as to avoid conflict with each other and maintain the
clearances required between each of them as per the prevailing regulations.
19.1.11 MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
The materials offered for approval shall be strictly in accordance with the
specifications and tender drawings.
The contractor shall submit in triplicate, the technical literature for each item of the
equipment, he intends to use for the project, to the Engineer for the necessary
review and approval.
If in case the technical literature is not available, then a sample shall be submitted:
in the absence of either of these, typed technical data shall be submitted duly
supported by telex / letter of the manufacturer for confirmation.
In case of items involving aesthetic, sink taps, Showers, Draw offs etc., samples
must be submitted for approval along with the materials submittals.
Each copy of the submittals shall be numbered and signed with the technical
literature clearly highlighted, indicating the model, type and capacity of the
equipment offered. The Engineer shall retain two for copies and return one, either
Approved or Not Approved, to the contractor.
The contractor shall maintain and submit a status report every month, of all the
Materials submittals of the Plumbing Materials & Equipments in the following
preforms to the Engineer:
i. Submittal Number
ii. Type of Material
iii. Manufacturer / Local Agent
iv. Date of Approval
v. Date of Order / Order Number
vi. Mode of Delivery ( Air, Land or Sea )
vii. ETA on Site
viii. Status as on date of Report
a. Equipment Supply
All the equipments for the project shall be procured only through the appointed local
agent in Qatar, who shall be the authorized agent and be able to supply the spare
parts etc., for the items anytime in the future. The contractor shall mark the same
clearly on the submittals (item No. iii. above).
In case of any item/s required to be purchased abroad directly, for valid reasons,
then the contractor shall mention the same in the submittal and obtain approval from
the Engineer specifically.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
b. Equipment Size and Delivery
Each item of equipment shall be delivered to site in sections suitable for installations
in position designated, bearing in mind the location, type of structure, construction
program and the method of access.
c. Design References
Any design, for any of the systems, detailed on the Tender drawings, which requires
amendment or differs from that available at the time of construction, due to the
change in the manufacturers range of production or availability etc., The contractor
shall discuss the matter and obtain a readily available alternative from the Engineer.
Accordingly, the contractor shall make a fresh submittal based on the Engineers
advise and obtain approval to provide the revised system.
In such cases, no cost consideration will be applicable, as the contractor is deemed

to have studied the drawings and specifications thoroughly as well as obtained
clarifications during the tender stage, before submitting his quotation for the
execution.
19.1.12 MATERIAL INSPECTIONS
The contractor shall inform the Engineer within one week upon receipt of all the
materials at the site and arrange for the inspection of the same. Any material used
at site which is not approved earlier specifically shall stand rejected without notice.
Any item on supply differs from the one shown on the submittal catalogue copy or
the sample submitted, will also be rejected at site. In such cases, the contractor
shall make a fresh submittal for the item and obtain approval from the Engineer.
Any time delay caused due to the above shall be on the Contractors account.
The contractor will have to remove the rejected materials from the site and replace
with approved materials at his own expenses. In the event the contractor fails to do
so, the client will have the liberty to carry out such works from other agencies and
debit the ensuing amount to the Contractor.
Materials Storage
The contractor shall be responsible for the safe keeping and storage of the materials
at site and provision of such covering as may be necessary to ensure that on
completion, all items are handed over in sound condition with all protective finishes
undamaged.
19.1.13 ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS
Equipments and Materials used as the basis for the design are listed in the Schedule
of Manufacturers. The tenderer shall submit alternative proposals for any of the
equipment or material for the Engineers consideration. Only in case if the specified
item/s are not available due to valid reasons. Only in such cases, the alternatives
will be considered by the Engineer, before the tender is accepted and the Engineers

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
decision will be final regarding the matter.
In case the alternatives are accepted, the acceptance of the same will be confirmed
in writing by the Engineer. During the execution of the contract, no alternative
equipment, materials or fittings will be permitted other than the approved and the
contractor is fore-warned that any item provided by him which is not up to the
specification, must be replaced at his own expense. In cases where time will not
permit, then such replacements shall be at the clients convenience, but nevertheless
at the Contractors expenses etc.,
19.1.14 SETTING OUT OF WORKS
The locations of Sink taps, showers, draw offs and their piping routes, etc., as
indicated on the tender drawings is tentative and may require some variation to suit
the site requirements. The exact positions must be checked and shown on the
detailed working drawings as indicated on the detailed Architectural drawings and
co-ordinated with furnishing and other services.
19.1.15 SAFETY
The contractor shall maintain all the safety procedures at site to protect man-power
and machinery. The Main Contractor shall provide all the means to achieve the
Safety standards required and protect the manpower, materials and equipments at
any point of time.
19.1.16 CONTRACTORS LICENSE
The Main contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor appointed for Plumbing
works shall be one of the approved to carryout and maintain such work.
The Contractor shall submit the qualifications and experience particulars of the
Mechanical Engineer, Foreman and technicians (plumbers) to be employed on the
project and obtain approval from the Engineer. Once the approval is obtained, the
contractor shall not replace the staff from site. In case the same becomes
necessary, re-approval should be obtained and the new staff shall continue with the
old staff for a minimum period of 30 days before the later is withdrawn from the site.
In such cases, the proposed replacement personnel shall have a minimum of 5 years
local experience. Any application with less than 5 years of experience will be
rejected by the Engineer.
19.1.17 SERVICE CONNECTION AND PERMITS
The contractor shall obtain all necessary permits prior to commencement of work
and obtain current record drawings of existing services already installed. All
applications for permits etc., shall be made in writing to the authorities, a minimum of
7 days prior to the execution of the work. The Contractor is fully responsible for
obtaining the necessary permits from the authorities for his work site as well as for
any connected works to others.
All statutory permits from Fire, Water and Sewerage Department are secured by the
Engineer. The plumbing contractor shall however coordinate all inspection works
and liaise with the State departments regarding all pipework and payment of fees,

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
etc., when connecting city water mains connections to the mains. The contractor is
required to produce certificates of approval of all materials and equipment by the
relevant authorities when requested by the Engineer
The plumbing contractor shall coordinate connection works of water/sewer and fire to
the city mains with relevant local authorities of works.
19.1.18 DAMAGE TO PLANT AND MATERIALS
Any plant or material which is damaged by any means whatsoever, shall not be used
in the works.
Should the contractor wish to rectify such damage in order to utilize the plant or
materials in the permanent works, the matter shall be brought to the attention of the
Engineer, who in turn shall conduct a proper survey after which the necessary
instructions will be issued. Only after obtaining a written permission from the
Engineer, shall any remedial work be carried out.
Any damaged Plant or Material allegedly brought to a as-new condition following

such a procedure, shall only be accepted after the technical appraisal & discretion of
the Engineer, whose decision in such matters shall be final and binding.
19.1.19 PROTECTIVE FINISHES
The protective finishes must be provided on all materials and Equipments used in
this contract to ensure that no deterioration is caused by the interaction of local
climatic conditions.
All materials shall be inspected by the contractor or his representative before

shipment to ensure that finishes are in accordance with the specifications.
19.1.20 WORKS TEST AND INSPECTION
Provision shall be made by the contractor for the Engineer or Engineers

representative to witness hydraulic tests as specified elsewhere, of major pipe work
executed by the contractor.
The Engineer will advise the contractor at the time of commencement of the contract
the list of works that are to be inspected and the contractor shall give the Engineer
the required notice in the required Inspection form, of the date on which the plant or
work will be ready for testing.
The Engineer will signify his intention to attend the tests or accept the contractor's
test sheets. The contractor shall supply all the Inspection Forms and Test
certificates in original to the Engineer / Client at the time of handing over the project.
19.1.21 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
The contractor shall provide Three copies in the form of bound documents the
operating instructions and maintenance manuals indicating the following:
a. Step by step operating procedures.

b. Preventive maintenance schedule.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
c. Technical literature.
d. Spare parts list
e. Manufacturer's name, address, telex no., Fax no. telephone no., and contact
person.- Local as well as overseas.
f. Work test certificates, if any.
g. Routine Test results carried out at site.
19.1.22 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
After the working drawings have been approved, no alteration to the drawings shall
be carried out without the consent of the Engineer. These changes shall be
supported by sketches and incorporated on the AS-BUILT drawings which are to
be submitted to the Engineer within one month of completion of the project.
Two sets of process negatives along with three sets of drawings shall be submitted
after approval of the Engineer for onward submission to the client.
19.1.23 PERIOD OF MAINTENANCE
The contractor shall guarantee the entire Plumbing System installed against Faulty /
improper materials and or workmanship for the period of maintenance of 400 days
(Four Hundred) from the date, the installation is tested, commissioned and accepted
by the Engineer. Also where longer guarantee or warranty periods are otherwise
declared, for any equipment or materials such longer terms shall apply.
The Contractor shall submit a single guarantee for whole of the works, which states
that all parts of the work are in accordance with the contract documents during the
period of maintenance, the contractor shall repair any deficiencies, within 24 hours of
notification at no additional cost to the contract.
In case if the Contractor fails to attend to any such faults as mentioned above within
the specified time, then the client shall make own arrangements to rectify the fault
but nevertheless at the Contractors expense.
19.2.00 MATERIALS
DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER SERVICES
19.2.01 GENERAL
Hot and Cold water services within the building shall comply with British Standard
code of practice BS 6700: 1987 CP 342 : Part 2 : 1974.
All hot water pipes shall be insulated with manufacturer sleeves and sizes to be
same as the pipe size of PP-R pipes.
All pipe work fittings, valves and other components forming the piping installation
shall be erected such that they can be dismantled and are accessible for repair and
replacement. Where valves and equipment are fitted, unions and flanges shall be
provided as appropriate for the diameter pipe work in order to allow valves and
equipment removal.
All pipe work shall be erected such that it may be vented and drained satisfactorily.
All low points in the system shall have drain cocks fitted and high points shall have air

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
bottles or automatic air vents.
All cold and hot water pipes exposed to the sun at roof or inside shafts shall be
insulated with fiberglass 48 KM/kg and with weather proof / sun proof insulation
protective material. Contractor to carry out thermal expansion for PP-R pipes subject
to temperature difference.
a) Copper Pipes
All exposed pipe work on roof and inside shafts shall be copper tube to British
Standard BS 2871 Part 1 : 1971 Table "X" and all fittings shall be copper or copper
alloy to BS 864 : Part 2 : 197 1and All tube and fittings shall be stamped with the
British Standard kite mark and copper alloy fittings shall carry a CR mark. The
jointing of copper pipe work shall be by means of dezincification resistant integral
solder ring fittings.
All pipes inside the toilets shall be PP-R polypropylene type with authoritys approval
and to be as per standards.
b) Polypropylene PP-R Fittings
Fittings shall be both welding fittings and metal fittings. All metal inserts shall be in
dezincification resistant brass. Joining between pipes and fittings shall be made by
melting the parts. Locations where pipe is to be connected to equipment, PP-R
fittings with metal insert shall be used.
Polypropylene valves shall be used where available with manufacturers in their

product range. All the components inside the valve in contract with water shall be
dezincification resistant brass. For those valves (type and sizes) which are not
available in the PP-R pipe manufacturer range, shall be made dezincification
resistant brass as described in clause b below.
All components of polypropylene pipe systems shall be suitable for a working

pressure of 6 bars at 70 C for 50 years life expectancy. The whole polypropylene
piping installation including supports shall be carried out strictly in accordance with
manufacturers recommendations. The contractor shall make allowance for
expansion in the pipework. The whole PP-R installation shall be guaranteed for a
period of 5 years.
19.2.02 INSTALLATION, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
All pipework, fittings and accessories shall be installed strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations and due allowance made for thermal movement.
All pipework, fittings and accessories shall be obtained from one manufacturer only,
who shall be nominated by the contractor in writing and approved by the Engineer
prior to ordering any materials. Materials from different manufacturers shall not be
incorporated into the system. All pipework, fittings and accessories shall be stored in
properly ventilated well supported racked storage sheds.
All pipework shall be erected to present a neat and orderly appearance arranged to
or at right-angles to the structural member of the building, giving maximum
headroom and not obstructing window or doorways. Pipes shall bend round piers,
projections and into recesses forming part of the structural works whether so
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
indicated on the drawings or not. Pipework shall be erected such that there is a
minimum of 50 mm clear below to the finished floor level and at least 25 mm clear to
the finished wall face.
All pipework which is to be insulated shall allow space for each pipe to be insulated
around its whole circumference. Adequate clearance shall be provided between
insulated pipework running together and adjacent to walls and floors. Clearances
between insulation and floor and insulation and wall shall be as for bare pipework.
No joints shall be formed in the thickness of walls, floor slabs or roof slabs. No
pipework shall be chased into floor slabs, roof slabs or walls. During the installation
period open ends of pipework shall be capped off using purpose-made plugs or
blank counter flanges. Pipework shall be kept free of dirt and other foreign debris at
all times.
All pipework fittings, valves and other components forming the piping installation
shall be erected such that they can be dismantled and are accessible for repair and
replacement. Where valves and equipment are fitted, unions and flanges shall be
provided as appropriate for the diameter pipework in order to allow valves and
equipment removal.
All pipework shall be erected such that it may be vented and drained satisfactorily.
All low points in the system shall have draincocks fitted and high points shall have air
bottles or automatic air vents.
19.2.03 PIPE SUPPORTS, BRACKETS AND HANGERS
All pipework shall be adequately supported in such a manner as to permit free

movement due to expansion, contractions, vibration or other changes in the system.
Supports shall be arranged as near as possible to joints and changes of direction.
Spacing of supports shall comply with Table 13 contained in British Standard BS
5572 : 1978. Vertical rising pipes particularly in shafts shall be adequately supported
at the base to withstand the total weight of the riser. Under no circumstances shall
branches from vertical rising pipes be the means of support for the vertical pipework.
Pipework up to and including 65 mm diameter shall be supported clear of the

structure with cast brass brackets. Where exposed to view, bright finish brass
hospital brackets shall be used with brawl plugs and brass screws.
All multi runs of pipework within false ceilings or service shafts shall be supported on
purpose designed proprietary brackets suitable for carrying more than one pipe run,
and shall be secured using expanding plugs or other purpose designed fixing
devices. Softwood plugs shall not be allowed. All-purpose designed proprietary
brackets shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to ordering.
All Steel hangers and supporting brackets shall be painted with one coat of red oxide
and one coat of Galvanizing paint. The spacing of supports where not specified
must not exceed the spacing given in the following schedules. Where one support
carries more than one pipe diameter the spacing shall be that specified for the
smallest diameter.
Maximum spacing of supports
Nominal size Support spacing

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
of pipes Vertical pipes Horizontal pipes
54 mm 3.0 m 2.7 m
42 mm 3.0 m 2.4 m
35 mm 3.0 m 2.4 m
28 mm 2.4 m 1.8 m
26 mm 2.4 m 1.6 m
15 mm 1.8 m 1.2 m
19.2.04 PIPE SLEEVES
Pipe sleeves shall be supplied where pipework passes through walls, floors, footings
and waterproofed membranes. Sleeves shall be built in the correct locations at the
time required by the main contractor. The inside diameter of all sleeves shall not be
less than 15 mm larger than the outside diameter of the pipe passing through.
Where pipes pass through buried walls or footings, sleeves shall be 25 mm larger
than the outside diameter of the pipe passing through. The space between the pipe
sleeves shall be neatly packed using asbestos string or rope to prevent the passage
of noise, vermin or smoke. Sleeves shall not protrude beyond the finished surface.
Where pipework is exposed to view and passes through wall or floor, chromium
plated copper pipe flanges of the correct pipe diameter shall be fitted.
19.2.05 VALVES AND STOPCOCKS
All valves and stopcocks shall comply with the regulations of the Ministry of
Electricity and Water, Water Department and shall be dezincification resistant.
Valves shall be provided as shown on the drawings and detailed below or similar and
approved. All valves shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and approval
obtained in writing prior to ordering.
All valves shall be fitted in readily accessible positions. They shall be of even
thickness throughout, clean and smooth from scale. All stuffing boxes shall be
packed with material specially selected and recommended by the manufacturer for
the particular service in which each valve is used.
Non-return valves shall be screwed BSPT or flange BS 4504 : Part 2 in accordance

with the valve schedule in this specification. All non-return valves shall be suitable
for both vertical and horizontal mounting and shall be fitted in readily accessible
positions.
19.2.06 STRAINERS AND DRAIN COCKS
All strainers shall be fitted in a readily accessible position and adequate access shall
be allowed for maintenance and cleaning of strainer basket. All strainers shall be
manufactured by specialists and have a stainless steel 80 mesh screen basket.
All drain cocks shall be of the same manufacture and be in accordance with BS
2879. Generally drain cocks shall be provided at all low points in the system and
other points where necessary and as directed by the Engineer.
19.2.07 FLOAT BALL VALVES
Float ball valves on the mains shall be of equilibrium type, full bore, 6 bar
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
medium/high pressure to BS 1212 Part 1. Float ball valves shall be of delayed action
type if specified or shown on drawings. The fixing components and members for
delayed action ball valves shall be stainless steel.
19.2.08 TRENCH EXCAVATION
Excavation work shall be executed in whatever ground conditions that may be

encountered to the line and levels as detailed on the drawings.
The contractor shall be responsible for the stability of all excavations and any claim
arising from accident or damage to the public, adjoining property or labour on site.
The contractor shall provide all necessary steel sheeting, timber supports, strutting
and shoring to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer. Any slip or fall shall be
immediately made good by the contractor at his own expense and the contractor
shall take sole responsibility for any claim for damages arising out of inadequate
support of excavations.
All excavation shall be maintained dry and free from water. To achieve this the
contractor shall, without additional charge, provide all necessary pumping
equipment, sumps, drains and soakaways. The contractor shall also be responsible
for operating, running and maintaining all equipment at all times to ensure
excavations are free from water.
All obstructions shall be broken out and voids and soft spots filled with concrete
grade 15 or as otherwise instructed by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.
Granular Bedding
Pipework shall be laid on a granular bed with a minimum cover above the crown of
the pipe as follows:
1. Pipe lines 600 mm cover when there is no traffic on the ground above the
pipeline.
2. Pipe lines 1000 mm cover when there is traffic on the ground above the pipe line.
The granular bedding shall comprise grave, stone chippings or crushed stone to
pass 12 mm sieve and be retained on a 5 mm sieve mixed with free draining course
sand, in the ratio of two parts crushed stone or gravel to every one part of sand.
Bedding material shall not contain more than 0.3% sulphate nor shall it be obtained
from locations where 0.1 % sulphate is present in the ground water.
Bedding shall be laid 150 mm deep along the length of the trench and compacted
prior to work commencing on the pipe laying. After pipe laying, inspection and
testing, a further 300 mm of bedding material shall be compacted by hand above
the uppermost crown of the pipe line along its entire length. The bedding material
shall span the entire width of the trench and shall be laid in not more than 150 mm
deep layers, each layer being compacted by hand.
Laying of Pipelines and Fittings
All underground pipelines shall be laid to true levels in straight lines to even
gradients shown on the drawings. Pipeline laying shall not commence until the

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
Engineer has inspected and approved the granular bed and trench.
Care shall be taken when laying pipes that no bedding material or building debris is
pushed into the barrel of the pipe of fitting.
Backfilling Excavations
After compaction of granular bed and surround, the trench shall be backfilled using
selected excavated material free from all rocks, large hard objects and builders
debris of greater than 40 mm. Backfilling shall take place immediately after the
specified operations proceeding it have been completed and shall be in layers of 150
mm, each fully compacted over the full width of the trench. Power rammers and
vibrators shall be used compact backfilling when the cover over the crown of the pipe
exceeds 0.5 meters.
19.2.09 COLD WATER SERVICES
Underground cold water services shall comply with British Standard Code of Practice
CP 310 : 1965, CP 2010 : Part 1 : 1966 and CP 2010 : Part 3 : 1972.
All pipework up to and including 67 mm diameter shall be copper tube to BS 2871 :

PART 1 : 1971 TABLE "Y" . The tubes entire length shall be coated with a
continuous, seamless, polyethylene sheathing which shall be green in colour to
British Standard BS 1710 : 1975. All fittings shall be to British Standard BS 864 :
Part 2 : 1971 Type 'B'.
19.2.10 PIPEWORK INSULATIONS
All thermal insulation shall comply with British Standard BS 5970 : 1981 and BS
5442:1989.
All domestic hot and cold water pipes which are exposed to sun shall be insulated.
Thermal insulation to pipework shall be carried out by specialists and strictly in

accordance with this specification. No thermal insulation shall be applied to
pipework prior to pressure testing and inspection by the Engineer giving clear
instructions for further insulation applied. In order that tests may be made of the
thickness of insulation to be applied to each pipe size, plant and equipment, the
contractor shall allow for the cost of cutting away one section for each size of pipe,
plant and equipment for inspection by the Engineer. If the insulation proves to be of
the thickness specified, then the cut section shall be made good and the whole
installation completed. Should any cut section show a deficiency of thickness,
further sections shall be cut at the direction of the Engineer for inspection.
If a deficiency of thickness or any other defects are found, the contractor shall
remove the whole of the insulation installed or as the Engineer directs and then shall
supply, deliver and apply new insulation complying with the specification and restore
it to satisfaction of the Engineer. This work shall be carried out at the contractor's
own expense.
Thermal insulation shall be applied to all valves, strainers, non-return valves,

draincocks, automatic air vents and bosses for gauges/test points. Insulation of
these components in the pipework system up to and including 65 mm diameter
pipework shall be carried out using sectional insulation cut to suit and of the same
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
size as the line pipework.
No insulation shall be concealed within false ceilings or vertical and horizontal

builders works shafts prior to inspection and approval by the Engineer.
Thermal insulation shall be 25 mm thick with a density of 64 kg/m2 rigid fiberglass

sections as set down in British Standard Specification BS 5422 : 1977. The sections
shall be covered with flameproof calico lapped and pasted down using approved
adhesive and secured using aluminium bands at 1.2 m centres.
All piping, branching off to fixtures chased in the floors or wells shall be insulated
with 10 mm thick flexible fiberglass insulation covered with plastic tape applied
spirally.
Where exposed to view, the insulation shall be painted with two coats primer and
one finishing coat rubberized paint to an approved colour prior to the fixing of
aluminum bands at 1.2 m centres. The finishing colour shall be to British Standard
BS 1710 : 1975, identification of pipelines complete with direction arrows.
19.2.11 COLD WATER STORAGE TANKS
Cold water storage tanks shall be manufactured to British Standards and comply
strictly with the Water Department's Regulations of the State of Qatar. The following
tank may be used:
1. Service Building-Reinforced Concrete Storage Tanks (Domestic, Irrigation

& Fire)
The following design criteria shall be observed during construction:
a. There shall be one manhole to be positioned as follows:

i. one will be located in such a position to have easy access to the float valve
b. Stainless steel or GRP ladder shall be provided for access to the tank.
c. Vent pipe with insect guard shall be provided.
d. Water level controls (low level electric float switches interlocked) for pumps shall
be provided.
e. In case of overflow, warning system shall be provided either by level switch or by
other approved means.
f. Manholes shall be provided with at least 100mm upstaged concrete and double
sealed to prevent leakage.
g. Isolating stop-valves shall be provided in the supply and delivery lines
h. Approved non-toxic epoxy coating, resisting fungus growth shall be used on all
internal surfaces.
i. Approved tanking membrane for water tightness shall be used on external
surfaces.
The tanks shall be provided to the capacities, dimensions and locations shown on
the drawing.
2. Roof Tank
Cold water storage tanks shall be manufactured to British Standards and comply
strictly with the Water Department's Regulations of the State of Qatar. The following
tank may be used: GRP sectional water tank complete with bolted inspection cover
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
and with gunmetal pipe connections pre-molded in position. The tanks shall be
suitable for ultra violet light and comply with the National Water Council of the United
Kingdom and /or Water department of Morocco, shall be located at basement floor
level.
The tanks shall be provided to the capacities, dimensions and locations shown on
the drawing. Each tank is to be fixed on a base, which supports the whole of the
tank. The details of the tank base are to be approved by the Consultant before any
installation work begins.
The tank shall have the following additional components in addition to the
components listed above:
Low level electric float switches interlocked to their pressure pumps.

External ladder of GRP or aluminium, supplied by the Tank manufacturer.
Internal ladder of Fibre Glass or aluminium supplied by the Tank
manufacturer.
Vent with wire mesh
External graduated water level indicator
Channel base, of galvanized steel
Interconnecting pipes with valves
Overflow and drain connection
Access cover
The Contractor shall supply and assemble at Site sectional water tank of hot pressed
moulded GRP insulated panels (Glass Reinforced Plastic) of ivory grey colour
provide with lockable Manhole covers air vent with overflow and all piping
connections. GRP water tank shall be insulated with minimum 1 inch. thickness PUF
insulation of appropriate density to see to it that the temperature raise is restricted to
less than 0.5 deg F per hour. The panels shall comply with BS 7491: part 3: 1994
and shall have convex shape to assist a complete draining of water of the following
characteristics:
a. Specific gravity of 1.8

b. Tensile strength of not less then 850 kg/cm
c. Flexural strength of 1800 kg/cm to ISO 178
d. Impact strength of 80 kg/cm ISO 179
e. Thermal expansion of 2.1 x 10-5 deg. C to ATM D 696
f. Thermal conductivity of 0.6 W/ m C to BS 7491 : part 3
g. Water absorption less then 0.2 % to ISO 62.
h. Glass content more then more then 30 %
i. No light transmission.
j. Gasket of synthetic
k. Bolts and nuts of stainless steel 316 / A4
l. Frame angles and frame plates of hot dipped galvanized steel
m. External ladder of hot dipped galvanized steel
n. Internal ladder of GRP or S.S according to Manufacturer s standards.
o. Tie rods of stainless steel
p. G.R.P panel thick not less
then 8 mm q. Resin cover of
2 mm
r. Glass tube level indicator for all compartments
Guarantee letter from the manufacturer for 10 years should be obtained
19.2.12 HOT WATER SERVICE HEATERS

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
a. Central Water Heaters
The Hot water service electric heaters shall be centralized vertical floor mounted
type, factory assembled, wired and tested conforming to British Standard
specifications BS 853- 1:1996 and CP 342- 2: 1974 to the size and capacity as
shown on the relevant tender drawings.
The heating elements shall be zinc plated, copper sheathed, screw-in type
individually mounted so as to be field replaceable with standard tools. Heating
elements watt density shall not exceed 8 watts per square centimeter.
The hot water heater shall be suitable for testing pressures of 16 bars and shall be
electrically heated complying with BS 3456 Section 2.21 and be suitable for working
with 240V / 415V, 1ph/ 3ph 50 Hz Electric Supply.
The outer casing shall be complete with bottom domes and be constructed from
sheet steel subjected to anti-corrosion treatment, and finished with white stove
enamel, suitable for floor mounting with concrete plinths over an isolating pad.
The storage vessel shall be constructed to withstand working pressure of 8 bars at

70 deg.C, unless otherwise specified or indicated on drawings. Vessel interior shall
be Glass lined. It shall be insulated with polyurethane foam with flame resistant
additives to exhibit low flame transmission, classified as self-extinguishing in ASTM
1692, complying with Class P in BS 476 and with class Q in BS. 4739 or equal
alternatives. Insulation shall be sufficient to prevent standby heat loss from
exceeding 40 watts / square meter or K value of 0.02 W/m deg.C for a thickness of
25mm. Welded Lifting lugs shall be provided for safe handling with a hoist.
The water heater shall be complete with the following trim and controls:
Low Water cut-off

Thermostatic Control
Thermometer
Pressure reducing valve, gauge relief valve & Air vent.
Temperature gauge
The tank enclosure shall be minimum 1.25 mm thick in steel, and the entire
enclosure shall be finished in white enamel paint.
b. Hot Water Re-circulating Pumps
Hot water re-circulating pump shall be installed in hot water service to ensure that
hot water is available at all draw-off points with minimum delay. Re-circulating pumps
(one duty and standby) shall be in accordance with the duties indicated on the
drawings.
Hot water service circulating pumps shall be direct driven in-line pumps suitable for
horizontal or vertical mounting. The pumps shall be of the same size as the pipe
work bore. The pump shall be installed with an isolating valve, strainer or inlet, non-
return valve and isolating valve on outlet.
The centrifugal circulating pump shall be driven by an electric motor preferably of

220 volts, single phase 50 Hz electric supply. Motors shall not exceed 2900 rpm.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
19.2.13 WATER FILTERS Water
Media Filters
Filters shall be of Carbon Steel body or fiber glass and taste/odor and sediment
removal media, with suitable timer controlled automatic backwash facilities. Sizes to
suit the water demand and installed at the location(s) marked in the drawings. This is
to be located at the pump room.
Electronic Water Softener (For electric water heater cold water supply and
secondary return)
One or more electronic water conditioner shall be fitted to the electric water heater
cold water supply and hot water secondary return in accordance with the
manufacturer s recommendations. The unit shall have one or more pairs of
open ended aerials wrapped around the pipe work generating a series of square
waves of random length and occurrence between 1 kHz and 10 kHz. The peak to
peak output voltage will be in excess of 80 volts. The unit has mains input with
integral transformers, normally rated at 230 volts and the enclosure is rated IP65,
with self diagnostic guard chip and BMS output.
19.2.14 DOMESTIC HOT AND COLD WATER PUMP SETS
a) DOMESTIC WATER SUPPLY BOOSTER SYSTEM
The cold-water supply booster system (pre-assembled) shall be self priming pump
set and shall be of the centrifugal multi stage type as stated on the drawings.
The pre-assembled booster pumping system shall be direct run with drip-proof
electric motors. The pump shall be provided with isolating valve on inlet and outlet,
together with a strainer on the suction line and non-return valve fitted on the delivery
line. Three numbers pressurized tank of stainless steel construction for maximum
hygiene, with bottom valve, stainless steel check valve and spring shall be
incorporated, all pre-assembled on one stainless steel baseplate and equipped with
electrical panel to control and protect the system. Pressure switch and pressure
gauges, check valve, tank valve shall be installed in pipe work.
Automatic control of the pressure pump set shall be by means of high/low level float
switches located in the storage tank and pressure switches. The pressure switches
shall be arranged to start/stop the pressure pump set to maintain the set pressure
within the distribution piping network.
A low-level float switch shall be incorporated in the underground level cold-water

storage tank and arranged such that it prevents the pump set operating in the
event of no water. Provision shall also be made within the controls for a duty pump
selector switch. This selector switch shall allow duty pump No. 1 and duty pump
NO. 2 to be changed over.
Pump casings shall be manufactured from high-density cast iron to BS 1452 with
stainless steel shafts to BS 970 and high-grade stainless steel impellers to BS
1400. Pump motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled, drip-proof
squirrel cage, conforming to British Standards and shall be suitable for continuous
operation in temperatures of 50 deg. C. Motor speed shall not exceed 2900 rpm
and shall be suitable for running in ambient temperatures of 50 deg. C.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
The electrical control panel cubicle shall be manufactured from mild steel sheet,
finished in stove enameled hammer finish and fitted with all motor starter, fuse gear,
door isolator, selector switches, indicator lights and all relays, timers, etc. to provide
sequence control.
Interconnecting pipework headers and manifolds shall be fabricated from copper

tube fittings as previously described. PVC and galvanized mild steel shall not be
permitted.
19.2.15 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
Wherever is required even not shown on the tender drawing, it is the contractors
responsibility to provide the system - a pressure reducing valve(s) if the distribution
system available pressure is above in relation to the fixture pressure requirement
being offered.
This is to prevent damaged and leaks that may cause and fault that may arise due
to over pressure since note that location of fixtures are installed in different levels
throughout the building.
19.2.16 STERILIZATION OF WATER SERVICES
All pipework, fittings and storage tanks shall be sterilized starting with the
external water supplies, storage tanks and finally the water distribution system.
No sterilization shall be carried out until the system has been flushed out
and approval received in writing from the Engineer to commence sterilization.
The following procedure shall be adopted for sterilization of the water

distribution systems:
a. Flush out all tanks, pipework,

etc.
b. Recharge all water systems adding sufficient sterilization chemical to a

concentration of 1-2 parts per million. The concentration shall be confirmed
by using a measuring instrument approved by the water department.
c. Starting with the draw-off point nearest the cold water storage tank, each draw-
off point shall be opened until chlorine odour is present at each draw-off.
d. When all draw-off points have discharged chlorinated water, the cold water
storage tanks shall be recharged adding sufficient sterilization chemical to give
the correct concentration of 1-2 parts per million of chlorine. The system shall
then remain charged for a minimum period of one hour.
e. The water shall then be chemically analyzed. Should no residual chlorine be

found, the test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained.
f. Drain down all storage tanks and pipework, flushing out tank and pipework, and
run the system clean prior to retesting of the water to ensure no residual chlorine
is present.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
g. Finally a sample of tank water shall be taken to the Water Department for testing.
The results of these tests shall be forwarded to the Engineer for his approval.
19.2.17 SWIMMING POOL
The contractor shall be responsible for supply, installation testing and commissioning
for complete works of swimming pool with the following equipments as shown in the
Tender Drawings:
Filtration System
Circulating Pumps
Pool Accessories
Over Flow Grating System
Under Water Lights
Chemical Treatment
Heater
Control Panel
Balance Tank
For more details please refer to swimming pool piping layout.
19.2.18 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM FOR ROOF TANK
The compressor used is a hermetic refrigerant gas cooled with thermal overload
protection in each phase. The terminal box is rain-tight, direct-on-line-starting. With
high performance and efficiency and low sound. Air cooled condenser are designed
to deliver their respective duties at optimum performance for all design conditions.
Coils are manufactured from seamless copper tubes mechanically-expanded into
aluminium fins. All coils are tested at 450 psi, air pressure, under water to avoid
leakage. All condenser fans are of propeller (axial) type, which are directly mounted
on the motor shaft. Fan blades are made of corrosion resistance material, and are
statically and dynamically balanced before installation. This offers a low noise
operation with high efficiency performance. All condenser fans are equipped with
wire guards. All condenser fan motors are of induction type totally enclosed air-
cooled, squirrel-cage type, internal thermal current protected and with class F
insulation and IP 55.
Chiller Inlet Temperature: 40 deg. C

Chiller Outlet Temperature: 28 deg. C
Ambient Temperature: 46 deg. C
Chiller Capacity: 60 KW (17 TR)
Pump Flow rate: 42 GPM, 70 FT (Duty/Standby)
Thermal insulation of chilled water pipe shall be 50mm thick with a density of 48
kg/m rigid fibreglass sections as set down in British Standard Specifications BS
5422: 2001. The sections shall be covered with flameproof calico lapped and pasted
down using approved adhesive and secured using aluminium bands at 1.2m centres.
Where exposed to view, the insulation shall be protected with aluminium cladding of
0.7mm thickness.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
19.2.19 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
General Setting Out of Work and Commissioning

The contractor, having ensured that water, electricity and other necessary supplies
are available, shall set to work the completed works or part thereof, at the instruction
of the Consultant and make the necessary adjustments to ensure correct
functioning.
After the installation or part thereof has been set to work and adjusted, the contractor
shall demonstrate its operation, at a time selected by and to the satisfaction of the
Consultant. Test shall be in accordance with British Standard Code of Practice BS
6700 : 1997.
The test shall demonstrate:
a. That equipment provided complies with the specification in all particulars and is
of adequate capacity for its full rates of duty.
b. That all items of plant and equipment operate sufficiently quietly to meet the
specified requirements.
c. That all instruments, protection and control devices, etc., are correctly
calibrated and accurate.
d. That all water systems are properly balanced, vented, and operates satisfactorily
under test pressure.
The details of method of carrying out the recording of tests shall be agreed with the
Consultant. The Client's representative and the consultant shall be at liberty to be
present at test and to participate in the tests. This shall not relieve the contractor of
his responsibilities for carrying out the tests satisfactorily.
The contractor shall make all the records during the tests and on completion thereof,
shall provide the Consultant with a test report and record both in triplicate.
The contractor shall also provide all test instruments, together with skilled
supervision and adequate labor for carrying out the tests.
Pipe Work Pressure Testing

All pipework services shall be subjected to a test of 500 kN/m2 or one and half times
working pressure whichever is the greater, for not less than 24 hours.
Where pipework is tested in sections, all valves shall be blanked off temporarily
using plugs or blank flanges. The valve wedge shall not be used to retain the water.
The pipework services shall be charged with water allowing all air to escape and
avoiding shock or water hammer. The test pressure gauge shall be mounted within
the pipework system with a loop and cock and shall be calibrated such that the test
pressure falls above its mid-range.
The contractor shall carry out his own test first to ensure there are no leaks prior to
requesting the Consultant to witness the test. The witnessed test shall be
maintained for a minimum of 4 hour without measurable loss and without further
pumping.
Pipework main laid in ground shall be tested for 24 hours and leakage shall be
measured by the quantity of water pumped into the main under test. Leakage shall

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
not exceed five litres per 25 mm of pipe diameter per 1750 meter length of pipe for
33 meters head pressure in a period of 24 hours.
The Consultant shall witness all pipework tests. The contractor shall give the
Consultant a minimum of 24 hours notice of all tests. The contractor shall also
provide test sheets set out in an agreed manner of each pipework section to be
tested.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
IRRIGATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
The purpose of this project is to supply, install and commission an automated

irrigation system with all related components for the Proposed Headquarter of
General Directorate of Boarders Passports, Expatriates Affairs and Nationality and
Travel Documents Department in Wadi Al Banat, Doha, Qatar consisting of field AC
electric control valves, control wires, filter, integrated dripper lines, drippers, flush
valves, and central control system
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of work shall be read in conjunction with the contract material
specifications, contract drawings and installation details and it includes but not limited
to the following:
A. The contractor shall prepare the shop drawings showing but not limited to The
Main line, Laterals, solenoid valves, control wires route and numbers, Irrigation
Controllers, integrated dripper lines, on line drippers, Bubblers and flush valves.
B. The contractor shall submit for client approval the technical information and
samples of the material he intends to use which should be in accordance with the
material specifications of this project.
C. The contractor shall commission the irrigation system upon completing the work
and then shall be handed over.
D. The contractor and upon completing the work shall provide the client with four
original sets of As-Built drawings accurately reflecting the executed works and
installation details.
E. The contractor shall upon completing the works provide the client with detailed
Operation and Maintenance Manuals (With applicable Arabic translations) in four
originals. The manuals shall include but not limited to; complete and marked
literature of all products used on the project and its reordering part numbers. It
shall also include a list of the recommended spare parts for a period of 5 years. It
shall include original print of the As Built drawings.
F. The client prior to issuing the Project Handing Over Certificate shall approve the
As-Built Drawings and the Operation & maintenance Manual.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of irrigation

equipment, central control systems, pumps and fittings whose products have
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.
B. Installers: Firms regularly engaged in the installation of irrigation works of a

similar quality and scope as this project for at least 5 years.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
1.04 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
ISO R 161 Confirming to German Standards Din 8061 & 19532
BS: CP312 - Code of Practice for Plastics Pipe work (Thermoplastic Materials) of a
uPVC Pipe work and Fittings
BS: 1780 - Specification for bourdon tube pressure and vacuum gauges.
BS: 3505 - Specification for uPVC pressure pipes for cold potable water.
BS: 4346 - Joints and fittings for use with uPVC pressure pipes.
BS: 5150 - Specification for cast iron wedge and double disk gate valves for
general purposes.
BS: 5154 - Specification for copper alloy globe, globe stop and check, check and
gate valves for general purposes
BS: 8010 - Code of practice for pipelines.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings - The contractor to prepare the project shop drawings in 6 sets
which to be approved by the client representative prior to commencing installation
work. The shop drawings shall show but not limited to valves, control wires route
and numbers and controllers location
B. Products The contractor shall submit for client approval prior to commencing
installation works; the products he intends to use with all technical details and
literature in accordance with the specifications below.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals-The contractor shall submit 6 sets of the

detailed Operation & Maintenance Manual with equipment reordering codes and
literature.
D. As-Built Drawings- The contractor shall submit 6 sets of the complete project as-
built drawings reflecting the actual site installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All primary distribution pipe work shall be Un plasticized Polyvinyl Chloride

(uPVC) to Class 5
B. All primary distribution pipe fittings shall be solvent welded uPVC 16 bar
C. As an alternative to the Specifications in items A&B, uPVC pipe work confirming

to BS 3505 Class E and fittings to BS 4346 of equivalent pressure rating may be
used.
D. Un-plasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes:
1. All uPVC pipes shall be manufactured in Qatar or equal local manufacturer

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
approved by the client and consultant. They shall be Class E (16 Bar) / Class D
(10 Bar) as per BOQ and confirm to ISO 4422. Pipes up to 90 MM nominal
diameter shall have solvent welded joints and pipes of 110 mm and above
diameter shall have rubber ring sealing pipes.
2. Pipes may be supplied in random lengths no length smaller than six meters.
Each pipe shall legibly and indelibly marked with manufacturing standard, the
manufactures name, date of manufacture, nominal bore and working pressure /
class. Pipe shall be smooth finished inside and outside and shall show no
evidence of blisters, grooves or other extrusion marks. The contractor shall
provide three samples of all size pipes of one meter in length for approval prior
to installation of any plastic pipe.
3. On no account shall uPVC saddle type connection to be made for solenoid
valve assembly.
4. The Engineer shall select samples during the course of the works from each
size of pipe for testing by an independent authority to ensure strict compliance
with the ISO Specification. All cots of packing, shipping, testing, reporting and
the like for all such test shallbe deemed to be included in the tender price.
E. Fittings
1. All uPVC fittings shall be ISO/DIN Specification and have a minimum rating of
16 kg/cm2 at 20 degree C Fittings shall be suitable for use with the above
specified pipes. Where uPVC flanges are required these shall be drilled to
NP16 as detailed in BS 7622 and BS 4772. All fittings above 160 mm shall be
fusion bonded epoxy coated ductile iron or cast flanged GRP. The Contractor
shall use only fittings that are approved by the Engineer. All nuts and bolts
shall be 316 stainless steel.
F. uPVC Cement Thinner and Tape
1. uPVC cement and thinner shall be of the type approved by the Engineer. All
cans of solvent and primer shall have labels intact and shall be stamped with the
date of manufacture and shelf life. No cans with an expired shelf life will be
permitted. Joints compound for threaded connections shall be PTFE tape or
approved equal thread sealant.
G. Underground Warning Tape
1. Marking tape shall be laminated polyethylene and aluminum foil construction

capable of detection by low output generator equipment.
2. Tapes shall remain legible and colour fast in all soil conditions at pH values of
2.5 to 11.0 inclusive.
3. Warning tape for irrigation pipe lines shall be yellow / orange in color as
approved by engineer.
4. Tape shall not less than 150 mm wide and shall have the phrase
IRRIGATION PRESSURE MAIN or
CAUTION IRRIGATION PIPE LINE AND CONTROL CABLES

in English and Arabic stamped in black letters and repeated at maximum intervals
of two meters.
H. Flexible Piping for on line drippers:
1. Flexible Pipes for irrigation on line drippers shall be in the required sizes as
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
shown on the drawings and B.O.Q extruded from linear low density
polyethylene version raw material. Pipes shall be resistant to algae and
ultraviolet deterioration with Carbon Black content not less than 2.25 %.
2.02 APPLICATION DEVICES
SPRAY POP-UP SPRINKLER
The sprinkler shall be equipped with an adjustable arc (1-360 ) nozzle discharging
4.3 gpm, for the full circle and it shall be available in sizes to cover up to a radius of
17 feet at a pressure of 25 psi.
The sprinkler nozzle shall automatically adjust the flow depending on the arc setting
in order to have a matched precipitation rate. It shall be an integral part of the riser
assembly that can not be removed, and has the ability to open fully to allow flushing.
It shall have grooves on the inner surface to allow dirt to go out of the nozzle easily.
The sprinkler shall have radius reduction capability by means of a stainless steel, arc
and radius adjustment screw. It shall also be possible to adjust arc and radius from
the top of the riser assembly, using an adjustment key. This adjustment shall be
possible in all the phases of installation (before and after installation, while static and
while operating).
The sprinkler shall have an inlet screen of length not less than 100 mm. It shall have
30 mm exposed diameter after installation. The body and riser of the sprinkler shall
be constructed of non-corrodible, heavy duty A.B.S The sprinkler shall accept a drain
check valve, installed in the field from in the base of the riser to prevent drainage.
The sprinkler shall carry a one-year, exchange warranty (not prorated).
ROTOR POP-UP SPRINKLER (8 12m radius)
The sprinkler shall be of the gear-driven, closed case rotary type, capable of covering
a 14 (meter) radius at 50 PSI with a discharge rate of 5.5 GPM. The sprinkler shall
have a patent gear drive reversing mechanism.
The sprinkler shall be available with eight standard nozzles discharging from 0.9 to
8.2 GPM or four low-angle nozzles discharging from 1.6 to 4.7 GPM.
The sprinkler shall have radius adjustment capabilities by means of a stainless-steel

nozzle retainer/radius adjustment screw. It shall be available in both full-circle and
adjustable part-circle configurations. The adjustable part circle unit shall be minutely
adjustable from 40 to 360. The adjustable unit shall be adjustable in all phases of
installation i.e., before installation, after installation while static, and after installation
while in operation.
The sprinkler shall have a FloStop feature that will enable the user to stop the water
flow through an individual sprinkler head. The sprinkler shall have a constant rotation
speed irrespective of the nozzle installed. It shall have a minimum of 4-inch (100-mm)
pop-up stroke to bring the rotating nozzle turret into a clean environment.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
The sprinkler shall have a thick rubber cover firmly attached to the top of the sprinkler
riser. It shall be equipped with a drain check valve to prevent low head drainage, and
be capable of checking up to 10 feet (3, 0 m) in elevation change.
It shall have an exposed surface diameter after installation at least 40 mm.
The sprinkler shall have an overall height of 19 cm. The sprinkler shall have a 3/4-inch
Female National Pipe Thread (FNPT) inlet. The sprinkler shall be serviceable after
installation in the field by unscrewing the body cap, removing the riser assembly, and
extracting the inlet filter screen.
The body of the sprinkler shall be constructed of non-corrodible, heavy-duty A.B.S. It

shall have a stainless steel spring for positive retraction of the riser when irrigation is
complete. The sprinkler shall have a stainless steel riser and shall carry a five-year,
exchange warranty.
DRIPPER LINES AND DRIPPERS
Integrated Dripper Lines For Ground Cover and Shrub Beds
The dripper line shall consist of a ultra violet resistant low density Linear
polyethylene tube with internal pressure compensating continuously self cleaning
integral flat drippers welded to the inside of wall of the tube at the specified spacing
as an integral part of the tubing assembly.
The tube shall have a 17mm or 16 mm outside diameter.
The dripper shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and
a self cleaning EPDM diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. It shall have
an inlet filter raised from the wall of the tubing. It shall have the ability to
independently regulate discharge rates with a constant flow at an inlet pressure of 7-
70 psi.
The drippers shall have a manufacturers coefficient of variability (CV) of 0.03 or less.
The dripper discharge shall be 0.4, 0.61, or 0.92 gph utilizing a combination turbulent
flow/reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and an EPDM diaphragm to
maintain uniform discharge rates. It shall also be continuously self-cleaning during
operation and under pressure and have a flow exponent X = 0 and a Kd of 1.3.
The dripper flow versus pressure shall be tested by an independent organization

such as the Center of Irrigation Technology, and shall have available reports to be
presented upon request.
The dripper flow shall not be affected by temperature up to 60 degrees Celsius and
shall not have a spike at start up.
The filtration requirement of the dripper shall be a maximum of 80-120 mesh.
The dripper line shall have a 7 years guarantee against solar radiation and 5 years
warranty against manufacturing defects.
Drippers for Trees and Palm Trees
The dripper shall be single outlet and it shall have a fixed flow of 24 Liters per Hour
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
(6.34 Gallons Per Hour) for a pressure range of 7-60 psi.
The dripper shall have an independent pressure compensation mechanism with dual
regulation having an EPDM diaphragm and a turbulent flow labyrinth path. It shall be
continuously self-cleaning during operation and under pressure.
The dripper shall have a flow path of the following dimensions: depth 0.057, width
0.053, and length 0.59.It shall have no emission spike at low pressure start ups of 7
PSI. It shall also be provided with a built-in anti-siphon mechanism to prevent suction
of external impurities.
The dripper shall have a color coded cap to identify flow.
The drippers shall have the Anti-Leak mechanism to prevent water draining out of
the dripper at a pressure of 7 PSI. It shall have a barbed inlet having an inlet filter.
The dripper shall have a Coefficient of Manufacturing Uniformity (CV) 0.03 or less.
Drippers for Scattered Shrubs and Ground Cover
The dripper shall be single outlet and it shall be available with a flow of 4, and 8
Liters per Hour (LPH) and shall be of the pressure compensating and continuously
self-cleaning type.
The dripper shall have an independent pressure compensation mechanism with dual
regulation having an EPDM diaphragm and a turbulent flow labyrinth path.
The dripper shall have a uniform flow rate at a pressure range of 7-60 psi and shall
have no flow emission spike at start up low pressure of 7 PSI.
The dripper shall have a built in anti-siphon mechanism to prevent suction of external
impurities with the need of dust cap. It shall have the Anti-Leak mechanism to
prevent water draining out of the dripper at a pressure of 7 PSI.
The dripper shall have a nipple outlet with color coded cap to identify flow for each
type.
It shall have a barbed inlet having an inlet filter.
The dripper shall have a Coefficient Of Manufacturing Variation (CV) 0.03 less.
BUBBLERS
The bubbler shall be of the pressure compensating type having a fixed flow under a
pressure range of 20 to 90 PSI. It shall be constructed of corrosion and UV resistant
plastic material.
The bubbler shall have an integral electrometric flow bushing to maintain a constant
flow at different pressure range.
The bubbler shall have a plastic screen filter to protect it from debris that could be
available in the water. It shall have a inch female threaded inlet (FNPT) for
connection to a inch male threaded riser.
The bubbler shall be available in 0.25, 0.5, 1.0 and 2.0 GPM flow rates. The bubbler
shall carry a two years warranty

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
VALVES
Remote Control Electric Solenoid Valves
The electrical solenoid valves shall be of the globe type normally closed,
electronically actuated, diaphragm operated.
The valves body and bonnet shall be molded of non-corrodible, glass-reinforced

nylon, rated at an operating pressure of 200 PSI. The body of the valve shall have
brass inserts, with through holes, which will accept the bonnet Stainless steel bolts.
The diaphragm shall be of molded construction, reinforced with nylon fabric. A

heavy-duty removable seat shall be available to protect and support the diaphragm.
The valve shall be equipped with an internal filter as well with a self-cleaning
metering rod, so only clean water can enter the solenoid chamber. A filter cleaning
system ,that continuously cleans the filter when the valve is operating, shall be
available.
The valve shall be equipped with a flow control mechanism with handle, which
regulates the flow from full on to completely off. It shall have an accurate set
pressure regulator, to keep the downstream pressure constant after setting it. The
regulator shall be of the top dial model with clearly shown pressure values in bars
and PSI. It shall regulate the flow at a pressure range of 20 to 100 PSI.
The valve shall be available in 1, 1.5, 2 and 3 inch size and it shall have a BSP
female thread inlet and outlet. It shall accommodate a flow rate from 0.1 gpm (1size)
to 200 gpm (2size)
The valve shall have a 24 volts 60 cycle solenoid with a 370 mA in-rush current and
190 mA holding current.
The solenoid shall be an encapsulated, one-piece unit with a captive plunger. The
Valve shall be equipped with a manual internal bleed only giving the capability to
release the upper chamber water to the down stream piping, allowing the valve to
open. No external bleed shall be available
The valve shall carry a five years exchange warranty.
Plastic Glass Nylon Hydraulic Control Valves
The electrical solenoid valves shall be of the globe type normally closed, 3 way
hydraulic type electronically actuated, diaphragm operated.
The valves body and bonnet shall be molded of non-corrodible, glass-reinforced

nylon, with a maximum operating pressure of 200 PSI.
The valve shall be controlled with a hydraulic control signal. It shall be equipped to
operate with a Radio Valve Actuator. The actuator shall be designed and the same
manufacturer of the Irrigation Central Control System.
The Valve diaphragm shall be made of EPDM, highly resistant to chemicals and
fertilizers.
The internal pilot shall have a large full bleed path to allow the valve working with low
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
quality Treated Sewage Effluent water without any clogging.
The valve shall be equipped with a flow control mechanism with handle, which
regulates the flow from full on to completely off. It shall have an insert able field
installed pressure regulating module, to ensure constant downstream pressure.
The valve shall be available in 1.5 and 2 inch size and it shall have a BSP female
thread inlet and outlet.
The valves shall accommodate a flow rate from 0.4 gpm to 150 gpm with a pressure
loss of 4.4 psi at 105 gpm flow in the 2 hydraulic globe valve, and 7.1 psi in the
1.5size.
Cast Iron Electric / Manual Hydraulic Control Valves
The Control Valve shall be made of epoxy coated cast iron. It shall be of the
hydraulic type with 3-way pilot design. The electric version shall be operated by 5
watts electric solenoid actuator.
The Valve shall be able to be outfitted in a number of combinations of control

functions including manual, solenoid , pressure reducing, and pressure sustaining
flow control, pump control, quick release slow closing and two way control.
The valve shall be of the flow through design with the diaphragm used as the direct
sealing surface. It shall be fully serviceable in place without removal from the line.
The valve shall have a minimum pressure rating of 200 psi. The only moving parts
inside the valves shall be the diaphragm and the spring. The valve diaphragm shall
be of natural rubber and it shall be available in nitrile and EPDM
The valve shall be available in sizes 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 18and 20.
PVC Electric Hydraulic Control Valve
The Valve shall be made of PVC material rated at 8 bars and of hydraulic type. It
shall be of available in 3 inch and 4 sizes.
The inlet and outlet connections of the valve shall be of the solvent weld type. The
valve shall be of the flow through design, and of the diaphragm direct closing type
which will allow very low friction loss at high flows.
The valve shall be of the normally closed type with a normally open 3-way solenoid
24VAC installed from outside. It shall be operated manually by means of a three-way
selector knob.
The internal parts of the valve shall be only a natural rubber diaphragm and a spring.
The valve shall be serviceable in place just by unscrewing and removing the top. It
shall also have the possibility of adding controls such as pressure regulation,
pressure sustaining, etc.
Quick Pressure Relief Valve
The valve shall be of bronze construction 2size with angle configuration.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
The valve shall be of the flow through design with the diaphragm used as the direct
sealing surface. It shall be fully serviceable in place without removal from the line
and shall have a minimum pressure rating of 200 psi.
The valve shall have a pressure pilot for the adjustment of the pressure setting. It
shall immediately open fully when the network pressure exceeds the set pressure.
The valve shall close slowly as the network pressure drops in order to prevent shock
to the system and the on/off cycling of the pump.
The valve shall also be available in sizes 3, 4, 6, and 8 with flanged connections.
Check Valves
The valve shall be of constructed of Aerospace quality composite and stainless steel
(SAE 303) materials, 100% non-corrosive. It shall allow flow in one direction by the
action of a spring loaded flap which closes against a rubber seal. The spring and the
flap shall be connected via a moment arm in order to ensure that the spring pressure
is maximum when the valve is closed.
The valve shall have a pressure rating of 16 bars. It shall have an external position
indicator that may be made electric for signaling a control system.
The valve shall be available in 3, 4, and 6size.
Air Release Valves
Air relief valves shall be of the sizes shown on the Drawings and shall be of the
kinetic/automatic type that will automatically release air when the lines are being
filled with water and when air entrapment occurs while the system is working.
The Valves shall be of the 2size with plastic or brass male base. The body of the
valve shall be constructed heavy duty plastic.
The working components of the valve shall be constructed of 100% corrosion

resistant materials to ensure maximum life and minimum water loss due to leaks.
The Air Release valve shall employ rolling seal mechanism made of EPDM and shall
remain open even when pipeline air pressure reaches 10 psi.
Line End Auto Flush Valve
The automatic line end flush valve shall allow for temporary, automatic flushing of
irrigation lateral lines during pressurization of the system.
The valve shall be designed in a way that it will not close prematurely at high
pressure. It shall allow for disassembly for servicing. It shall have a operating
pressure range of 15 to 57 psi.
The valve shall be constructed entirely of non-corrosive plastic with a silicon

diaphragm. No springs shall be employed in the operation of the valve.
The connection of the valve shall be either inch male thread or 17 mm insert.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
Quick Coupling Valves
The Valve shall be operated by insertion of a compatible hollow coupler key.
The valve shall be operated by a 90 turn in clockwise direction with reverse turn for
closure and be capable of 360-swivel action.
The valves shall be of the low-pressure loss type.
The Valve Body shall be made from brass material and have the two-section type
with removable upper body. It shall be supplied with spring loaded locking cover
made from thermoplastic rubber. The cover spring shall be of stainless steel material.
Gate Valves
Gate valves shall be designed for a working pressure of not less than 10 bar and
water operating temperature of 45 C.
Valves shall be the same size as the incoming line size with a clear waterway equal
to the full nominal diameter of the valves and shall be opened by turning
counterclockwise.
The operating nut or wheel shall have an arrow cast in valve indicating the direction
of opening.
Valves smaller than 3 shall be all bronze or brass conforming to BS 5154 with
screwed and connections. Valves 3 and larger shall be cast iron body, and shall
conform to BS 5150 with flange end connections.
Valve Boxes
The valve boxes shall have enclosures, which are injected molded polyofin plastic
with ultra violet additives, according to ASTM-D-V1248. It shall be light in weight with
reduced side angles and increased break resistance.
The valve box shall be non-conductive or sparking.
The valve boxes shall be available in sizes 910, 1015, 1320, 1324 depending on
installation requirements as per scope of work, specifications and drawings.
REGULAR CONTROLLERS AND CONTROL CABLES
Irrigation Control Cables
The irrigation control cables shall be used between the solenoid valves and the
irrigation controllers. The cables shall be of the single conductor type UF and they
shall be engineered for direct burial use.
The wires shall be of the solid or stranded construction with soft bare copper
conductor. They shall have extra heavy thickness of special polyvinyl chloride
insulation highly resistant to the saline, acid or alkaline contaminants.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
The copper conductors of the wires shall meet the requirements of ASTM B-3, B-8.
The thermoplastic insulation shall meet ASTM D-2219. All irrigation wires shall have
surface printing on insulation.
Irrigation Controllers
The controller shall be of a modular design with a standard 8-station model. There
shall be an insert able add-on 4 station and 8 station modules that enable the
controller to be customized from 8 stations up to 48 stations in 4 or 8 stations
increments.
The controller shall have three independent programs (A,B,C) with 8 start times per
program and one program (D) that can run concurrently with the other programs.
Watering time shall be available from 1 minute to 2 hours in 1-minute increment per
station in programs A, B and C and from 1 minute to 12 hours in program D.
The controller shall have 4 weekly schedule options to choose from: 7-day calendar,
31 days calendar, odd days programming and even days programming.
The controller shall also have a 365 days calendar clock to accommodate true odd
even watering. All programming shall be accomplished by use of a programming dial
and selection buttons with user feed back by LCD display.
The controller shall be equipped by a rain sensor.
The controller shall have a cycle and soak scheduling capability that allows a cycle to
be programmed for up to 60 minutes and a soak period up to 60 minutes.
The controller shall have a seasonal adjust feature that allows for station run times to
be changed from 10% to 150% in 10% increments to compensate for weather
changes.
The controller shall have automatic short circuit detection.
The controller shall be equipped with a programmable pump circuit that can activate
the pump start relay by zone. It shall have a programmable delay between valve
stations.
Programs backup shall be provided by a non-volatile memory circuit that will hold the
program, time and date indefinitely.
The controller shall have a Stainless Steel cabinet and it shall be pedestal mounted.
The pedestal shall be stainless steel.
The controller shall be compatible with a programming kit (SRP) that transfer the
irrigation program from a personal computer and upload them into the memory of the
controller.
Automatic Filtration System
The filtration system shall consist of a disc filter Battery having 2 or more 4units
depending on the flow and the water quality as specified on the drawings. Each unit
shall be capable to filter 415 gpm of average quality water.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
Each filtration unit shall have 5 Nos. 3 disc filter elements enclosed in Anodized
Aluminum Housing with Stainless steel Clamp and EPDM O-ring seals.
The filter elements shall be of the grooved disc design providing both surface and
depth filtration in a compact package.
The grooved discs shall be fitted on a spine in a way that when the filter fills with
filtrate the ring compress to prevent the outflow water. They shall be manufactured
and laser cut so the width of each groove shall be constant from inside to out.
The grooves in the disc shall be cut at an angle so that the grooves on the upper disc
shall intersect with those on the lower disc.
The filter battery shall be equipped with a fully automatic backwash mechanism
consisting of 4x 3 backwash valves and a backwash controller.
The backwash system shall work on pressure differential and/or time.
The backwash valves shall be plastic that accepts victual connection.
During the backwash process the discs of the elements shall spin under the water
pressure coming out from the outlets of the spine to ensure complete cleaning of the
discs.
The filtration units shall be assembled on epoxy coated steel manifolds.
The maximum operating pressure shall be 10 bars and the minimum pressure at the
battery outlet shall be 3.5 bars
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PROTECTION
A. All materials shall be shipped or otherwise conveyed in such a manner as to

assure no damage. All boxes shall be securely sealed and clearly marked with
the name of the manufacturer. All pipes shall be protected from crimping,
crushing and splitting. All non-metallic system components shall be protected
from sunlight exposure as per the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Work and materials shall be protected from damage during storage, handling and
construction. Particularly, non-metallic pipes and fittings shall be protected from
direct sunlight during storage. Facilities of the necessary dimensions shall be pro-
vided and maintained for storage of all non-metallic irrigation materials in their
entirety. All non-metallic materials shall be handled carefully and stored under
cover to avoid damage. Pipes that have been damaged or dented will not be
used in this work.
C. In addition to the provisions for the protection of non-metallic components,

special attention shall be given to the protection of the control system compo-
nents; protection shall be provided as per the manufacturer's written
recommendations.
D. Openings into the system, apparatus and equipment shall be securely covered,
both before and after being set in place, to prevent obstruction in the pipes and
the breakage, misuse or disfigurement of the apparatus or equipment.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
E. Barricades, guards, warning signs and lights as necessary or required, for the
protection of the public and the work force shall be provided.
F. Utilities: The location of existing underground utilities shall be determined and the
works performed in a manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand exca-
vation, as required shall be carried out to minimize the possibility of damage to
existing underground utilities.
3.02 PERFORMANCE
A. Layout and Verification:
1. The Contractor shall stake-out the locations of all pipe and valves and the layout
of work as accurately as possible.
2. The Contractor shall verify all horizontal and vertical site dimensions prior to
staking.
3. The Contractor will be responsible for relocating any existing services after first
obtaining the Engineer's approval. The Contractor shall remove and relocate
such services, at his own expense, if so directed by the Engineer.
4. Before starting work on irrigation systems, the Contractor shall carefully check all
grades to determine that work may safely proceed, keeping within the specified
material depths.
5. Fittings installed on pipes beneath pavements or walls shall be shown on

drawings.
6. All changes shall be recorded daily on the " As-Built" worksheets.
3.03 INSPECTION
A. The Contractor shall inspect all products for damage immediately before
installation. Any products that are found to be damaged or not in accordance with
the specifications shall immediately be repaired or removed from the site and
replaced. Repairs shall not be undertaken without the Engineer's approval of
Contractor's proposed action.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Excavation and backfilling shall be in accordance with detail drawings.
B. In bedding and backfilling granular material shall be used below and above the
pipes. The back fill material shall be free of stones bigger than
C. Cast-in-place concrete shall be in accordance shall be in accordance with the

common civil works standards covering the concrete class, shattering work,
curing procedures etc.
D. All products shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction

and the Drawings.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
E. Location of Irrigation Lines:
1. Where the location of an irrigation line is not clearly dimensioned on the

Drawings, the irrigation line shall not be laid horizontally closer than 3.0
meters from a sewer.
2. However, where the bottom of the irrigation line will be at least 0.3 meters
above the top of the sewer pipe, the irrigation line shall not be laid closer
horizontally than 1.5 meters from the sewer.
3. Where irrigation lines cross under gravity-flow sewer lines, the sewer pipe
shall be fully encased in concrete, for a distance of at least 3.0 meters each
side of the crossing or shall be made of pressure pipe with no joint located
within 1.0 meters horizontally of the crossing.
4. Irrigation lines shall, in all cases, cross 0.6 meter above sewage pressure
mains.
5. Generally, where the irrigation distribution or secondary main with

accompanying cable bundle is running under hard surfaces or landscaped
areas the pipe and the cables will be directly buried in a clean sand bed with
a marker tape above. At road junctions or other locations where pipes cross
the road they shall be contained in a direct buried PVC sleeve. The sleeve
shall extend beyond the road crossing by at least one meter on both sides.
The sleeve shall be a minimum of 100 mm diameter, and for larger pipes will
be at least 25mm greater in diameter than the pipe running through it.
6. Header mains shall be direct buried in sand in the landscaped areas only.
F. Placing and Laying
1. Pipes shall not be laid in water or when trench conditions are otherwise
unsuitable for the work. Water shall be kept out of the trench until the material
in the joints has hardened or until caulking or jointing is completed. When
work is not in progress, open ends of the pipe, fittings, and valves shall be
securely closed so that no substance will enter the pipes or fittings.
2. Pipe ends left for future connections shall be valved, plugged or capped, and
anchored, as shown or as directed. Pipes that have the grade or joint
disturbed after laying shall be taken up and relaid.
3. All piping with the exception of the flexible irrigation drip line shall be
surrounded by a sand bed to the dimensions as shown on the Drawings.
G. Plastic Pipes
It shall be installed in accordance with BS 8010: Part 1 and the Manufacturer's

recommendations. Pipes with threaded joints shall be snaked from side to side of the
trench to allow for expansion and contraction.
H. Jointing
1. Pipe joints of uPVC shall be installed in accordance with recommendations of the

manufacturer. Excess jointing material shall be removed.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
2. uPVC male adaptors with specified threaded joint compounds to make

connections between plastic pipe and valves shall be used as detailed, and
tightened with light wrench pressure.
I. Concrete thrust blocks shall be constructed on main pipelines at all changes in

direction or size. The thrust blocks shall be un-reinforced concrete and shall
have a minimum dimension of 300 mm. The pipelines shall be located centrally
in the thrust blocks.
J. Irrigation piping from the remote control valve boxes to the end of the irrigation
drip lines shall be buried to the depths as shown on the Drawings.
K. Closing of Pipe and Flushing Lines:
1. Closing: Openings in piping systems shall be capped or plugged, leaving caps

and plugs in place until removal is necessary for completion of the installation.
Dirt and debris shall be prevented from entering pipe or equipment.
2. Flushing: All pipes and tubing shall be thoroughly flushed out before installation
of the emitter control valves. Butt joints, fittings and connections shall remain
visible.
L. Tagging and Identification: All remote control valves, motor-operated valves,

pressure reducing valves, manually-operated gate valves and controllers shall be
tagged and identified. All identifying numbers shall be consistent with like
designations indicated on the irrigation controller schedule.
M. Site Equipment Installation
1. Isolation Valve/Gate Valve: Shall be installed as detailed and where indicated

on Drawings.
2. Remote Control Valve Assembly: Shall be installed in the positions as

indicated in the details, remote control valve assembly comprising gate valve,
remote control valve with pressure regulator, and all appurtenances. Valve
boxes containing the assembly shall not be placed closer than 300mm to
paved areas. When the pressure gauge has been properly attached, the
outlet pressure shall be set as required during coverage tests.
3. Valve Boxes: Shall be installed as detailed and where indicated on Drawings.

All valves and valve assemblies shall be mounted in boxes as detailed.
a. The top of all boxes shall be set parallel with the grade and as detailed
in a neat and orderly fashion.
b. Shall be placed parallel to paving, kerbs, walls or similar structures

and where more than one box, parallel to each other.
c. All box locations shall be reviewed with the Engineer prior to

installation of valves.
d. Valve boxes shall not rest on or come in contact with the valve, piping,
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
hose or conduit.
e. Valve circuit number of the remote control valve shall be painted on

rim of box, such that:
i. Minimum height of letters and numerals - 38 mm.
ii. Black enamel paint.
iii. It shall be located on inlet side of box with bottom of letter

aligned with outer edge of box.
iv. A soak away 500 mm deep shall be provided under all valve boxes
using clean crushed aggregate 20 - 30 mm nominal size.
N. Control System
1. Irrigation Controller
a. An irrigation controller shall be installed in locations approved by the

Engineer, with the control cables, clearly marked with identification
markers, attached to the appropriate terminals in the approved manner.
b. Shall be secure to a concrete pad with approved anchor bolts. Chipping,

cracking, or otherwise marring the finish of enclosure when securing to
the concrete pad shall be avoided.
c. Programming of Irrigation Controller: Using the controller schedule

provided on the drawings, as a guide, the irrigation controller shall be
programmed to correspond with the initial irrigation sequencing and
duration of the cycles for each zone. The Contractor may find that during
establishment and maintenance the schedule has to be modified to
achieve a correct irrigation regime in accordance with good horticultural
practice.
O. Irrigation - Electrical
1. The Contractor shall provide, install, test and commission all items of
electrical equipment associated with the irrigation systems.
2. All electrical works shall be in accordance with the BS and IEC, and as further
specified in Sections under Division 16.
3. The irrigation system shall commence at the controllers which shall be fitted
into a dwarf type distribution cabinet with solar shade and shall have a bolting
down foot for mounting on a pre-formed concrete base. All incoming and
outgoing cables shall be from below ground level. The cabinet shall have a
hinged lockable opening door to provide full front access to the controller and
equipment and shall be sized according to the equipment being installed.
4. All equipment, conductors, termination, etc., within the pillar and throughout
the irrigation system generally shall be fully insulated such that there are no
live parts or connections exposed and shall be to the complete satisfaction of
the Engineer.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
5. The irrigation pillar shall have sufficient free space for fitting a kWh meter
together with any additional equipment or accessories required to complete
the equipment.
6. Each irrigation pillar shall have permanently fixed on the inside of the door, a
distribution diagram showing all circuits connections, ratings, cable sizes, etc.,
together with a current controller schedule.
7. All terminals shall be of the crimped spade type with insulated grip. At all
connection locations 150 mm of "slack" shall be provided.
8. Conductor markers shall be used throughout which shall clearly indicate the
circuit reference or number. These shall be white plastic with black letters or
numbers and of the type which acts as a sleeve over the conductor insulation.
9. Connections onto valves shall be made in a below ground PVC resin filled
molded waterproof connector with integral wire clamp.
P. Drip Line/Soft line Testing
1. Drip lines shall be carefully uncoiled and laid in position without kinking. Any
kinked section shall be cut from the line and subsequently rejoined with a line
joiner section.
2. Drip lines shall be snaked as required for maximum coverage without the use
of compression fittings. Sharp bends shall be avoided where there is a
likelihood of causing kinks in the line.
3. Drip lines shall be laid on the ground surface for a minimum of 48 hours prior
to the installation of irrigation emitters or stakes.
4. After this period the drip lines shall be realigned and secured to the ground
with stakes at 5 m intervals.
Q. Concrete Pads
1. Installation as detailed and where shown on the Drawings.
2. The exact location shall be confirmed to the Engineer prior to pouring.
3. Specified non-metallic conduit shall be provided as required to penetrate

boxes and enclosures as approved by the Engineer.
4. The anchor bolts shall be set in coordination with enclosure hole locations.
R. Pumps
1. Installation:
a. Installation shall be done in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions, and as specified herein.
2. Fabrication:

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
a. All like parts of same type pumps fabricated by the same

manufacturer shall be interchangeable.
b. Whenever possible, the pump shall be manufactured such that it shall

be possible to disassemble the rotor assembly with minimum
disassembly of other parts, such as suction and discharge nozzles,
bearing supports, etc.
c. All castings shall be clean without defect. Casting repairs shall be

done only after agreement is reached between the Engineer and the
Contractor.
d. All foundry and machine work shall be in accordance with good

practice for the class of work involved.
e. All parts shall conform to the required dimensions and shall be free
from defects that will prevent proper functioning of the pump.
f. Assembly of parts shall be well fitted and smoothly operating.
g. All internal parts, such as impeller, requiring surface treatment shall be

sprayed with PVC epoxy primer in accordance with pump
manufacturer's standard practice.
h. Pump exterior shall be sprayed with PVC epoxy primer and shall be
painted to meet specific application requirements in accordance with
pump manufacturer's standard practice.
3. Shop Testing:
a. Pump performance tests shall be conducted in accordance with

BS 5316. In addition, each pump shall be tested at five points of
operation from shut-off head to run out condition, including the
guaranteed pump's performance point.
b. All pumps shall be hydrostatically tested for leaks at 1.5 times the de-
sign pressure. There shall be no leakage during the one-hour test
period.
c. The Contractor shall submit Manufacturer's test certificates, including

test data to show that pump meets performance specifications.
3.05 SYSTEM TESTING
A. Purging
1. Immediately prior to hydrostatic testing, all irrigation lines shall be thoroughly

purged of all entrapped air.
2. Mainline piping system may be tested in sections. Lateral Systems shall be

tested valve by valve.
3. Water shall be discharged from a single outlet by manipulation of isolation

control valves and installation of temporary caps.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
4. Water shall be introduced into lines to be tested at full operating head and the
water flow at end discharge point, and observed until all air and residual
debris has been expelled from the line.
B. Initial System Test
1. Individual parts of the main network between isolation valve points having a
length not greater than 500 meters shall be tested together with dead legs
before backfilling operation.
2. Test shall be made only after completion of the above operations and not until
at least seven days after the last concrete thrust anchor block has been cast.
3. Contractor shall supply all testing material and equipment, including all caps,
valves, pumps, tanks and gauges as required.
4. Pressure gauges shall be dual reading in bar and psi units. Calibration shall
be such that accurate determination of potential pressure loss can be
ascertained.
5. The section of the main pipeline to be tested shall be filled with potable water
and all air expelled. After the main pipeline has been completely filled, the
pressure shall be steadily and gradually increased until the specified test
pressure has been reached. Simultaneous pressure and leakage tests and
separate pressure test shall be made at 150 % of working pressure at the
point of test, but not less than 125% of normal working pressure at highest
elevation. Separate elevation test shall be made at 150 % of normal working
pressure of the segment tested. Duration of simultaneous pressure and
leakage tests shall be 2 hours and duration of separate pressure tests shall
be 1 hour. All testing shall comply with AWWA M23-80, Polyvinyl Chloride
Pipe Design and Installation. A graph shall be produced showing water input
against time and the test shall run until the graph curve flattens out. Testing
shall comply with AWWA specifications and requirements.
6. Separate tests shall be applied to the lateral distribution pipe work and the
irrigation pipe work from the remote control valves outwards. Test pressures
for these shall be as described above.
7. When testing the irrigation lines from the valves, discharge devices shall be
replaced with temporary plugs or caps.
8. All trenches with pipe installed shall be immediately backfilled with preliminary
sand backfill sufficient to prevent arching or slipping under pressure. All joints,
fittings and connections are to remain exposed until successful completion of
hydrostatic testing.
9. Other than for preliminary sand backfill over pipes, no work shall be covered
before it has been inspected, tested and approved by the Engineer.
10. During the tests, all exposed couplings, fittings and valves shall be carefully
examined for defects and leakage. Leaking pipes, couplings, joints, fittings
and equipment shall be repaired or replaced and the section retested as
previously specified.
11. Upon receipt of approval of the Engineer to proceed, the remaining backfill
shall be placed and compacted to ninety percent (90%) of maximum dry
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
density. For further details refer to Section 02221 - TRENCHING,

BACKFILLING, COMPACTION AND GENERAL GRADING.
C. Final System Test: The tests as specified above shall be repeated for the entire
network after pipelines have been backfilled, cleaned and inspected. Each test
shall be restricted to pipes of one class and particular care shall be taken to
isolate air valves, etc. and not to apply higher pressures than specified at any
point on the pipeline and to ensure that the pipelines are adequately anchored
before any test is carried out.
D. Test Results: Written records of every test clearly identifying the tested section
of the pipe together with time of test and name of testing engineer in tabulated
format shall be submitted for review and approval by the Engineer upon
completion of the tests.
3.06 FLUSHING
A. General: On completion of the system test, the system is to be thoroughly

flushed, the velocity of water being at least 1 m/s. Should the main water supply
be unavailable or inadequate for this purpose at the time of flushing, then a swab
of adequate size shall be used to remove all foreign matter from the pipeline. This
process shall continue until the pipeline is completely clean. Each control valve
shall be opened separately and the terminal systems also thoroughly flushed.
After completion of flushing, the emitters and other discharge devices shall be
fitted.
B. Operation Test: After the hydrostatic test, emitters shall be installed and the
system completed and tested to demonstrate functional efficiency. This shall be
prior to covering the laterals with mulch.
C. The lines shall be operated for a period of 24 hours, not necessarily in one
continuous period, and all emitters checked for satisfactory operation. Any
faulty/blocked emitters shall be replaced.
3.07 IRRIGATION TANK
Irrigation water storage tanks shall be manufactured to British Standards and comply
strictly with the Water Department's Regulations of Qatar. The following tank may be
used:
Reinforced Concrete Storage Tank
The following design criteria shall be observed during construction:
a. There shall be one manhole to be positioned as follows:

one will be located in such a position to have easy access to the float valve
b. Stainless steel or GRP ladder shall be provided for access to the tank.
c. Vent pipe with insect guard shall be provided.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
d. Water level controls (low level electric float switches interlocked) for pump shall
be provided.
e. In case of overflow, warning system shall be provided either by level switch or by

other approved means.
f. Manholes shall be provided with at least 100mm upstaged concrete and double
sealed to prevent leakage.
g. Isolating stop-valves shall be provided in the supply and delivery lines
h. Approved non-toxic epoxy coating, resisting fungus growth shall be used on all
internal surfaces.
i. Approved tanking membrane for water tightness shall be used on external

surfaces.
The tanks shall be provided to the capacities, dimensions and locations shown on the
drawing. Each tank is to be fixed on a base, which supports the whole of the tank.
The details of the tank base are to be approved by the Consultant before any
installation work begins.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
SECTION 20
DRAINAGE INSTALLATION

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
SL NO. TITLE OF SPECIFICATION
20.1.00 DRAINAGE GENERAL
20.1.01 Site
20.1.02 Site Conditions
20.1.03 Definitions
20.1.04 Scope of Works
20.1.05 Compliance with Specifications and Regulations
20.1.06 Drainage System
20.1.07 Programme
20.1.08 Contract Drawings
20.1.09 Working Drawings
20.1.10 Co-ordination of Drawings
20.1.11 Material Submittals
20.1.12 Material Inspections
20.1.13 Alternative Materials
20.1.14 Setting out of Works
20.1.15 Safety
20.1.16 Contractors License
20.1.17 Permits
20.1.18 Damage to Plant and Materials
20.1.19 Protective Finishes
20.1.20 Works Test and Certificate
20.1.21 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
20.1.22 As Built Drawings
20.1.23 Period of Maintenance

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
20.2.00 DRAINAGE SYSTEM NETWORK
20.2.01 Pipes and Fittings
20.2.02 Above Ground Pipes
20.2.03 Below Ground and External Drainage Pipes
20.2.04 Rain Water System Pipes
20.2.05 Pipes and Fittings Installation and Inspection
20.2.06 Manholes
20.2.07 Manhole Covers and Gully Gratings
20.2.08 Soakaways
20.2.09 Sump Pump
20.2.10 Protection of Drainage Pipes
20.2.11 Testing and Commissioning
20.2.12 Schedule of Approved Manufacturers

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
20.1.01 SITE
Wadi Al Banat, Doha Qatar
20.1.02 SITE CONDITIONS
Unless otherwise specified, all the Drainage Materials & Equipments shall be
capable of withstanding the following site conditions :
Maximum Ambient Temperature: 52 Deg.C (Dry Bulb) in Summer
& 0 Deg.C (Dry Bulb) in Winter
Altitude : Sea Level
Maximum Relative Humidity : 100 %
Maximum Wind Velocity : 130 Kms. per Hour
Prevailing Wind : North and North Westerly
Storms : Dusty Sporadic and
Irregular Annual Rainfall : 80mm
20.1.03 DEFINITIONS
The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications / drawings

shall mean:
Site : The Locations where the works are to be carried
out. QCS : Qatar Construction Specifications
BS : British Standard Specifications
CP : British Standard Code of Practice
Tender Drawing : The Drawing on which the tender is based and

the schedules therein.
Working Drawings : The Drawings prepared by the Contractor for

the purpose of execution of work at site.
As Built Drawings : This is the true record of the actual work carried out at
site. Works : To include the provisions for al the materials and works
to be carried out by the contractor as per these
specifications and for the satisfactory completion of
the installation.
Approved : Shall mean APPROVED by the Engineer in writing.
Submitted : Shall mean SUBMITTED to the Engineer in writing.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
Accepted : Shall mean ACCEPTED by the Engineer in writing.
Provide : Shall mean, supply, Install, Test & Commission.
Install : Shall mean Install, Test & Commission.
Furnish : Shall mean supply only
Concealed : Shall mean Hidden from normal sight in the shafts,

ceiling spaces, walls, slabs or partitions.
20.1.04 SCOPE OF WORKS
The scope of works consists of furnishing, installing, commissioning and testing the
complete foul, waste and storm water drainage systems along with all associated
manholes and soakaways as indicated on the contract drawings, and in accordance
with this specification and the requirements of section 20 of the QCS and shall be
installed to BS 8301 : 1985 (formerly CP 304) .
The contractor shall provide all supervision, labour, materials, equipment, machinery
and any other items necessary to complete the systems in all respects.
The drainage system shall include the following :
1. uPVC soil, waste, vent, rainwater pipes as shown on drawing and specified
elsewhere.
2. Floor drains, floor gulleys, gully traps, overflows, bottle traps as shown on
drawings and specification
3. Manhole, Septic Tank, Manhole Covers, Gully Grating, Steps & Soakaways.
20.1.05 COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS AND REGULATIONS
The contractor shall supply all materials which shall be new and in good condition.
The contractor shall supply all the necessary skilled and non-skilled labor to complete
the works in accordance with the program of works.
The installations shall comply with the following regulations:
i. The installation of works shall be as per the latest edition and publication of
Sewerage Division, State of Qatar.
ii. The equipments shall conform to the British Standard Specifications and Codes
of Practice (current editions including all amendments).
iii. If the Contractor wishes to use materials of installations or equipments other than
the specified ones and conforming to different standards, then a written approval
from the Engineer shall be obtained. However the Engineer reserves the right for
such approval(s).
iv. Any apparatus, appliance, material or work not shown on the contract drawings
but mentioned in the specification or vice versa, or any incidental accessories or
work necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready
for operation, even if not particularly specified shall be supplied and installed or
carried out by the contractor without any additional costs.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
Clarification shall be obtained from the Engineer in writing for any such cases at
the tendering stage. In case of any discrepancy arises afterwards during the
construction, the Engineers decision shall be final and binding on all such
matters.
20.1.06 DRAINAGE SYSTEM
The Drainage system includes various, uPVC pipeworks including all the necessary
fittings and fixtures for the safe disposal of Soil, Waste and Rain Water from the
project site, along with the provisions of various Manholes finally connected to the
Municipal Drainage and Disposal system in the vicinity.
The scheme for the drainage system is detailed and provided in the Contract
drawings for handling and disposal of :
a. Soil Water
b. Waste Water
c. Rain Water
20.1.07 PROGRAMME
The Contractor shall produce the work program based on CPM (Critical Path Method
or Bar chart, indicating the time required for various activities and operations to
complete the project in time. The following points shall be highlighted in the
Program:
1. Mobilization
2. Drawings and Material Submittals
3. Approvals
4. Equipment Deliveries
5. First Fix
6. Main and Sub-Main Piping Works
7. Second Fix
8. Fixing of Accessories
9. Testing
10. Commissioning and Handing Over
20.1.08 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
The Drainage tender drawings related to this project have been listed in the Schedule
of Drawings enclosed with the specifications. The tender drawings have been
prepared to show the tenderer the principal equipment and general arrangement
required for the project.
These drawings do not indicate every detail of the work. It is the Contractors
responsibility to check the positions / locations at site. All dimensions are tentative
and shall be checked with the Architectural and Structural drawings. Any
discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer in writing at the time of
tender.
Particular attention shall be paid to the positioning of Floor Gullies, Drains,and other
accessories, in relation to the Interior finishes and locations of various appliances.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
The Contractor is deemed to have studied the services drawings based on all the
local regulations and have included in his prices for all builders work associated with
these drawings.
20.1.09 WORKING DRAWINGS
The contractor shall prepare the working drawings in a scale of 1:50 for plans, 1:5 for
details and 1:200 for site plan, and submit them for the Engineers approval. The
contractor shall project the following in the above drawings :
i. Actual pipework routes boxes indicating the sizes of all branches, bends and
other accessories and fittings.
ii Typical connection details of the various drainage systems of appliances, like

Water Closets, Wash Basins, Faucets, Bidets, Sinks etc.,
iii Sections and Elevations of Installations with co-ordination details in respect to

the other services Installations like, Electricals, Air-conditioning & Ventilation and
Plumbing.
iv Levels, Center Lines and Slopes/Gradients of the pipework installations.
20.1.10 CO-ORDINATION OF DRAWINGS
The Main contractor shall produce working drawings for building works required for
the services showing the integration of all the services i.e., Electrical, Mechanical,
Plumbing and Drainage systems.
The Main contractor should ensure that all the working drawings are properly
coordinated before submitting to the Engineer for approval. All the services shall be
installed in such a manner so as to avoid conflict with each other and maintain the
clearances required between each of them as per the prevailing regulations.
20.1.11 MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
The materials offered for approval shall be strictly in accordance with the
specifications and tender drawings.
The contractor shall submit in triplicate, the technical literature for each item of the
equipment, he intends to use for the project, to the Engineer for the necessary review
and approval.
If in case the technical literature is not available, then a sample shall be submitted: in
the absence of either of these, typed technical data shall be submitted duly
supported by telex / letter of the manufacturer for confirmation.
In case of items involving aesthetic, like Floor Gullies, Floor Clean Outs, Manhole
covers ( if located Inside of Building) etc., samples must be submitted for approval
along with the materials submittals.
Each copy of the submittals shall be numbered and signed with the technical
literature clearly highlighted, indicating the model, type and capacity of the equipment
offered. The Engineer shall retain two for copies and return one, either Approved or
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
Not Approved, to the contractor.
The contractor shall maintain and submit a status report every month, of all the
Materials submittals of the Drainage Materials & Equipments in the following
proforma to the Engineer:
i. Submittal Number
ii. Type of Material
iii. Manufacturer / Local Agent
iv. Date of Approval
v. Date of Order / Order Number
vi. Mode of Delivery ( Air, Land or Sea )
vii. ETA on Site
viii. Status as on date of Report
a. Equipment Supply
All the equipments for the project shall be procured only through the appointed local
agent in Qatar, who shall be the authorised agent and be able to supply the spare
parts etc., for the items anytime in the future. The contractor shall mark the same
clearly on the submittals (item No. iii. above).
In case of any item/s required to be purchased abroad directly, for valid reasons,
then the contractor shall mention the same in the submittal and obtain approval from
the Engineer specifically.
b. Equipment Size and Delivery
Each item of equipment shall be delivered to site in sections suitable for installations
in position designated, bearing in mind the location, type of structure, construction
program and the method of access.
c. Design References
Any design, for any of the systems, detailed on the Tender drawings, which requires
amendment or differs from that available at the time of construction, due to the
change in the manufacturers range of production or availability etc., The contractor
shall discuss the matter and obtain a readily available alternative from the Engineer.
Accordingly, the contractor shall make a fresh submittal based on the Engineers
advise and obtain approval to provide the revised system.
In such cases, no cost consideration will be applicable, as the contractor is deemed

to have studied the drawings and specifications thoroughly as well as obtained
clarifications during the tender stage, before submitting his quotation for the
execution.
20.1.12 MATERIAL INSPECTIONS
The contractor shall inform the Engineer within one week upon receipt of all the
materials at the site and arrange for the inspection of the same. Any material used at
site which is not approved earlier specifically shall stand rejected without notice.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
Any item on supply differs from the one shown on the submittal catalogue copy or the
sample submitted, will also be rejected at site. In such cases, the contractor shall
make a fresh submittal for the item and obtain approval from the Engineer. Any time
delay caused due to the above shall be on the Contractors account.
The contractor will have to remove the rejected materials from the site and replace
with approved materials at his own expenses. In the event the contractor fails to do
so, the client will have the liberty to carry out such works from other agencies and
debit the ensuing amount to the Contractor.
a. Materials Storage
The contractor shall be responsible for the safe keeping and storage of the
materials at site and provision of such covering as may be necessary to ensure that
on completion, all items are handed over in sound condition with all protective
finishes undamaged. The material storage, handling & protection at site shall be
strictly as per Q.C.S.
20.1.13 ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS
Equipments and Materials used as the basis for the design are listed in the Schedule
of Manufacturers. Only in case if the specified item/s are not available due to valid
reasons. Only in such cases, the alternatives will be considered by the Engineer,
before the tender is accepted and the Engineers decision will be final regarding the
matter.
In case the alternatives are accepted, the acceptance of the same will be confirmed
in writing by the Engineer. During the execution of the contract, no alternative
equipment, materials or fittings will be permitted other than the approved and the
contractor is fore-warned that any item provided by him which is not upto the
specification, must be replaced at his own expense. In cases where time will not
permit, then such replacements shall be at the clients convenience, but nevertheless
at the Contractors expenses etc.
20.1.14 SETTING OUT OF WORKS
The location of Floor Drains/Gullies, routes, Manholes etc., as indicated on the

tender drawings is tentative and may require some variation to suit the site
requirements. The exact positions must be checked and shown on the detailed
working drawings as indicated on the detailed Architectural drawings and co-
ordinated with furnishing and other services.
20.1.15 SAFETY
The contractor shall maintain all the safety procedures at site to protect man-power
and machinery. The Main Contractor shall provide all the means to achieve the
Safety standards required and protect the manpower, materials and equipments at
any point of time.
20.1.16 CONTRACTORS LICENSE

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
The Main contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor appointed for Drainage
works shall be one of the approved to carryout and maintain such work.
The Contractor shall submit the qualifications and experience particulars of the
Mechanical Engineer, Foreman and technicians (plumbers) to be employed on the
project and obtain approval from the Engineer. Once the approval is obtained, the
contractor shall not replace the staff from site. In case the same becomes
necessary, re-approval should be obtained and the new staff shall continue with the
old staff for a minimum period of 30 days before the later is withdrawn from the site.
Insuch cases, the proposed replacement personnel shall have a minimum of 5 years
local experience. Any application with less than 5 years of experience will be
rejected by the Engineer.
20.1.17 PERMITS
The contractor shall obtain all necessary permits prior to commencement of work and
obtain current record drawings of existing services already installed. All applications
for permits etc., shall be made in writing to the authorities, a minimum of 7 days prior
to the execution of the work. The Contractor is fully responsible for obtaining the
necessary permits from the authorities for his work site as well as for any connected
works to others.
20.1.18 DAMAGE TO PLANT AND MATERIALS
Any plant or material which is damaged by any means whatsoever, shall not be used
in the works. Should the contractor wish to rectify such damage in order to utilize the
plant or materials in the permanent works, the matter shall be brought to the attention
of the Engineer, who in turn shall conduct a proper survey after which the necessary
instructions will be issued. Only after obtaining a written permission from the
Engineer shall any remedial work be carried out.
Any damaged Plant or Material allegedly brought to a as-new condition following

such a procedure, shall only be accepted after the technical appraisal & discretion of
the Engineer, whose decision in such matters shall be final and binding.
20.1.19 PROTECTIVE FINISHES
The protective finishes must be provided on all materials and Equipments used in
this contract to ensure that no deterioration is caused by the interaction of local
climatic conditions.
All materials shall be inspected by the contractor or his representative before

shipment to ensure that finishes are in accordance with the specifications.
20.1.20 WORKS TEST AND INSPECTION
Provision shall be made by the contractor for the Engineer or Engineers

representative to witness hydraulic tests as pecified elsewhere, of major pipe work
executed by the contractor.
The Engineer will advise the contractor at the time of commencement of the contract
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
the list of works that to be inspected and the contractor shall give the Engineer the
required notice in the required Inspection form, of the date on which the plant will be
ready for testing.
The Engineer will signify his intention to attend the tests or accept the contractor's
test sheets. The contractor shall supply all the Inspection Forms and Test certificates
in original to the Engineer / Client at the time of handing over the project.
20.1.21 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
The contractor shall provide three copies in the form of bound documents the
operating instructions and maintenance manuals indicating the following :
a. Step by step operating procedures.

b. Preventive maintenance schedule.
c. Technical literature.
d. Spare parts list
e. Manufacturer's name, address, telex no., Fax no. telephone no., and contact
person. - Local as well as overseas.
f. Work test certificates, if any.
g. Routine Test results carried out at site.
20.1.22 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
After the working drawings have been approved, no alteration to the drawings shall
be carried out without the consent of the Engineer. These changes shall be
supported by sketches and incorporated on the AS-BUILT drawings which are to be
submitted to the Engineer within one month of completion of the project.
Two sets of process negatives alongwith three sets of drawings shall be submitted
after approval of the Engineer for onward submission to the client.
20.1.23 PERIOD OF MAINTENANCE
The contractor shall guarantee the entire Drainge System installed against Faulty /
improper materials and or workmanship for the period of maintenance of 400 days
(Four Hundred) from the date, the installation is tested, commissioned and accepted
by the Engineer. Also where longer guarantee or warranty periods are otherwise
declared, for any equipment or materials such longer terms shall apply.
The Contractor shall submit a single guarantee for whole of the works, which states
that all parts of the work are in accordance with the contract documents during the
period of maintenance, the contractor shall repair any deficiencies, within 24 hours of
notification at no additional cost to the contract.
In case if the Contractor fails to attend to any such faults as mentioned above within
the specified time, then the client shall make own arrangements to rectify the fault
but nevertheless at the Contractors expense.
20.2.00 DRAINAGE SYSTEM NETWORK

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
20.2.01 PIPES AND FITTINGS
All uPVC pipes and fittings shall be manufactured under a BS 5750 and BS 5572, to
BS 4514 for Internal above ground, and BS 4660 for the internal under ground
installations, and shall comprise the whole range of integrated system of same
manufacturer allowing the easy plumbing of an installation.
All external under ground pipes shall be uPVC and manufactured under BS
standards. The system shall comply with appropriate British Standards and bear the
Kitemark.
Applicable sub-sections of Section 20 of Qatar Construction Specifications (QCS)

shall be applied to all drainage works.
20.2.02 ABOVE GROUND PIPES Soil,
Waste and Overflow Systems
Reference should be made to the following Codes and Standards :
BS 3943 : 1979 Specification for plastic waste traps

BS 4514 : 1983 Unplasticised PVC soil and ventilating pipe fittings and
accessories.
BS 5254 : 1976 Polypropylene waste pipe and fittings
BS 5255 : 1976 Plastic waste pipe and fittings
BS 5572 : 1978 Code of Practice for Sanitary pipework
(formerly CP 304)
CP312 : 1973 Plastic pipework (Thermoplastic material) Part 1 & 2
Materials and colour : pipes and fittings shall be in uPVC in gray, white or rustic
brown.
Socketed fittings shall be solvent-welded with plain ended pipes. Seal ring
expansion joints shall be provided where required.
The system shall be compatible with buried drain system. Weathering Apron
(solvent-weld socket) shall be solvent-welded to the soil, waste, vent pipes for
weather flashing around pipe at roof.
Adjustable, plastic coated steel holderbats shall be used to support pipes or secure
fittings. Galvanized mild steel support bracket with packing piece shall be used for
horizontal pipes. Smaller pipes and fittings shall be secured to wall by zinc-plated
steel brackets.
Floor gully inlet shall be in uPVC with stainless steel / bronze covers.
20.2.03 BELOW GROUND DRAINAGE PIPES

(uPVC Buried Drain System)
The uPVC pipes and fittings shall comply with BS EN 1401-1:1998(formerlyBS 4660)
and BS EN1401-1:1998(formerly BS 5481), comprising complete drainage system,
compatible to soil waste and rainwater system and where appropriate shall bear the
Kitemark.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
Materials and Colours : buried drain system pipes and fittings shall be uPVC with
polypropylene seal retaining caps. Underground fittings shall be coloured golden
brown, approximately to BS 381 C : number 414. Seal retaining caps and seal rings
are black. Rodding eyes shall be provided where required.
uPVC solvent weld socket seal / lip and lip seal / lip seal shall be used.
Where necessary, lip seal / lip seal slip coupling shall be used.
Solvent Cements
Solvent cements should comply with either BS 6209 for non pressure pipework or BS
4346 : Part 3 for pressure pipework.
Sealing Rings
Sealing rings should be made from natural or synthetic rubber complying with BS
2494.
20.2.04 RAIN WATER SYSTEM PIPES
As shown on drawings rain water system in uPVC complying with BS 4576, BS EN

12200-1:2000 and bearing the Kitemark shall be provided. UPVC rainwater systems
shall be in gray as approved by the Engineer.
All joints should remain watertight under working conditions. Pipes inside the building
should be capable of withstanding the watertightness of a positive pressure of 38 mm
water gauge for at least 3 minutes.
Rainwater pipes should be firmly supported without restricting thermal movement.
Rainwater pipes shall not be encased in concrete columns structural walls and it is
important rainwater pipes in casing or ducts are accessible for maintenance, repair
and replacement.
Relevant regulations of BS 6367, BS EN 12056-3:2000 shall be followed to ensure

good performance of the rainwater system.
BS 5414 UPVC soil and vent pipes fittings and accessories and BS 4576 UPVC
rainwater goods may be used for rainwater system.
Roof and balcony outlets shall be made uPVC complying with the BSCP308 : 1974
and the Building Regulations 1976. The rainwater outlets shall incorporate a circular
grid domed outlets secured with brass crews and washers. All outlets are either 178
or 406 mm in diameter. Self coloured, smooth, gloss and moulded, gray colour to BS
5252 : 1976, 10 A.07.
When jointing UPVC pipes a gap should be left between spigot end of pipe and
shoulder of socket that it enters in order to allow for thermal movement.
UPVC pipes shall be with solvent weld sockets usable with seal ring adapter.
All rainwater pipes from upper roofs shall be free discharge lower roof,and lower roof
discharges to soakaways at ground level.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
20.2.05 PIPES AND FITTINGS, INSTALLATIONS AND INSPECTION A.
Pipe Supports, Brackets and Hangers
All pipework shall be adequately supported in such manner as to permit free

movement due to expansion contraction, vibration or other changes in the system.
Supports shall be arranged as near as possible to joints and changes in direction.
Spacing of supports shall comply with Table 13 contained in British Standard BS
5572 : 1978 Code of Practice for sanitary pipework.
Vertical stacks shall be adequately supported at the base to stand the total weight of
the riser. Under no circumstances shall branches from vertical rising pipes be the
means of support for the vertical pipework.
High temperature PVC waste pipework 32 mm, 40 mm and 50 mm shall be

supported using two piece holderbats screwed to the wall using round head zinc
plated wood screws.
Brackets shall be galvanized steel and be rigid. Where soil and ventilation pipes are
suspended from the underside of slab, they shall be held rigid in position. Single
angle iron supports may be used for pipework up to 500 mm from underside of slab.
Double angle iron supports shall be used for pipework 500 mm, 1000 mm from the
underside of the slab. All supports shall be proprietary brand and manufactured
from galvanized steel. Double angle iron braces shall be installed on both single
and double angle iron supports at 6 metre centres of vertical and horizontal runs of
pipework and anchored as necessary.
B. Rodding Eyes
Rodding and cleaning eyes shall be provided as indicated on the contract drawings
and as required.
C. Roof Termination
All soil ventilation pipes shall terminate 300 mm above the point of exit from the
services duct.
D. Jointing
Jointing of uPVC and high temperature PVC shall be "O" ring and solvent welded.
Prior to jointing all pipework fittings and accessories shall be thoroughly cleaned.
Pipework shall be cut square, end chamfered and swarf and dust removed. Prior
to jointing pipes and fitting should be checked for correct position and alignment and
marked to ensure accurate assembly.
Where 'O' ring joints are to be used pipes shall be marked for insertion depth "O" ring
placed in ring seal prior to application of small quantity of lubricant or petroleum jelly
around the chamfered spigot end. The pipe shall then be inserted into the socket
joint finally adjusted to the correct insertion depth.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
Where solvent joints are to be used, special care shall be taken to ensure both spigot
and socket are free from all dirt, grease and swarf. Solvent cement shall then be
applied liberally and evenly to both socket and spigot prior to inserting spigot into
socket. The joint shall immediately be cleaned of surplus solvent with a dry cloth
around newly formed joint.
Jointing of W.C outlet to UPVC pipework shall be by means of either a straight or

bent connector as required complete with rubber seal ring and suitable connection for
W.C spigot outlet.
E. Laying Rigid Pipe
Each pipe immediately before being laid shall be carefully brushed out and inspected
for defects.
Pipes with flexible joints, except concrete protection is provided as specified

hereafter shall be laid on a well compacted bed of granular bedding material
extending for the full width of the trench and with sufficient material at the side to
permit the pipes to be worked into the granular material and firmly supported to true
line and level. Sufficient space should be left to enable the joints to be made tested
and inspected but the contractor shall ensure that at least three quarters of the pipe
length is fully supported. After the pipeline has been tested and approved by the
Engineer the trench shall be carefully filled to 300 mm above the crown of the pipe
with granular material.
F. Laying Plastic Pipe
All operations involving the laying, bedding, jointing, backfilling etc., of pipes plastic
materials shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations
subject to the approval of the Engineer.
G. Setting Out and Pipe Alignment
All pipes and pipelines shall be laid to the lines and depths shown on the drawings or
as otherwise directed by the Engineer.
All pipelines shall be laid accurately to line and gradient so that, except where
otherwise specified, the finished pipeline is in a straight line in both horizontal and
vertical planes. Where shown on the drawings or other wise permitted by the
Engineer small changes of direction shall be achieved by deflection at joints within
the maximum permitted by the manufacturer. Where the angle of the bend required
is greater than that obtainable by joint deflection then manufactured bends of the
appropriate degree shall be used. Manufactured bends shall only be used where
shown on the drawings or where otherwise permitted by the Engineer.
All pipelines forming part of a drainage system shall be laid to the specified line and
levels so that every pipeline lies in straight line in both horizontal and vertical planes
between successive manholes on the line.
Every pipe shall placed in position individually and shall be set out accurately to the
line and level required. All setting out to line and level of both pipelines and
individual pipes shall be achieved by methods approved by the Engineer.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
Where pipelines of constant gradient are to be laid the contractor shall provide, fix
and maintain at such points as may be directed by the Engineer properly painted
sight rails and boning rods of pre-determined measurement for the boning in of
individual pipes to correct alignment. The sight rails shall be situated vertically over
the line of pipes or immediately adjacent to and there shall at no time be less than
three sight rails in position on each length of pipeline under construction to any other
gradient.
If the contractor wishes to propose an alternative method of controlling pipeline

alignment, he shall submit his proposed method to the Engineer for approval.
INSPECTIONS
Written notice on prescribed form shall be given for the purpose of inspection,
measurement and testing for each of the following cases :
i. Setting out completed

ii. Excavations completed
iii. Beddings Laid
iv. Drainage Laid and ready for testing
v. Drainage bedding cover complete and compacted
vi. Backfilling complete and compacted with ground level finish complete and
ready for final testing.
20.2.06 MANHOLES CEMENT AND CONCRETE
A. Cement
All cement used in all classes of concrete for drainage and sewerage works whether
above or below ground level shall be sulphate resistant cement complying with BS
4027.
Cement mortar shall consist of sulphate-resisting cement and sand gauged by

volume in suitable boxes in the proportions given in Section 20 of QCS.
Unless otherwise specified cement mortar shall be SRC Class No. 1.
The ingredients of the mortar shall be mixed in an approved mechanical mixer or

shall be mixed together dry on a clean wooden stage until the mix is homogeneous in
colour. Water shall then be added through a rose in sufficient quantity to give no
more than stiff workability. The whole shall then be turned until perfectly mixed.
Mortar shall be used within 30 minutes of mixing and shall not be remixed or worked
up again after it has stiffened. Any mortar that has commenced to set shall be
removed from the works.
Rendering to manhole benching shall comprise a 12 mm thick layer of approved

epoxy mortar.
MANHOLES
A. General

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
Manholes shall be provided at all changes in direction gradient or diameter.
The manholes shall be of the sizes and grades indicated on the Contract drawings
and fully comply with CED regulations and QCS Section 20.
B. Blockwork Manholes
Blockwork manholes shall be constructed on the drain lines in the positions and to
the dimensions indicated on Drawings or as directed on site by the Engineer.
The type of construction for each chamber shall be as indicated on the Contract
Drawings.
Concrete blocks used for chamber construction shall be manufactured with sulphate
resisting cement and shall comply with the requirements of QCS Section 20-5-1.
Hollow concrete blocks shall be filled solid with concrete Grade SRC 20.
Each manhole shall be built on a minimum of 75 mm thick blinding of grade SRC 25

concrete which shall be laid on a dry clean firm foundation free from unsound
material. If the bed of the excavation is wet the top surface of the blinding shall be
coated with an approved waterproofing material.
Foundation base slabs shall be cast in-situ Mass concrete foundation, slabs shall be
of concrete Grade SRC 20. Reinforced concrete foundation slabs shall be of
concrete Grade SRC 30.
Internal and external faces of the blockwork walls shall be finished with 12 mm thick
SRC mortar rendering Class 1.
All internal faces of manhole chambers except benching and vitrified clay channel
fittings shall be painted with one primer coat and tow final coats of black bitumen
coating water proofing solution to BS 3416, type 1 or equal and approved.
All exterior faces of manhole chambers shall be protected with 1000 gauge polythene
membrane with hardboard protection against damage during backfilling.
Where indicated on the Drawings, manhole cover frames shall be supported on solid
precast concrete bricks, manufactured from Grade SRC 30 concrete.
Reinforced cover slabs shall be provided where manhole access opening are less
than the internal dimensions of the manhole chamber.
The cover slabs shall be mounted by ductile or cast iron manhole covers and frames
of the quality specified. The covers in roads and paved areas shall be accurately set
on precast concrete brick-work to the level and slopes of the roads or pavements.
Manhole inverts shall be constructed of half section vitrified clay channels. Half
section vitrified clay channel branch bends shall be used for branch connections.
Benching in manholes shall be carefully formed according to the number, diameter
and positions of the incoming and outgoing pipes. The benching in the manholes
shall have vertical sides extending from the vitrified clay channels at least to the level
of the crown of the highest pipe. The benchings shall be sloped towards the
channels at a gradient of 1 in 10 or as otherwise detailed on the drawings.
The benching shall be rendered with a 12 mm thickness of epoxy mortar rendering.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
The ends of all pipes entering and leaving the manhole are to carefully cut to shape
to suit the internal dimensions of the manholes, and shall project through on the
inside, the benching being continued round the pipe to form a fillet.
20.2.07 MANHOLE COVERS AND GULLY GRATINGS
Manhole covers and frames shall comply with BS 497:1976 and shall be of the sizes
and types as shown on the contract drawings.
In general, manhole covers and frames shall be one of two types, as follows unless
otherwise specified.
Heavy Duty to BS 497 Grade A

Medium Duty to BS 497 Grade B
Heavy Duty
All manholes installed in roadways or trafficked areas shall be heavy to BS 497

Grade A. Reference M.A 60.
The cover and frame shall be made from ductile iron and the cover shall be of the
loosely-bolted double triangular type with three point suspension to provide stability
under load.
Medium Duty
All manholes installed external to buildings, but not in roadways or trafficked areas,
shall be medium duty to BS 497 Grade B1.
The over and frame shall be of grey or ductile iron and the cover shall be either
rectangular or circular as specified in the Manhole Schedule. Such manholes shall
incorporate a single seal between cover and frame. Following flushing out and
testing of the drainage system, the sealing groove shall be filled with grease to
provide an airtight seal.
The cover and frame shall be made from grey iron and shall incorporate a double
seal between cover and frame. Following out and testing of the drainage system, the
sealing grooves shall be filled with grease to provide an airtight seal.
In those areas where it is required to accept a tilled floor finish, the manhole covers
shall be of the recessed type. In kitchens or other areas subject to washing-down
manhole covers and frames shall have stainless steel edging and trim. Double cover
units shall be provided where specified in the Manhole schedule.
The contractor shall provide two sets of lifting key for each type of manhole.
Manhole covers and frames shall be as approved.
Step Irons
Step irons shall be manufactured from galvanized malleable cast iron and shall
comply with BS 1247 and be of the general purpose or precast concrete manhole
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
pattern as applicable. The tail length shall be 230 mm for both manhole types.
20.2.08 SOAKAWAYS
Soakaways shall be constructed using precast concrete manholes rings 1800 mm

diameter and shall have a minimum depth of 2.5 metres below invert of entry pipe
and constructed to BS 5911: Part 1.3
The precast concrete rings shall be from sulphate resisting cement to British
Standard 4027:1980. The precast rings shall be a minimum of 100 mm thick with 75
mm diameter perforations, space 30 mm vertically and 410 mm horizontally with
each symmetrically staggered. The bottom ring shall be set on a cast in situ concrete
base of a minimum 150 mm thick from concrete with a 300 mm diameter bore hole
lining sleeve cast in centrally as shown on the drawings. All rings shall be bedded in
cement mortar and the soakaways shall be surrounded by granular material. All
soakaways shall also comply with Developer Drainage Guide published by the
Ministry of Public Works Civil Engineering Department. Sewerage Division where
applicable.
The granular infill shall extend 500 mm each side of the precast and 1500 mm each
end. The entire void surrounding the precast rings shall be filled in layers of 300 mm
each layer, tamped by hand.
The soakaway cover slab shall be reinforced precast concrete with cast iron cover
and frame as shown in the manhole schedule and complying to British Standard BS
497.
Step irons shall be cast into side of the precast rings at 300 mm centres vertically,
with the first one being 450 mm below the cover level. All step irons shall be
galvanized and comply to British Standard BS 1247 : 1975.
A minimum of two coats of paint shall be applied.
20.2.09 SUMP PUMP
Electric submersible sewerage pumps shall be suitable for wet sump or dry pit
installation and for intermittent or continuous operation.
Pump shall be suitable for a maximum depth of submersion of 10 M with the outlet
directed vertically upwards
Motor shall be of the synchronous squirrel cage type IP 68 rating, hermetically

enclosed within the stator housing. Stator shall be wound with double lacquered wire
and subsequently triple dipped to provide insulation in accordance with IEC 85
temperature class F (155 deg. C) Stator winding over temperature shall be
prevented by bimetallic thermal switches or thermistors embedded in each of the
stator phase windings. Motor shall be designed for a maximum of 15 starts/hour.
Cable entry glands shall be suitable designed to effectively seal the junction box from
the surrounding liquid at depths up to 10 mtrs and to mechanically restrain the cable
to avoid distortion of the gland rubbers and to prevent kinking of the cable adjacent to
the cable entry.
Motor shaft shall be stainless steel and mounted on robust pre greased rolling
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
element bearings. The shaft seal assembly shall comprise of two independent
mechanical face seals mounted in tandem with an interposing oil chamber to cool the
seals and to act as an additional leakage barrier. Seal combination shall be high
wear resistant tungsten carbide.
Motor and pump casing constructed of cast iron.
Pump casing shall be smooth profiled volute geometry for clog free operation fitted
with replaceable inlet wear rings.
Impeller shall be dynamically balanced screw depending on the pump selection and
duty specified.
Pump set shall be supplied with a control panel complete with breakers, fuses
starters duty/standby pump selector switch, pump on/off/fault indicator lights, auto
change over facility etc. Panel enclosure shall be to IP 65.
Pump operation shall be automatic controlled through float switches installed in the
sewage collection pit.
Pumps shall be supplied with all accessories including foot bends, guide rails
stainless steel lifting chains, float switches etc.
20.2.10 PROTECTION OF DRAINAGE PIPES A.
Concrete Protection to Pipelines
All underground drainage pipework shall be surrounded with 150 mm thick Grade
SRC 20 sulphate resisting concrete, along its entire length in the following locations :-
1. All drainage below buildings or structural elements

2. All drainage with less than 600 mm cover.
3. Drainage with a cover of between 600 mm and 1200 mm where there is vehicular
traffic over the ground above the drain line.
4. Elsewhere as indicated on the Contract drawings.
The required depths of concrete bed and height of concrete backfill shall be as
indicated on the Contract drawings.
Where a concrete bed and surround is specified, a minimum of 75 mm blinding of

concrete Grade 25 shall first be laid over the full width of the trench.
The pipes shall be laid jointed and supported on precast concrete blocks which shall
be separated from the barrel by 25 mm thick timber packing.
After the pipeline has been tested and approved by the Engineer the top of the
concrete bed shall be thoroughly cleaned and additional concrete Grade SRC 20
carefully placed and compacted under and around the pipe to a height of at least 150
mm above the crown of the pipe.
Where pipes with flexible joints are to be surrounded 13 mm thick fiberboard or

polystyrene sheets shall be fixed at the pipe coupling joint extending for the full cross
section of the remaining concrete bed and surround, and accurately cut to fit the
profile of the pipe.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
B. Pipelines Protection From Extraneous Material
The pipelines shall at all times be kept free of extraneous material and when work is
not is progress the open ends of the pipeline shall be securely plugged with an
approved watertight plug or stopper. Claw type plugs or any type liable to damage
the pipe will not be approved.
The contractor shall clear the inside of each fitting and pipe length immediately prior
to jointing and shall swab all fittings and pipe lengths to remove all dirt sand or other
matter that may contaminate the pipeline.
The entire absence of foreign matter from the completed line shall be a condition
precedent to acceptance.
C. Trenches
All trenches excavation shall comply fully with all the relevant clauses of QCS
Section 20-2 and this specification,Trench depths shall be sufficient to allow the
installation of the required pipe bedding, granular or concrete as specified. Generally
the depth of cover shall not be less than 600 mm unless otherwise indicated on the
contract drawings.
Trench width shall be in accordance with the following table :

Nominal Minimum Maximum
Pipe Bore Width Width
mm mm mm
100 430 630
150 490 690
200 560 760
The maximum and minimum widths shall apply from the bottom of the trench to 300
mm above the crown of the pipe.
Should the trench be excavated to a depth greater than is required in the opinion of
the Engineer. The contractor shall fill in the bottom of the trench to the required
depth with concrete or other such materials as the Engineer may direct.
In the case of trench excavations made in roads, footpaths, verges, central strips or
within 5 metres of buildings the contractor will be required to execute the works so as
to minimize damage and disturbance. Vertical trench side will generally require
support by timbering or other suitable means. Under-cutting of trench sides will not
be permitted.
D. Granular Bedding Material for Rigid Pipes.
Granular bedding material for rigid pipes shall consist of gravel or broken stone and
shall be a suitable "all in" ballast or stone.
For pipes up to 1200 millimeters nominal bore the material shall be graded 12
millimeters to 5 millimetres all passing 12 millimetres and not more than 20 percent
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
passing 5 percent millimetres B.S sieve.
E. Backfilling Excavation
After compaction of the granular bed and surround or completion of concrete

surround, the trench shall be backfilled using selected excavated material free
from all rocks, large hard on objects and builders debris of greater than 40 mm.
Backfilling shall take place immediately after the specified operations preceding it has
been completed and shall be in layers of 150 mm. each fully compacted over the full
width of the trench. Power rammers and vibrators shall be used to compact
backfilling when the cover over the crown of the pipe exceeds 0.5 metres.
20.2.11 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
All drain pipes shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 8301 and
the requirements of Section 20 5.3.1 of the Q.C.S.
The Engineer shall witness all drainage tests. The contractor shall give the Engineer
a minimum of 24 hours notice of all test. The contractor shall also provide test
sheets set out in an agreed manner for each drain section to be tested.
The contractor having ensured that water, electricity and other necessary supplies
are available shall set to work the completed works or part thereof, at the instruction
of the Engineer and make the necessary adjustments to ensure correct functioning.
After the installation or part thereof has been set to work and adjusted, the contractor
shall demonstrate its operation at a time selected by and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. Tests shall be in accordance with British Standard BS 6700 : 1987.
The tests shall demonstrate:
a. That equipment provided complies with the specification in all particulars and is of
adequate capacity for its full rates of duty.
b. That all items of plant and equipment operate quite sufficiently to meet the
specified requirements.
c. That all instruments protection and control devices etc, are correctly calibrated
and accurate.
d. That all drainage runs satisfy the required water tests.
The details of method of carrying out the recording of tests shall be agreed with the
Engineer. The Client's representative and the Engineer shall be at liberty to be
present at tests and to participate in the tests. This shall not relieve the contractor of
his responsibilities for carrying out the tests satisfactorily.
The contractor shall make all records during the tests and on completion thereof shall
provide the Engineer with a test report and record, both in triplicate. The contractor
shall also provide all test instruments together with skilled supervision and adequate
labour for carrying out the tests.
A. Proving Tests
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
All under slab, underground drainage, soil and waste system shall be cleaned down
and thoroughly flushed out to remove all dirt within each pipework system.
After each system has been flushed and each draw off fitting opened and the
drainage, soil and waste system shall be checked for satisfactory rate flow.
Particular attention shall be given to groups of sanitary fittings to ensure satisfactory
flow when a number of fittings are flushed and air not drawn into the system via any
trap.
B. Water Test
All drains shall be tested before backfilling immediately after the drain has been
properly laid on the correct trench bed and after joining materials has had time to set.
A water test pressure of 1.3 m head above the soffit of the drain shall be applied at
the high end, but not more than 2.4 m head at the low end. The test shall be carried
out on lengths of drain not less than half the distance between manholes, all to be
agreed with the Engineer on site. The lower end of the drain shall be plugged and
the higher end shall have a stand pipe not less than 1.2 m high. The drain shall be
filled, taking care to eliminate trapped air. After repair of leakage due to defective
pipes, joints and plugs the drain under test shall be left for one hour to allow water
absorption by pipes and fittings.
The loss of water over a period measuring vessel at intervals of ten minutes and
noting the quantity of water required to maintain the original level in the stand pipe.
For drains up to 300 mm diameter, the water quantity added shall not exceed 0.06
litre per hour per 100 linear metres per millimeter of nominal bore of the drain under
test.
All drains shall be tested for a second time as described above after correct bedding
cover and selected backfill have been consolidated and the finished surface
complete.
C. Air Test
A gauge in the form of a "U" tube shall be connected to the plug fixed at one end of
the length to be tested and all junctions and connections to the sewer on drain shall
be plugged. Air shall then be pumped in from the other end of the drain under test
until a pressure equal to 100 mm of water is indicated on the gauge. Without further
pumping the pressure shall not fall more than 25mm during a period of five minutes.
Air tests shall be carried out after 3 p.m. and all pipework shall be shaded from the
sun at all times. Should an air test fail a water test shall be carried out as described
in this specification.
D. Profile Test
A hardwood ball of an approved profile shall be drawn through all foul drains from
manhole to manhole and through branch foul drains before soil pipes, gullies and
W.C's are filled. The diameter of the ball or profile shall differ from the nominal
internal diameter of the pipe by not more than 6 mm or by not more than 45% of the
nominal internal diameter of the pipe whichever is the greater difference.
During commissioning all manhole cover shall be removed and water flow tests shall
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
be carried out to ensure that the drains are flowing at their designed capacity and
that they are free of debris.
E. Manhole Test
All manholes shall tested in accordance with the requirements of BS 8301 and the
requirements of Section 20 of Q.C.S.
The Engineer shall witness all manhole tests. The contractor shall give the Engineer
a minimum of 24 hours notice of all tests. The contract shall also provide test sheets
set out in an agreed manner for each manhole to be tested.
All concrete manholes cast in situ and precast concrete manholes shall be water
tests by plugging all necessary connections and filling the manhole with water to a
minimum height of 600 mm above the top of the benching. Water shall be added at
ten minute intervals until absorption has ceased. No change of water level shall
occur for an uninterrupted period of three hours.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
SECTION 22
AIR CONDITION INSTALLATION

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
1. AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION ..................................................................................................76

1.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................................... 76
2. EXTENT OF CONTRACT .............................................................................................................................76
3. EXCLUSION ...................................................................................................................................................77
4. STANDARD OF WORK ................................................................................................................................77
5. PROGRAMME................................................................................................................................................78
6. DATA TO BE SUPPLIED WITH TENDER ..................................................................................................78
7. PRACTICAL COMPLETION .........................................................................................................................78
8. DESIGN DATA ...............................................................................................................................................79
8.1 OUTSIDE DESIGN CONDITIONS ........................................................................................................... 79
8.2 INSIDE DESIGN CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................... 79
8.3 OCCUPANCY LOAD .................................................................................................................................. 80
8.5 NOISE CRITERIA ....................................................................................................................................... 81
8.6 HEAT TRANSMISSION FACTOR ............................................................................................................ 82
8.7 ELECTRIC SUPPLY : 415 V, 3 PH,50 HZ, 4 WIRES ......................................... 82
8.8 DUCT SIZING CRITERIA ................................................................................................................................. 82
8.9 PIPE SIZING CRITERIA ................................................................................................................................... 83
8.10 DESIGN FACTORS .......................................................................................................................................... 83
9. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................83
10. DESCRIPTION OF AIR CONDITIONING ................................................................................................84
10.1 AIR CONDITIONING .................................................................................................................................. 84
11. AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT .........................................................................................................85
11.1 CHILLED WATER SYSTEM ..................................................................................................................... 85
11.2 SYSTEM WITH AIR HANDLING UNITS ................................................................................................. 85
11.3 VENTILATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................... 85
11.4 GENERAL SUPPLY & EXTRACT VENTILATION ................................................................................. 86
11.5 ANCILLARY VENTILATION ...................................................................................................................... 86
11.6 GENERAL STANDARD SYSTEM COMPONENTS .............................................................................. 86
11.7 GENERAL VENTILATION SYSTEM DUCTWORK REQUIREMENTS .............................................. 87
11.8 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY FOR VAC .......................................................................................... 87
11.9 MOTOR STARTER/CONTROLLER ........................................................................................................ 88
11.10 OUTDOOR UNITS ................................................................................................................................. 88
11.11 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................... 88
11.12 PIPING SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................... 88
11.13 DUCTWORK ........................................................................................................................................... 88
11.14 EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................................................................... 89
11.15 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................. 89
11.16 TEST ON COMPLETION ...................................................................................................................... 89
11.17 MAINTENANCE TEST .......................................................................................................................... 90
11.18 SPARES .................................................................................................................................................. 90
11.19 SPARES FOR FIRST YEAR OPERATION ........................................................................................ 90
11.20 SPARES LIST OF SUBSEQUENT 2 YEARS OPERATION ........................................................... 90
11.21 PACKAGED WATER CHILLING PLANT ........................................................................................... 91
1.2 ................................................................................................................................................................................ 91
11.22 CHILLED WATER PUMPS ................................................................................................................... 97
11.23 WATER PRESSURIZATION UNIT...................................................................................................... 98
11.24 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................. 98
11.25 SPLIT TYPE AIR CONDITIONING UNIT (WALL MOUNTED)...................................................... 103
11.26 WINDOW AIR CONDITIONING UNITS ............................................................................................ 105
11.27 PRECISION AIR CONDITIONING UNIT .......................................................................................... 106
12. VENTILATION .........................................................................................................................................108
12.1 EXHAUST FANS............................................................................................................................................ 108
13. GENERAL REQUIREMENT ...................................................................................................................110
13.1 QUALITY OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS .................................................................................................. 110
13.2 INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATION AND ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ................................................................. 110
13.3 PAINTING, TAGS, NAMEPLATES .................................................................................................................. 110
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
13.4 DRAWINGS, SUBMITTALS, INSTRUCTIONS, MANUALS AND SAMPLES......................................................... 111

14. TEST AT SITE .........................................................................................................................................113
14.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................................... 113
14.2 PIPING SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................................... 114
14.3 DUCTWORK .................................................................................................................................................. 114
14.4 EQUIPMENT.................................................................................................................................................. 114
14.5 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT............................................................................................................................. 114
14.6 TEST ON COMPLETION ................................................................................................................................ 115
14.7 MAINTENANCE TEST .................................................................................................................................... 115
15. VIBRATION ISOLATORS ......................................................................................................................115
16. CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPES ...............................................................................................................116
17. DUCTWORK ............................................................................................................................................116
17.1 GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................................... 116
18. MANUAL DAMPERS ..............................................................................................................................117
18.1 DAMPER QUADRANTS .......................................................................................................................... 117
18.2 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS ........................................................................................................... 117
18.3 SPLITTER DAMPERS ............................................................................................................................. 118
18.4 NON-RETURN DAMPERS ...................................................................................................................... 118
18.5 MOTORIZED DAMPERS ........................................................................................................................ 118
19. FIRE DAMPERS ......................................................................................................................................118
20. SMOKE DAMPERS.................................................................................................................................119
21. TEST HOLES ...........................................................................................................................................119
22. FRESH AIR INTAKE AND OUTLET LOUVERES................................................................................119
23. FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS ...................................................................................................................119
24. DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS .....................................................................................................120
25. GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS ..........................................................................................120
25.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................. 120
25.2 GRILLES AND REGISTERS ................................................................................................................... 121
25.3 DIFFUSERS............................................................................................................................................... 121
25.4 DOOR GRILLES/UNDERCUTS ............................................................................................................. 121
25.5 LINEAR DIFFUSERS ............................................................................................................................... 121
25.6 CIRCULAR DIFFUSERS ......................................................................................................................... 121
25.7 SOUND ATTENUATORS ........................................................................................................................ 122
26. ACCESS DOORS ....................................................................................................................................122
27. PIPEWORK AND FITTINGS ..................................................................................................................122
27.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................. 122
27.2 CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPES ............................................................................................................... 123
27.3 CHILLED W ATER PIPES ............................................................................................................................... 123
27.4 W ELDING ..................................................................................................................................................... 124
27.5 MECHANICAL COUPLINGS FOR JOINING CARBON STEEL PIPE .................................................................. 124
27.6 FLANGE ADAPTERS ..................................................................................................................................... 124
27.7 GASKETS ..................................................................................................................................................... 124
27.8 VALVES FOR CHILLED W ATER SYSTEM ...................................................................................................... 125
27.9 SCREWED JOINTS ON STEEL PIPING .......................................................................................................... 126
27.10 FLANGED JOINTS .................................................................................................................................... 126
27.11 UNIONS ................................................................................................................................................... 126
27.12 STRAINERS.............................................................................................................................................. 126
27.13 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS AND EXPANSION JOINTS ................................................................................ 126
27.14 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS .......................................................................................................................... 127
27.15 AIR COCKS AND BOTTLES ...................................................................................................................... 127
27.16 PIPE SUPPORTS, HANGERS AND ANCHORS .......................................................................................... 127
27.17 PIPE SLEEVES .................................................................................................................................... 128
27.18 FLASHING SLEEVES ......................................................................................................................... 128
28. INSULATION ...........................................................................................................................................129
28.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................. 129
28.2 THERMAL INSULATION TO DUCTWORK (INTERNAL) AND EXHAUST DUCTS (INTERNAL /
EXTERNAL) ............................................................................................................................................................. 129

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
28.3 THERMAL INSULATION TO EXTERNAL DUCTWORK .................................................................... 130

28.4 THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY ................................................................................................................... 130
28.5 CHILLED WATER PIPING INSULATION (INSIDE & OUTSIDE THE BUILDING) ......................... 130

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
1. Air Conditioning and Ventilation
1.1 General
1. References shall be made to relevant Qatar Construction Standards 2010 (QCS 2010).
2. In case of any discrepancy the most stringent requirement shall be applied and as
approved by Supervision Consultant.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall use the latest issued standard of any standards defined by
Specification.
4. THE CONTRACTOR is responsible to provide, at no additional cost, one soft & hard
copy of all Standards defined by Specifications, to be available on the Site for
Consultants.
5. The CONTRACTOR is responsible to prepare, at no additional cost, all the required
design/engineering drawings that are necessary to meet the intended facility
performance/requirements and function requirements.
6. The CONTRACTOR is responsible to prepare & produce, at no additional cost, all
necessary shop drawings, coordination drawings, and Composite Plan Drawings that
are required for the successful execution & completion of the project.
7. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for Design and execution of Drawings inputs, at no
additional cost, that may be required for connection with the Utility Services and is
responsible, at no additional cost, for the Coordination of such works on site.
8. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for correcting and implementing on site, at no
additional cost, any required drawings or documents that are found to be incorrect due
to any errors, omissions, misjudgements in the design and inadequate co-ordination
with utility services, the contractor is responsible to produce all necessary engineering
drawings, data sheets, shop drawings for completion of the work.
9. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for preparing and producing AS-Built Drawings, at
no additional cost.
10. The CONTRACTOR is aware that the detailed design has been developed and
tendered in a Good Faith before obtaining the Authority Approvals (DC1, Civil Defence,
Services Approvals, DC2, etc.) and some alterations to the Detailed Drawings might be
required to fulfil the Authority Review Process and approval requirements. The
CONTRACTOR is responsible for updating, at no additional cost, the design drawings,
shop drawings and AS BUILT Drawings accordingly to suit the Authority Approvals
Requirements.
11. A/C and ventilation system installation shall be carried out as per the Qatar
Construction Specification, with the following additions and amendments.
2. Extent of Contract
The work under this section of the specification shall include for the supply, delivery to site,
installation, testing and commissioning and setting to work the new Air conditioning and
Ventilation systems for the Headquarter of General Directorate of Boarders Passports,
Expatriates Affairs and Nationality and Travel Documents Department in Wadi Al Banat,
Doha, State of Qatar
1. , as given hereunder:
a. All air conditioning and ventilation system complete with all accessories
and controls, as per specifications, schedules and drawings.
b. Complete air distribution system, return air collecting system, fresh air
and ventilation system as shown on the drawings and as specified.
c. Various controls, instruments and their connections, electrical works
related to air conditioning and ventilation systems as detailed in the
specifications.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
2. The Contractor shall provide all the materials, labour, cartage, plant and appliances
necessary for the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the work and all
other minor and incidental works necessary for the system.
3. The specifications and drawings are intended to indicate the nature and scope of the
project. The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of plant of the correct
capacity and shall guarantee the efficient performance of the equipment.
3. exclusion
1. Items necessary for the completion of the plant but not included in the tender are to be
listed as exclusions. It will be assumed that any items or services necessary to the air
conditioning plant and not specifically excluded will be provided by the Contractor even
if not mentioned in the tender.
4. Standard of Work
1. Unless otherwise specified, all equipment is to comply with the current Kahra-maa
regulations, relevant British and American codes of practice as listed below. However,
the Kahra-maa / QCS latest regulations shall take precedence over all other
regulations.
a. ASHRAE : American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air
Conditioning Engineer
b. IHVE : The Institute of Heating and Ventilation Engineers (UK)
c. ASME : American Society of Mechanical Engineers
d. ARI : Air conditioning Refrigeration Institute (USA)
e. ASTM : American Society of Testing and Materials
f. AWS : American Welding Society
g. DW142 : Specification for Sheet metal ductwork
h. SMACNA : Sheet Metal and Air conditioning Contractor's National
Association
i. AIA : American institute of Architects
j. QCS : Qatar Construction specification
k. NFPA : National Fire Protection Agency
l. CIBSE : Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers
m. QCDD : Qatar Civil defence department
2. The workmen employed must be accustomed to the highest class of air conditioning
installation.
3. A competent Engineer must be in regular attendance throughout the whole contract.
The whole of the installation shall be executed in conformity with the drawings,
specifications, internationally accepted codes of practice and local regulations.
4. The Mechanical Services Contractor shall ensure that all aspects of the design and
installation comply with the following:
5. All statutory requirements such as the Offices, Shops, and Railway Premises Act,
Health and Safety at Work Act, Electricity Acts etc together with any statutory
Regulations made there under but not limited to:
a. The Construction (Design and Management) Regulations
b. All Regulations and requirements of the Local Supply Authorities.
c. All relevant regulations, guidelines and requirements of Qatar.
d. The local Fire Officers and Building Control Officers requirements.
e. All Local Authority bye-laws, public health and environmental health regulations.
f. The Building Regulations and associated approved documents current at the date
of tender.
g. The requirements of the Water Regulations (Water Fittings) 1999 incorporating all
amendments current at the date of tender.
h. All relevant British Standards.
i. The current edition of the CIBSE Guide and Codes of Practice.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
j. The CIBSE Guides and Commissioning Codes.

k. The IEE Regulations for Electrical Installations, BS7671 As Amended (including all
Guidance Notes issued at the date of tender).
l. All relevant Health & Safety Executive Guidance Notes and HS(G)70 regarding the
control of Legionella.
m. The Food Hygiene regulations currently in force in Qatar.
n. Food Research Association guidelines on quality and standards in the Food
Industry.
6. References shall be made to relevant Qatar Construction Standards 2010 (QCS 2010).
7. In case of any discrepancy the most stringent requirement shall be applied and as
approved by Supervision Consultant.
8. Contractor is responsible to provide one soft & hard copy of all Standards defined by
Specifications, to be available on the Site for Consultants.
9. If the Contractor wishes to use installations or equipment other than those specified and
conforming to different standards, then a written approval from the Consultant shall be
obtained. However the Consultant reserves the right to reject any applications for such
approvals without the right to appeal.
10. Any apparatus, appliance, materials or works not shown on the contract drawings but
mentioned in the specification or vice versa, or any incidental accessories or work
necessary to make the work complete and perfect in all respects and ready for
operation, even if not particularly specified shall be supplied and installed or carried out
by the Contractor without any additional costs to the contract sum.
11. Clarification shall be obtained at the tendering stage by the Contractor from the
Consultant in writing for any installations where it is perceived that the extent of
specified installations and the expected content or works are not clear. In case of any
discrepancy arises afterwards or during the construction, the Consultants decision shall
be final and binding on all such matters.
12. Calculations, The Contractor shall provide copies of all engineering services design
calculations 10 weeks prior to any works being installed. The calculations shall be
issued at the same time as the installation drawings are issued for comment and
approval.
5. programme
1. Immediately on receipt of an order the Contractor shall prepare a programme detailing

the services and sequence of installation.
2. Approval of programme by the Engineer or Client shall not relieve the Contractor from
his obligations to execute and complete the works in conformity with the directions and
requirements of the Engineer.
6. data to be supplied with tender
1. Full description of equipment's and system proposed.

2. Exclusions and departures from specifications.
3. Guarantee particulars.
4. Letter of compliance confirming that the offer fully complies with the tender documents,
specifications and tender drawings and that there are no deviations.
7. practical completion
1. The Contractor shall deliver the Operation and Maintenance Manuals along with the
'As-built' drawings and loose items if any to the Client before practical completion. The
completion certificate will be issued by the Engineer after obtaining the Operation and
Maintenance manuals.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
2. Recommendation for release or the release of Practical Completion Certificate would

not absolve the Contractor of his responsibility to provide the installation complete in all
respects and in satisfactory working order. If any item is discovered later during
commissioning, maintenance period or at F.C.C. stage to be short supplied or not in
working order, the Contractor shall be liable to make good the same to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
8. design data
8.1 Outside design conditions
a. Summer : 50C. DB, 30C. WB

: (122F. DB, 86F. WB)
b. Winter : 10.6C. DB, 90% RH
(51F. DB, 90% RH)
8.2 Inside design conditions
1. Indoor comfort conditions were selected and based on recommendations of ASHRAE

Standard 55. The following table represents the indoor design conditions that were
followed:
Summer Dry Summer

Space Designation bulb Relative
Temperature, 0C Humidity, %
FSS COMPUTER ROOM 18OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%
BRIEFING ROOM 22OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%
DE-BRIEFING ROOM 22OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%
CLASSROOM 22OC +/-1OC 55 % 5%
CEET 22OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%
CABIN DRY DITCHING 22OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%
CABIN WET DITCHING 27OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%
RECEPTION AREA 22OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%
MALE TOI 25OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%
FEMALE TOI 25OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%
HOT SPARES STORE 24OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%
STORAGE AREA 1 24OC +/-1OC 55 % 5%
STORAGE AREA 2 24OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%
REFECTORY 22OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%
WORKSHOP 22OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%
CORRIDOORS 22OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%
OFFICES 22OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%
ITC DEPT 22OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%
CABIN CREW TRAINGING DEPT 18OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%
FLIGHT TRAINING DEPT 18OC +/-1OC 55 % 5%
SYNTHETIC ENGINEERING 18OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%
MAINTENANCE TRAINING DEPT 22OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%
SERVER ROOM 18OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%
POOL 27OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
WET DITCHING 18OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%

DRY DITCHING 18OC +/-1OC 50 % 5%
8.3 Occupancy Load
1. Occupancy Estimate is being based on recommendations of ASHRAE Standard 62.1-

2007 & As per the final furniture layout. The following table represents the estimated
occupancy design conditions that were followed:
Space Occupancy
FSS COMPUTER ROOM 35 person / 100 m2
BRIEFING ROOM 35 person / 100 m2
DE-BRIEFING ROOM 35 person / 100 m2
CLASSROOM 35 person / 100 m2
CEET 30 person
CABIN DRY DITCHING 30 person
CABIN WET DITCHING 30 person
RECEPTION AREA 30 person
MALE TOI 7 person
FEMALE TOI 7 person
HOT SPARES STORE 3 person
STORAGE AREA 1 2 person
STORAGE AREA 2 2 person
REFECTORY 30 person
WORKSHOP 5 person
CORRIDOORS 5 person / 100 m2
ITC DEPT 10 person
CABIN CREW TRAINGING DEPT 5 person
FLIGHT TRAINING DEPT 10 person
SYNTHETIC ENGINEERING 10 person
MAINTENANCE TRAINING DEPT 5 person
SERVER ROOM 2 person
Note : For the above, Final Value to be as per the final Architectural furniture.
8.4 Electrical Lighting and Electrical Equipment Heat Load

1. Electrical Lighting and Electrical Equipment Heat Load is based on the
recommendations of ASHRAE/IES Standard and has to be adjusted as per the final
Equipment.
Space Electrical Light Electrical Equipment

Load W/ M2 Load W/ M2
FSS COMPUTER ROOM 16 25
BRIEFING ROOM 16 25
DE-BRIEFING ROOM 16 25
CLASSROOM 16 25

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
CEET 16 25
CABIN DRY DITCHING 16 25
CABIN WET DITCHING 16 25
RECEPTION AREA 16 25
MALE TOI 16 25
FEMALE TOI 16 25
HOT SPARES STORE 16 25
STORAGE AREA 1 16 25
STORAGE AREA 2 16 25
REFECTORY 16 25
WORKSHOP 16 25
CORRIDOORS 16 25
ITC DEPT 16 25
CABIN CREW TRAINGING 16 25
DEPT
FLIGHT TRAINING DEPT 16 25
SYNTHETIC 16 25
ENGINEERING
MAINTENANCE TRAINING 16 25
DEPT
SERVER ROOM 16 25
Note: The above rates have to be adjusted as per the actual design value by the
Electrical Engineer.
8.5 Noise Criteria
1. This section shall comply with QCS 2010 part 3

2. All Mechanical Equipment to be provided with vibration and sound isolators to assure
quiet comfort, the VAC system will be designed to ensure a sound level not exceeding
the following values. Noise Criteria are taken from ASHRAE application Handbook
Recommendations:
FSS COMPUTER ROOM NC 35-40

BRIEFING ROOM NC 35-40
DE-BRIEFING ROOM NC 35-40
CLASSROOM NC 35-40
CEET NC 35-40
CABIN DRY DITCHING NC 35-40
CABIN WET DITCHING NC 35-40
RECEPTION AREA NC 35-40
MALE TOI NC 35-40
FEMALE TOI NC 35-40
HOT SPARES STORE NC 35-40
STORAGE AREA 1 NC 35-40
STORAGE AREA 2 NC 35-40
REFECTORY NC 35-40
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
WORKSHOP NC 35-40
CORRIDOORS NC 35-40
ITC DEPT NC 35-40
CABIN CREW TRAINGING DEPT NC 35-40
FLIGHT TRAINING DEPT NC 35-40
SYNTHETIC ENGINEERING NC 35-40
MAINTENANCE TRAINING DEPT NC 35-40
SERVER ROOM NC 35-40
8.6 Heat Transmission Factor
1. Heat Transmission Factor
Heat Transmission Co-efficient : 0.077 Btu/ft-hr.-F

(U) Value for the roofs : 0.437 Watts/m-K
(Heat Transfer Co-efficient
Heat Transmission Co-efficient : 0.1 Btu/ft-hr.-F

(U) Value for the walls : 0.568 Watts/m-K
(Heat Transfer Co-efficient
Window wall ratio (SC):

5% to 40% : 0.56 Glass Btu/ft-hr- F
: 3.30 Watts/m-K
Above 40% : 0.36 Glass Btu/ft-hr- F
: 2.10 Watts/m-K
2. Rating for Continuous Service & Local Ambient Conditions
3. The outside air temperature may occasionally rise to 50C. (122F). All apparatus shall
be rated for continuous service, twenty four hours a day, seven days a week throughout
its normal rated life except for necessary routine maintenance. The Contractor shall
offer equipment which is capable of operating at the ambient temperature of 50C.
without any failure.
8.7 Electric Supply : 415 V, 3 PH,50 HZ, 4 WIRES
: 240 v, 1 PH, 50 Hz A/C supply
8.8 Duct Sizing Criteria
1. The ductwork sizing and room air distribution were considered in accordance with the
ASHRAE and SMACNA Standards. Friction loss and velocities were generally
considered as follows:
2. Velocity Method shall be employed for the duct sizing, the max duct velocity and noise
level shall be not exceed as per QCS 2010 section 22 part-1
Low Pressure Systems

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
Maximum duct velocity, supply 5 m/s
Maximum duct velocity, Return 4 m/s
Maximum duct velocity, Kitchen Exhaust 10 m/s
Maximum duct pressure loss 1 Pa/m
Maximum branch velocity from main duct 5 m/s

Maximum air velocity in occupied Zone at 1.5 m 0.25m/s
above floor
Maximum velocity at return air grille 1.5m/s
Maximum velocity across net grille area 2.5 m/s
Maximum final branch connection velocity 3 m/ s
Medium Pressure Systems

Maximum duct velocity (from 0 to 11m3/s) 12 m/s
Maximum duct velocity (above 11m3/s) 14 m/s
Maximum duct pressure loss 1 Pa/m
8.9 Pipe Sizing Criteria
The pipe work design is being prepared in accordance with ASHRAE

recommendations and considering the delivery of the chilled water at the design
temperatures specified under the technical requirements.
Supply chilled water temperature 7 OC.
Return chilled water temperature 12 OC.
8.10 Design Factors
The design factors shall be as follows:

Sensible : 10%
Latent : 5%
Total Cooling load : 20 %
9. introduction
The work shall be the Construction of Headquarter of General Directorate of Boarders

Passports, Expatriates Affairs and Nationality and Travel Documents Department in Wadi
Al Banat, Doha, State of Qatar
The proposed complex is consisting of multiple buildings as follows:

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
The Headquarter of General Directorate of Boarders Passports & Expatriates Affairs

Building, consisting of a 3-storey superstructure ground floor consists of Visitors receptions
& waiting halls, offices, lounges, facilities entrances, VIP lounges & service rooms, first floor
consists of offices, lounges, meeting rooms, employees services and facilities, archives &
ancillaries & second floor is designed for future extension, the building shall be comprised
of, but not limit to, the following departments:
a) General Directorate.
b) Passport Department.
c) Expatriates Affairs Department
d) Administration Department
e) Unified Services Department
f) Airport Passport Department
g) Search & Follow-up Department
The Nationality and Travel Documents Department building is consisting of a 3-storey

superstructure ground floor consists of Visitors receptions & waiting halls, offices, lounges,
facilities entrances, VIP lounges, archive & service rooms, first floor consists of offices,
lounges, meeting rooms, employees services and facilities, archives & ancillaries & second
floor is designed for future extension, the building shall be comprised mainly of the
following departments:
a) Travel Documents Section.
b) Nationality Section.
c) Administration Affairs Section
d) Archives Section
e) Public Relation , Planning& Statistics Office
f) Permanent Committee For Nationality
The Clubhouse building is consisting of a 2-storey superstructure ground floor consists of

Auditorium, manager office, lounges, facilities entrances, VIP lounges, GYM, swimming
pool & service rooms, first floor consists of lounges, dining areas, facilities, & ancillaries.
1. The two underground parking basements are divided as first basement parking for
visitors 952 parking slots, and second basement parking for employees 1316 parking
slots, in addition to ancillary buildings and main entrance from basement 1
2. The bldg HVAC system is a chilled Air type, Air Handling units, Fan Coil units system,
mini split DX type units, Precision Computer AC units and window type AC units.
10. description of air conditioning
10.1 Air Conditioning
1. The air conditioning system shall be designed to have comfort conditions keeping in
view the environmental conditions of institutional requirement, specific ventilation
requirement and air quality as recommended by ASHRAE, AIA and in accordance
with the international standards and codes of practice.
2. The proposed air conditioning system for this project is a central chilled water system
using air cooled screw type chillers, air handling units and fan coil units. The chillier
and Pumps will be on the roof.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
11. air conditioning equipment
11.1 Chilled Water System
1. It is proposed to use air cooled screw type chillers, which shall be capable of meeting
the full load in peak environmental condition. One of these chillier shall be standby,
each chillier shall have primary pump.
2. Primary pump constant flow for chillers chilled water requirements
3. Secondary pump shall be variable speed pump, the chilled water pumps shall be
installed in the Pump room. One of these pumps shall be standby. The distribution of
chilled water pipe work to the various air handling units and fan coil units shall be
carried out in accordance with the propose scheme drawings. Underground and
buried pipes will be provided with PVC cladding. Pipe passing through roads will be
concrete encased.
4. A chemical dosing pot shall be included in the system for chilled water treatment.
5. The complete building shall be divided into various zones depending upon the utility,
usage of space, individual temperature requirement etc.
11.2 System with Air handling Units
1. The air handling units for each area shall be located on the mechanical room or on
roof. The supply air from the various air handling units to the respective area would
be transmitted to the conditioned areas via galvanized sheet metal insulated duct
work and distributed through ceiling diffusers/linear diffusers and wall type grilles.
The supply air duct shall run where in the ceiling void. The return air would be
collected above the false ceiling / bulk head and carried back to the respective air
handling unit via return air duct.
2. Sound attenuators shall be provided in the supply and return duct work in order to
achieve the specified noise criteria. The ductwork shall be provided with volume
control dampers for proper balancing of the system.
3. Fresh air shall be mixed with the return air of each air handling unit before filter and
passing over the cooling coils. Fresh air connection shall be complete with insect
screen, sand trap louver, motorized volume control damper connected to
Hydrocarbon detection sensor,
4. A modulating controller and motorized diverter valve, step controller, temperature
sensor shall be provided for temperature control of each zone. Additionally, a smoke
detector installed in the return air duct and supply air duct of each unit shall shut down
the supply fan in the event of smoke detection.
5. The complete building shall be divided into various zones depending upon the utility,
usage of space, individual temperature requirement etc.
11.3 Ventilation System Description
Primary Fresh Air Installation.

Primary Extract System
Toilet Extract Systems.
1. Particular consideration is given to the requirement for increased ventilation rates to

the accommodation rooms, for the control of air born odours within the areas. This is
a particular requirement in order to keep the areas feeling fresh and clean.
2. The common supply and extract system shall have full heat/cooling recovery to
provide a base level of cooling on the system, which in turn shall provide reduced
running costs and energy consumption.
3. The primary fresh air system shall provide fresh air to the rear of room Fan Coil Units,
which shall mix with normal return air which shall be provided by a return air grille to
the FCU.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
4. The primary Extract air shall extract air from the areas from a fixed, ducted extraction
point which shall be agreed and developed as part of the detailed design.
5. Extract air shall be provided to all toilet areas to remove odours from the area
completely in order to achieve the extraction rates as stated elsewhere in this
specification.
11.4 General Supply & Extract Ventilation
1. Dedicated fresh air supply / extract ventilation system providing minimum fresh air for
occupancy levels by means of a packaged Air handling unit, supply and extract
ductwork with ceiling mounted supply diffusers and extract grilles.
2. The air handling unit shall be located on the room and shall comprise of a supply
section, extract section and a plate heat recovery section.
3. Duct attenuators shall be fitted to system side supply and extract ductwork and the
fresh air inlet and exhaust air outlet ductwork. In addition all necessary cross talk
attenuators shall be provided.
4. The supply section shall incorporate a UE4 Panel filter, EU8 bag filter, cooling coil
and an inverter driven backward curved centrifugal supply fan. The extract section
shall incorporate a EU4 panel filter (before plate recuperator) and an inverter driven
backward curved centrifugal extract fan. The Plate heat recovery section shall be
fitted with face and bypass dampers.
5. Fresh air inlet ducts shall be taken from an external source, exhaust ducts shall either
be taken to roof cowls or external louvers at least 10m from the inlet louvers.
6. The air handling plant shall be controlled from MCC located in the ground floor plant
room.
11.5 Ancillary Ventilation
1. The following ancillary ventilation systems shall be provided:

a. Ventilation to the Plant Room, to comply with legislation.
b. Ventilation cowl in the roof above the lift shaft To lift specialist requirements
c. Lift motor room ventilation To lift specialist requirements
d. Generator Rooms To specialist requirements
e. Transformer housings To specialist requirements
11.6 General standard system components
1. The air handling units shall be constructed with high quality galvanised Aluminium
zinc coated sheet steel panels using strong corner pieces. The framework shall be
clad with 50mm thick, double skinned insulted panels. The panels shall be mounted
flush with the frame members to create a smooth surface inside and outside. The
casing shall meet the CEN B (L2) air tightness class.
2. All section casings shall have the same cross-section and shall be identical in
appearance. The units and components shall be manufactured to ISO 9001 and to
the environment ISO 14001. Access doors shall be provided where necessary to
allow inspection and service on all filters, fans & heat recovery devices.
3. Filters, plate heat recovery units and fans shall be with drawable on slide rails. The
hinged access doors shall be provided with cam-locks with handles. The door shall be
provided with a permanently elastic, mechanically fixed, double lipped seal.
4. Discharge openings inlet & outlet shall be fitted with a flanged duct connection frame.
5. Dampers shall have contra-rotating blades of double plate construction with rubber
seals. All dampers shall be suitable for motorised control with fitted actuator where
applicable. A damper shall be fitted on each fresh air and return inlet.
6. The air handling unit shall comply with Part L building Regulations in terms of the SPF
at 25% equalling the SPF at 100%

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
7. Air handling unit fans / motors shall be selected to allow for the inclusion of air cooling
in the future with 10% space capacity over and above this provision.
8. All air handling plant shall be located to allow ease of access for maintenance
9. All equipment, where possible including drive motors and inverters should be selected
from the governments technology list, to enable the client to claim the ECAs
11.7 General Ventilation System ductwork requirements
1. All ventilation ductwork systems shall be manufactured from galvanised sheet metal
utilising proprietary flanging systems and installed in accordance with DW144 and
DW/TM2 for low velocity systems.
2. Where legislation requires the contractor shall include for the installation of fire rated
ductwork.
3. Any local toilet extract systems with ductwork 100mm and below can be run in PVC
duct and fittings with class O flame spread rating. Any associated fire dampers to be
the collar type.
4. All ductwork shall be supported through its entire length according to DW144
specification. The vertical ductwork shall be bracketed at no more than 1800mm
centres. The horizontal pipe work shall be bracketed at no more than 2400mm
centres.
5. Opposed blade volume control dampers shall be provided on all main, branch and
terminal ducts to aid commissioning.
6. Access doors shall be provided in accordance with the DW Specification and in
addition access doors shall be provided even at minimum centres of 10m intervals,
either side of bends/dampers etc for cleaning purposes. Where access doors are
required in insulated ductwork services, these shall be of the double skin pre-
insulated type.
7. Fire dampers shall be provided where ductwork passes through fire walls, ceiling void
smoke barriers and floor slabs, to give a minimum fire rating to that of the
penetration/compartment. BEMS monitored Fusible links shall be installed to monitor
the status of the damper position / operation, which shall be co-ordinated, wired and
installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
8. The mechanical services contractor shall allow for the ductwork systems to be fully
cleaned in accordance with TR/19, with protection, delivery and installation (PDI) level
2 being specified and access locations to comply with section 3 Tables 1 and 2.
9. The Mechanical Services Contactor shall allow for the systems to be commissioned
fully in accordance with the CIBSE Commissioning Code A for Air Distribution
Systems.
10. All systems shall be shall be monitored by the BEMS for fault indication. All filters
shall have remote filter dirty indication via the BEMS.
11. All ductwork shall be provided with 25mm diameter air volume test holes with tight
fitting plastic plugs and purposes. Test holes shall be indicated on the drawings prior
to manufacture.
12. All ductwork shall be sectionally tested and sealed during construction to meet with
the requirements of the Building Regulations. Full certification evidence of such tests
must be provided prior to closing up/insulating of any of the works.
11.8 Emergency Power Supply for VAC
1. The following equipment will be connected to the emergency power supply.
Ventilation/cooling equipment for fire pump room, elevator machine rooms, BMS
room, control room, IT Room, Q-tel. Room & T.E.R room.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
11.9 Motor Starter/Controller
1. Air Conditioning and Ventilating Equipments will be supplied complete with integral
motor starter/controller.
11.10 Outdoor Units
1. Air Conditioning and Ventilating Equipments located outdoor will be suitable for the
corrosive environment.
11.11 General
1. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, one month prior to the date of
commencement of the tests, six (6) copies of the complete test procedures to be
used. The procedure, method of calculation etc. shall be approved by the Engineer
before any test is carried out. Six (6) copies of the test results shall be furnished to the
Engineer for his approval.
2. The Contractor shall supply skilled staff and all necessary instruments and carry out
tests of any kind on a piece of equipment, apparatus, part of system or a complete
system if the Consultant requests such a test, for determining specified or guaranteed
data as given in the specifications or in the schedule of equipment filled in by the
Contractor.
3. Any damage resulting from the tests shall be repaired and/or damaged material
replaced, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer. In the event of any repair or
adjustment required to be made, other than the normal running adjustment, the tests
shall be void and shall be recommended after the adjustments or repairs have been
completed. The tests shall not be void due to circumstances beyond the Contractor's
control.
4. All testing, balancing and final adjustment shall be in accordance with the provision of
the applicable 'ASHRAE' standards.
11.12 Piping System
1. Pressure tests shall be applied to piping only before connection of equipment and
appliances. In no case shall, piping, equipment or appliances be subjected to
pressure exceeding their rating. If necessary, piping shall be taken down and
reassembled and no make-shift method of temporarily repairing leaks etc., will be
permitted.
2. Tests shall be completed and approved before any insulation is applied or pipes,
valves and fittings have been concealed. Tests shall be performed in the presence of
and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Any leaks or defects uncovered by the tests
shall be repaired and the system retested as above, at no additional cost to the
Employer.
3. All pipe work shall be hydraulically tested to a minimum test pressure of 1 times the
maximum working pressure or 8 bars, whichever is higher. Prescribed pressure shall
be maintained for four hours. All refrigerant systems shall be tested and proven tight
under nitrogen pressure of at least 150% of maximum working pressure which shall
be maintained for four hours. Before completely charging refrigerant, the whole
system shall have holding charge and be tested for leaks by means of a leak detector.
4. All chilled water pipe welding shall be done by certified welders.
11.13 Ductwork
1. This section shall be comply as per QCS2010 Section 22 part 6.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
2. All branches and outlets shall be tested for air quantity and the total of the air
quantities shall be within five percent of fan capacity. Volume control dampers and
splitter dampers shall be tested for proper operation.
11.14 Equipment
1. All air handling and ventilating equipment, ductwork and air outlets shall be adjusted
and balanced to deliver the specified air quantities indicated at each inlet and outlet
on the drawings.
2. Where the equipment or systems depend upon controls for proper operation,
functioning and performance, the latter shall be operated simultaneously with the
equipment or system during tests. If air quantities cannot be delivered without
exceeding the speed range of the sheaves or the available horse-power, the Engineer
shall be notified before proceeding with the balancing of air distribution system.
3. Other tests as specified under the specific equipment headings are to be completed
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
11.15 Electrical Equipment
1. All electrical equipment shall be cleaned and tested on site before application of
power as mentioned below :
2. Wire and cable tests
3. Insulation resistance test, phase to phase and phase to earth on all circuits and
equipments using a 500 volt megger. The insulation resistance shall not be less than
one (1) meg.ohm.
4. Earth resistance between conduit system and earth must not exceed five (5) ohms.
5. Phasing out and phase rotation tests.
6. Operating tests on all protective relays to prove their correct operation before
energizing the main equipment.
7. Operating tests on all starters, circuit breakers etc.
8. Any other test required as per QCD/QCS/Kahra-maa regulations.
11.16 Test on Completion
1. The contractor shall employ a specialist agency to carry out testing & commissioning
of all plant & equipment including air balance and water balancing.
2. After finishing the above tests and adjustments, the Contractor shall be responsible
for running a reliability trial test for the whole plant installed. The whole of the trial of
the plant shall take place during the appropriate seasons when design conditions are
met or approximated. The trial shall take place at any reasonable time subject to the
approval of the Engineer. The trial shall last for a period of thirty one (31) consecutive
days during which time the whole of the plant shall operate continuously without
readjustments or repair to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3. During the reliability trial test, performance tests shall be conducted on the
refrigerating and air conditioning equipment. The test data shall not deviate by more
than three percent from the guaranteed capacity data. Temperature readings shall be
taken for the entering and leaving air of each air handling unit. Should any part of the
apparatus or system fail to meet with the specification requirements, it shall be
adjusted, repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The complete
performance test shall then be repeated. The date of commencement of the above
said tests shall be subject to agreement with the Engineer. As soon as all tests
prescribed in this clause are carried out satisfactorily in the opinion of the Engineer, a
formal letter of completion shall be drawn up in three (3) copies and signed by the
Engineer.
4. During the maintenance period, the Contractor shall demonstrate that all equipment
and apparatus fulfil the requirements of the specifications and he shall operate all
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
fans, refrigeration and air conditioning equipment for a sufficient time to adjust all
dampers, thermostats and controls and shall provide the Engineer with a complete log
and report indicating air quantities, fan speed etc., throughout each of the various
systems for the operating seasons.
11.17 Maintenance Test
1. During 400 days maintenance period, the operation and day to day routine
maintenance of the plant and equipment shall be carried out by the owner's staff
whereas the defects / failure in the plant and equipment not as a result of inadequate
maintenance, shall be part of the Contractor's responsibility and shall be rectified free
of cost by the Contractor. After testing and commissioning, first set of filters for all
the AC Units shall be provided by the Contractor.
2. During the last month of the Maintenance period, the Contractor shall demonstrate to
the Engineer that all equipment and systems are operating according to the capacities
and the manner set down in the specifications. On completion of these tests, the
Engineer shall issue a formal letter of acceptance for the equipment and system or
parts of the system satisfactorily tested and approved.
3. The Maintenance Certificate will not be issued to the Contractor by the Engineer until
all plant has received the above mentioned letter of acceptance and/or unless a bank
guarantee is provided by the Contractor for the performance of that part of the plant
and equipment not formally tested and accepted.
11.18 Spares
General
1. Contractor shall provide all supplies and services in accordance with the approved
procedures for handling of spare parts, which shall include arranging for the proper
receipt stacking and storage.
2. Contractor shall obtain and submit a completed Spare Parts and Interchageability
Record (SPIR) form as per the format and in accordance with the QN standard, duly
filled in by the contractor/subcontractor while submitting the purchase
recommendations accompanied by SPIR.
3. It shall be noted that spare parts are required to maintain the facility immediately after
hand-over. Consequently, completion of the SPIR form with all related drawings etc.
shall be taken expeditiously by Contractor.
4. Contractor shall note that fully completed SPIR forms must be forwarded to QN within
30 days of order placement.
5. Spares for commissioning and start up
6. Contractor shall identify, define, procure and supply construction, pre-commissioning,
commissioning and start up spare parts, lubricants, special tools handling gear for
each vendor and supplier of equipment necessary.
11.19 Spares for first year operation
1. Contractor shall identify, define, procure and supply for the first year of operation
spare parts, lubricants, special tools handling gear for each vendor and supplier of
equipment necessary.
2. Upon completion of commissioning, Contractor shall take inventory to ensure that
spares for the first year of operation as identified and defined are available to QN.
11.20 Spares list of subsequent 2 years operation
1. Contractor shall identify and define for second and third year of operation spare parts
and lubricants for each supplier of equipment necessary.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
11.21 Packaged Water Chilling Plant
AIR COOLED SCREW CHILLER

General
1. The Contractor shall provide and install microprocessor controlled packaged air
cooled chillers having screw compressors working with HFC R-134a refrigerant, air
cooled condensers, DX evaporators, controls including starters within the panels.
The capacity of the chillers shall be as indicated in the schedule. The unit shall be
designed, manufactured and tested in a facility with quality assurance system
certified to ISO 9001. ISO 14001 & ISO 18001.
2. Each chiller shall have at least two independent refrigerant circuits. Each circuit shall
have one screw compressor.
3. Contractor may however offer chillers that have two compressors connected in
parallel to common refrigerant circuit. This shall be accepted at the discretion of the
Engineer subject to:
a. Such equipment being manufactured by a reputed manufacturer represented and
approved for use in the State of Qatar.
b. The type of equipment offered having been in satisfactory use in Qatar for a period
of at least 5 to 10 years.
c. Extended 5 years guarantee being offered on the parallel running compressors
including recharge of gas and oil in case of burn-out.
d. Tandem arrangement is not acceptable.
4. The system shall operate on 415 / 240 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz. at 115F ambient
temperature and the plant shall be capable of providing not less than specified
capacity at the specified conditions as mentioned in the schedule.
5. The capacity rating shall be as per AHRI 550/590 standards and manufacturer shall
be equipped with testing facilities at the required full load design conditions.
6. Rating of chillers AHRI 550/590
i. Construction of pressure vessel 97/23/EC (PED)
ii. Machinery Directive 98/37/EC as modified
7. Low Voltage 2006/95/EC
8. Electromagnetic Compatibility 2004/108/EC
9. Electrical & Safety codes EN 602041 / EN 60335-2-40
10. Manufacturing Quality Stds UNI EN ISO 9001:2000
11. The unit will be tested with water flowing through it in the factory at the prevailing
nominal working condition and water temp. Before shipment a full test will be held to
avoid any losses.
12. Chiller will be delivered to the job site completely assembled and charged with right
refrigerant and oil quantity. Comply with the manufacturer instructions for rigging and
handling equipment.
13. Contractor shall include in his cost for one chiller witness testing at factory at project
design conditions. All cost associated such as air-fare, lodging, boarding etc. for
client rep and consultant rep to be included.
14. Unit power input and footprint shall not exceed than those mentioned in the schedule
of equipment. Smaller footprint preferred to save on space.
CHARACTERISTICS OF CHILLERS
1. The water chilling plant shall be completely factory-assembled with all necessary
insulation of low temperature parts being factory applied. All wiring between control
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
components and all safety devices shall be completed at the factory. Each unit
shall have all safety and operating controls adjusted, set and tested at the factory.
2. In addition to the main components and their accessories listed in the clauses that
follow, each chiller should have:
a. Factory wired complete electric panel including isolator and starters and
microprocessor control system.
b. Starters should be designed for reduced inrush current operation to meet the
requirements of Kahra-maa Electrical regulations.
c. Seismic restraint spring type Vibration isolators below the chassis of the chiller
assembly; these shall be in addition to isolators provided for compressors.
d. Liquid charging valves.
e. Flanged type drier with removable cores and isolating valves.
f. Liquid line moisture indicator.
g. Suction line shut off valve
h. Discharge shut off valve.
i. Crankcase heater.
j. Electronic expansion valve.
2. Chiller shall include as standard not less than: two independent refrigerant circuits,
semi-hermetic
3. Single or twin screw compressor, electronic expansion device (EEXV), refrigerant
direct expansion shell & tube heat exchanger, air-cooled condenser section, R134a
refrigerant, lubrication system, motor starting components, suction & discharge line
shut-off valve, control system and all components necessary for safe and stable unit
operation.
4. Chiller will be factory assembled on a robust base-frame made of galvanized steel,

protected by an epoxy paint. The cabinet is made of galvanized steel sheet and
painted to provide a high resistance to corrosion complying to 1000 Hrs salt spray
test as per ASTM B specifications. Colour Ivory White (Munsell code 5Y7.5/1)
(RAL7044).
5. Contractor to ensure chiller dimensions should not exceed than those specified on
the schedule.
REFRIGERANT
Only HFC 134a will be accepted.
NOISE LEVEL AND VIBRATIONS

1. Sound pressure level at 1 meter distance in free field, semispheric conditions, shall
not exceed 80 dB(A) as per ISO 3744 standards. When needed to achieve these
levels, the manufacturer shall provide the necessary sound treatment. Acceptable
sound attenuation devices include, but are not limited to compressor sound
enclosures and/or low-sound fans. This enclosure shall be realized with a light,
corrosion resisting aluminium structure and metal panels. The compressors sound-
proof enclosure shall be internally fitted with flexible, multi layer, high density
materials. Blankets/jackets not acceptable.
2. The sound pressure levels must be rated in accordance to ISO 3744.

3. Vibration on the base frame should not exceed 2 mm/s.
CHILLER COMPONENTS

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
Compressors (Screw)
1. Semi-hermetic, single-screw asymmetric type with one main helical rotor meshing
with two diametrical opposed gate-rotors or twin screw type. The gate-rotors contact
elements shall be constructed of composite material designed for extended life.
Electrical motor shall be 2-pole, semi-hermetic, squirrel-cage induction type and
cooled by suction gas. Motor speed should not exceed 2950 RPM. In case VFD is
provided harmonic filters to be supplied to comply with IEEE 519 regulation. Also,
cooling source for VFD to be independent for each circuit.
2. The oil injection shall be used in order to get high EER (Energy Efficiency Ratio) also
at high condensing pressure and low sound pressure levels in each load condition.
3. The compressor shall be provided with a built in, high efficiency, mesh type oil
separator and oil filter.
4. Compressor should be provided with Suction Line Shut off valve.
5. Refrigerant system differential pressure shall provide oil injection on all moving
compressor parts to correctly lubricate them. Electrical oil pump lubricating system is
not acceptable.
6. Compressor cooling must be done by refrigerant liquid injection. External dedicated
heat exchanger and additional piping to carry the oil from the compressor to heat
exchanger and vice-versa will be not accepted.
7. The compressor shall be direct electrical driven, without gear transmission between
the screw and the electrical motor.
8. The compressor casing shall be provided with ports to realize economized refrigerant
cycles.
9. Compressor must be protected by temperature sensor for high discharge
temperature and electrical motor thermistor for high winding temperature.
10. The compressor shall be equipped with an electric oil heater.
11. Compressor shall be fully field serviceable. Compressor that must be removed and
returned to the factory for service shall be unacceptable.
Cooling capacity control system

1. Each chiller will have a microprocessor for the control of compressor slide valve
position.
2. The unit capacity control shall be infinitely modulating, from 100% down to 25% for
each circuit (from 100% down to 12,5% of full load for unit with 2 compressors). The
chiller shall be capable of stable operation to a minimum of 12,5% of full load without
inefficient hot gas bypass.
3. The system shall control the unit based on the leaving evaporator water temperature
that shall be controlled by a PID (Proportional Integral Derivative) logic.
4. Unit control logic shall manage the compressor slides to exactly match plant load
request in order to keep constant the set point for delivered chilled water
temperature.
5. The microprocessor unit control shall detect conditions that approach protective
limits and take self corrective action prior to an alarm occurring. The system shall
automatically reduce chiller capacity when any of the following parameters are
outside their normal operating range: a) High condenser pressure b) Low
evaporation refrigerant temperature
Evaporator
1. The units shall be equipped with a Direct Expansion shell&tube evaporator with
copper tubes rolled into steel tube sheets. The evaporator shall be single-pass on
both the refrigerant and water sides for pure counter-flow heat exchange and low
refrigerant pressure drops.The external shell shall be linked with an electrical heater
to prevent freezing down to -28C ambient temperature, controlled by a thermostat

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
and shall be insulated with flexible, closed cell polyurethane insulation material (20-
mm thick).
2. The evaporator will have 2 circuits, one for each compressor and shall be single
refrigerant pass.
3. The water connections shall be VICTAULIC type connections as standard to ensure
quick mechanical disconnection between the unit and the hydronic network.
4. Evaporator shall be manufactured in accordance to PED approval.
Condenser coil
1. The condenser coils are constructed with internally finned seamless copper tubes
having a "W" configuration and arranged in a staggered row pattern and
mechanically expanded into lanced and rippled aluminium fins with full fin collars for
higher efficiencies. The space between the fins are given by a collar that will
increase the surface area in connection with the tubes, protecting them from ambient
corrosion. Fins per inch should be optimized to 14 FPI. Coils shall be protected
against corrosion by locally applied heresite coating with 5 years warranty. Other
type coatings not acceptable.
2. Micro-channel coil with AL tubes not acceptable.
3. Condenser should be able to hold entire refrigerant charge to facilitate the
maintenance of compressor.
4. The coils will have an integral sub-cooler circuit that provides sufficient sub-cooling to
effectively eliminate the possibility of liquid flashing and increase the unit's efficiency
of 5-7% without increasing in energy consumption.
5. The condenser coil shall be leak-tested and submitted to a pressure test with dry air.
Condenser fans
1. The fans used in conjunction with the condenser coils, shall be propeller type with
glass reinforced resin blades for higher efficiencies and lower noise. Each fan shall
be protected by a fan guard.
2. The air discharge shall be vertical and each fan must be coupled to the electrical
motor, supplied as standard to IP54 and capable to work to ambient temperatures of
- 20C to + 65C.
3. They shall have as a standard a thermally protection by internal thermal motor
protection and protected by circuit breaker installed inside the electrical panel as a
standard.
Refrigerant circuit
1. The unit must have multiple independent refrigerant circuits.
2. Each circuit shall include as standard: electronic expansion device piloted by units
microprocessor control, compressor discharge shut-off valve, replaceable core filter-
drier, sight glass with moisture indicator and insulated suction line.
Condensation control
1. The units will be provided with an automatic control for condensing pressure which
ensures the
2. working at low external temperatures down to 10C, to maintain condensing
pressure. Compressor automatically unloads when abnormal high condensing
pressure is detected to prevent the shutdown of the refrigerant circuit (shutdown of
the unit) due to a high-pressure fault.
CONTROL PANEL
1. Field power connection, control interlock terminals, and unit control system should be
centrally located in an electric panel (IP 54). Power and starting controls should be
separate from safety and operating controls in different compartments of the same
panel. The main panel is fitted with a main switch interlocked door. Unit controller
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
should be able to protect critical components based on external signs from its system
(such as motor temperatures, refrigerant gas and oil pressures, correct phase
sequence, pressure switches and evaporator). The input coming from the high
pressure switch cuts all digital output from the controller in less than 50ms, this is an
additional security for the equipment. Fast program cycle (200ms) for a precise
monitoring of the system. Floating point calculations supported for increased
accuracy in P/T conversions.
64x44 dots liquid crystal display with white back lighting. Supports Unicode fonts for
multilingual.
Key-pad consisting of 3 keys.
PushnRoll control for an increased usability.
Memory to protect the data.
General faults alarm relays.
Password access to modify the setting.
Application security to prevent application tampering or hardware usability with third
party applications.
Service report displaying all running hours and general conditions.
Alarm history memory to allow an easy fault analysis
Starting will be Wye-Delta type (Y-). For VFD starting, harmonic filters to meet
IEEE519 standards to be provided.
Operating and safety controls should include energy saving control; emergency stop
switch; overload protection for compressor motor; high and low pressure cut-out
switch (for each refrigerant circuit); anti-freeze thermostat; cut-out switch for each
compressor.
All of the information regarding the unit will be reported on a display and with the
internal built-in calendar and clock that will switch the unit ON/OFF during day time
all year long.
The following features and functions shall be included:
a) leaving water temperature reset by controlling the water
temperature t, by a remote 4-20mA DC signal or by
controlling the external ambient temperature;
b) soft load function to prevent the system from operating at full
load during the chilled fluid pull-down period;
c) Password protection of critical parameters of control;
d) Start-to-start and stop-to-start timers to provide minimum
compressor off-time with maximum motor protection;
e) Communication capability with a PC or remote monitoring;
f) Discharge pressure control through intelligent cycling of
condenser fans;
g) Lead-lag selection by manual or automatically by circuit run
hours;
h) Double set point for brine unit version;
i) Scheduling via internal time clock to allow programming of a
yearly start-stop schedule accommodating weekends and
holidays.
Control section - main features

Management of the compressor stepless capacity and fans modulation.
Chillers enabled to work in partial failure condition.
Full routine operation at condition of:
-High ambient temperature value
-High thermal load
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
-High evaporator entering water temperature (start-up)

Display of evaporator entering/leaving water temperature.
Display of Outdoor Ambient Temperature.
Display of condensing-evaporating temperature and pressure, suction and
discharge
Superheat for each circuit.
Leaving water evaporator temperature regulation. Temperature tolerance =
0,1C.
Compressors and evaporator pumps hours counter.
Display of Status Safety Devices.
Number of starts and compressors working hours.
Optimized management of compressors load.
Fan management according to condensing pressure.
Re-start in case of power failure (automatic / manual).
Soft Load (optimized management of the compressors load during the start-
up).
Start at high evaporator water temperature.
Return Reset (Set Point Reset based on return water temperature).
OAT (Outside Ambient temperature) Reset.
Application and system upgrade with commercial SD cards.
Ethernet port for remote or local servicing using standard web browsers.
Two different sets of default parameters could be stored for easy restore.
Safety device / logic for each refrigerant circuit

High pressure (pressure switch).
High pressure (transducer).
Low pressure (transducer).
Fans circuit breaker.
High compressor discharge temperature.
High motor winding temperature.
Phase Monitor.
Low pressure ratio.
High oil pressure drop.
Low oil pressure.
No pressure change at start.
System security
Phase monitor.
Low Ambient temperature lock-out.
Freeze protection.
Regulation type
Proportional + integral + derivative regulation on the leaving water evaporator output
probe.
Condenser Fans
1. The fans used in conjunction with the condenser coils, shall be propeller type direct
driven by TEFC motor having minimum class (F) insulation with temperature rise
limited to class B. Each fan shall be equipped with a heavy-gauge fan guard.
2. The air discharge shall be vertical and each fan must be coupled to the electrical
motor, supplied as standard IP54 suitable for outdoor installation and capable to

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
work to ambient temperatures of 40 C to +55 C. There is also an accident

protection within the motors.
3. Fan blades shall be fabricated from reinforced glass fiber and shall be statically &
dynamically balanced.
INSTALLATION
A Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's requirements, shop drawings, and
contract documents.
B Adjust and level chiller in alignment on supports.
C Coordinate electrical installation with electrical contractor.
D Coordinate controls with control contractor.
E Provide all appurtenances required to insure a fully operational and functional
chiller.
Startup
F Provide Factory Authorized starting of chillers, and instruction to the owner on
proper operation and maintenance.
Note: Chillers shall be capable to operate at an ambient temperature of 52C. without

failure.
11.22 Chilled Water Pumps
Chilled Water pumps (Primary)

1. Pumps shall be base mounted, directly connected to their motor through flexible
couplings. Pumps shall perform the specified duty at 52 degrees C ambient.
2. Pump casings shall be cast iron with bronze or stainless steel impeller, stainless steel
shaft, mechanical seal, flexible coupling and cast / MS iron base. Each pump shall be
driven by a constant speed having minimum Class 'F' insulation with a temperature
rise limited to class B, totally enclosed fan cooled motor at 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz.,
A.C. Rpm not to exceed 1450 Rpm.
3. Pumps shall be centrifugal end suction, single stage type.
4. Each pump shall be fitted with the following components :
a. 100 mm diameter suction and discharge pressure gauges, siphons and cocks
b. Flexible connections on inlet and outlet
c. Check valve on outlet
d. Isolating gate valve on inlet and outlet
e. Strainer on inlet
f. Vibration isolators below pump bases.
5. The duty point shall fall at the maximum efficiency for the selected pump. Pump shall
not be selected at the end of its performance curve. Motor to be non-overloading
throughout the capacity range of the pump for the impeller size selected.
6. The Contractor is expected to cross check the pressure head requirements in
conjunction with the water side equipment selected by him and submit the necessary
calculations to the Engineer for approval. However, the motor kW should not be less
than that indicated in the pump schedule.
Chilled Water pumps (Secondary)

1. Pumps shall be base mounted, directly connected to their motor through flexible
couplings. Pumps shall perform the specified duty at 52 degrees C ambient.
2. Pump casings shall be cast iron with bronze or stainless steel impeller, stainless steel
shaft, mechanical seal, flexible coupling and cast / MS iron base. Each pump shall be
driven by a VARIABLE speed having minimum Class 'F' insulation with a temperature
rise limited to class B, totally enclosed fan cooled motor at 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz.,
A.C. Rpm not to exceed 1450 Rpm.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
3. Pumps shall be centrifugal end suction, single stage type.

4. Each pump shall be fitted with the following components :
a. 100 mm diameter suction and discharge pressure gauges, siphons and cocks
b. Flexible connections on inlet and outlet
c. Check valve on outlet
d. Isolating gate valve on inlet and outlet
e. Strainer on inlet
f. Vibration isolators below pump bases.
g. Variable frequency drive(VFD)
5. The duty point shall fall at the maximum efficiency for the selected pump. Pump shall
not be selected at the end of its performance curve. Motor to be non-overloading
throughout the capacity range of the pump for the impeller size selected.
6. The Contractor is expected to cross check the pressure head requirements in
conjunction with the water side equipment selected by him and submit the necessary
calculations to the Engineer for approval. However, the motor kW should not be less
than that indicated in the pump schedule.
11.23 Water Pressurization Unit
1. The chilled water system shall be a closed pressurized system incorporating a

combined pressurization and automatic water make-up unit as indicated on the
drawings.
2. The pressurization unit shall be an integrated unit, factory assembled and tested.
3. The pressurization unit shall incorporate a break tank, two make-up pumps (one
running, one standby), expansion vessels, associated pipe work and valves and
controls.
4. The expansion vessels shall be of the pre-pressurized diaphragm type manufactured
to BS 4814 and shall be subjected to a test pressure of 750 kPa.
5. The twin expansion vessel shall have a capacity as indicated in the drawings.
6. The controls shall include the following:
a. Automatic pump change-over upon failure of duty pump indicated by pump
failure light.
b. Manual pump selector switch.
c. Duty pump run light.
d. Hours run indicators for pumps.
e. Low pressure visible and audible alarm.
11.24 Air Handling Equipment
1. CONSTRUCTION OF AIR HANDLING UNITS
2. General
3. The air handling unit manufacturer shall provide detailed technical data sheets with at least
the following information:
4. Scaled drawings, dimensions and weight of each unit and every delivery modules
5. Performances of every component
6. The energy class as per Eurovent calculation
7. Air pressure drops for each internal components
8. Specific fan power of the unit
9. Inlet, outlet and airborne sound power and sound pressure levels
10. List of selected controls components
11. The maximum velocity through the coils finned surface area shall not exceed the values
indicated in the detailed description and in any case 3,0 m/s.
12. The fans and motors shall be selected with medium filter pressure drops.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
13. The air handling units shall be of robust design and manufactured to withstand maximum
fan pressures with closed dampers, without permanent deformation.
14. All sections of the air handling unit shall be constructed to conform to the pressure
characteristics of the system under all operating conditions to prevent drumming, distortion
and vibration when tested to a pressure differential of 2500 N/m.
15. The Efficiency Class of each fan motor set and the whole unit shall be provided. The
technical data sheets shall clearly provide:
i. The Energy Efficiency Class of each fan-motor set and of the complete unit
ii. The Specific Fan Power of each fan-motor set and of the compete unit
iii. The air velocity through the coils finned area
16. The casing construction shall be made with 50 mm thick self-supporting panels, assembled
together without any vertical members. To avoid dust traps, supporting or assembly frames
inside the air stream are not permitted.
17. The panels are assembled together with concealed internal fixings from the edge of the
panels. Screws or bolts crossing the panels shall be avoided to ensure completely closed
panels, avoid humidity migration inside the panels, fiber carry over into the air stream and
long lasting air tightness. Proper sealants shall be fitted between the panels to guaranty
long lasting casing air and water tightness.
18. The outer skin shall be mechanically fixed to the inner skin with a clips system in order to
get all panels easily removable.
19. The unit construction shall be silicone free. Usage of polyurethane or any kind of foam is
forbidden for safety reasons in case of fire.
20. Screws or bolts protruding inside the air stream are not permitted.
21. To minimize internal air pressure drops and the on-site foot print, the internal dimensions of
the units shall be based on the universal filter frame dimensions. Therefore, internal
dimensions shall be multiple of 305 mm in the height and in the width, and 152,5 in length
providing a neat exterior along the length of the unit and a clean interior appearance to
ensure even distribution of air across the face of all components without blanking plates.
22. Top and side panels shall be fixed together with heavy duty 1,5 mm thick profiles. These
profiles shall be made:
i. In aluminum, protected with an anti-corrosion powder coating.
ii. In Stainless steel 304
23. The bottom panels shall be integrated into a C shaped bolted base frame in galvanized
steel to facilitate reinforce the casing stability and facilitate the unit handling.
24. The air handling units shall be delivered in one piece or with separate modules to be
connected together on site. The assembly between the delivered modules shall ensure
perfect continuity of the air passage and a smooth interior finish without any rough points or
cavities at joining surfaces to prevent any dust build-up encouraging microbial growth.
25. All internal electrical components and the entire unit shall be earthed.
26. Unit to be provided with Factory Panel.
27. The mechanical characteristics of the casing shall be tested by an independent laboratory.
4.2.2 Panels
1. Panels shall be self-supporting, 50mm thick double skinned, perfectly closed, thermally and
acoustically insulated. They shall be flush mounted, providing smooth internal walls with no
dust trapping to facilitate interior cleaning.
2. The panels shall be protected against corrosion and made of:

i. Galvanized steel, according to EN 142-79 as a minimum quality
ii. The inner skin shall not be less than 1.5 mm, the outer skin not less than 1.0
mm

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
iii. The internal guides shall be in stainless steel 316
3. The outer skin shall be made of galvanized steel sheet (based on EN 142-79 ) treated with
a UV, weather and scratch-resistant PVC coating (PVC coating tested 500h based on
ASTM B 117-95 and 1000h based on ASTM D 2247-94).The external PVC coating shall be
white colored, RAL9003 or equivalent and not be less than 150 m thick.
4. The panels shall be insulated with a 50 mm thick non-combustible mineral fiber infill
insulation having a thermal conductivity of 0.59 W/mK maximum according to DIN 4108.
a. Isolation 50 Kg/m3
5. The insulation shall be totally encapsulated to prevent migration of particles into the air
stream.
6. The panel insulation shall comply with the following fire protection class:
i. Class 0 according to ISO 1182.2
ii. Class A1 according to DIN 4102
iii. A1 according to EN 13501-1:2007
7. Polyurethane or any kind of foam based insulation is not allowed for safety reasons in case
of fire.
8. The panels shall provide a high degree of noise attenuation to minimize noise breakout,
and shall be sufficient to achieve the following reduction:
i. Industry casing execution: (1,0/1,5 mm)
ii. Rw = 41dB according to DIN 52210-3
9. Certification proving noise reduction of the panels shall be provided with the tender.
4.2.3 Access doors

1. Adequate access with hinged doors shall be provided to ensure that all components can
be cleaned, inspected or serviced easily. Doors shall be made with the same construction
as the casing panels, 50 mm thick, completely closed, internally and externally flush
mounted. Hinged doors shall be provided in all sections where regular maintenance is
required, such as fan, filter or humidifier sections.
2. Hinged doors shall be mounted on Aluminum frames, with adjustable heavy duty
aluminum hinges and fastened with reinforced PA6 handles.
3. Hinged doors provided on positively pressurized sections shall be with inward opening or
equipped with safety chains.
4. The door frames shall have thermal welded rubber seals designed to ensure the optimum
air tightness for the life of the units.
5. The locking system of the handles of shall be made of wear-resistant plastic roller bearing
to prevent scratching or damage to the door frame.
6. The hinged doors provided on fan sections shall be lockable with a key.
7. Removable inspection panels shall be provided on narrow sections or where regular
access is not needed.
4.2.4 Unit Base Frame

1. For rigidity and stability reason, each delivery module shall be supported with a
continuous built heavy gauge base frame:
2. Base frame shall be In C type, made from Galvanized steel, with height not less then 100
mm with a min thickness of 4mm
3. The unit base frame shall be provided around the entire perimeter of the air handling unit
and wherever a joint occurs between the sections. Lifting lugs shall be provided to
facilitate the onsite lifting.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
4.2.5 Packing
1. Prior to dispatch, each section of air handling units shall be provided with a packing to
prevent damages during transit, storage and installation.
a. On pallet, with shrink wrapping and heavy duty polythene sheeting
4.2.6 Panel pre-filters
1. The panel pre-filters shall be 48 or 98 mm thick, and G2, G3, G4 or F5 rated according to
EN 779:2002.
2. The filters consist of metallic or synthetic pleated media fitted in galvanized steel headers.
3. The filters shall be suitable for 70C in continuous service.
4. The pre filters shall be installed in rails, on universal frames.
5. When the pre filters are fitted on universal frames, the optimum airtightness between the
filter cells and the frames shall be insured with continuous rubber seals compliant to the
VDI 6022 recommendations.
6. To optimize maintenance and storage costs, the filter dimensions shall comply with the
Eurovent 2/2 recommendations as follows:
i. 592mm x 592mm x 48 mm or 592mm x 592mm x 98 mm
ii. 592mm x 287mm x 48 mm or 592mm x 287mm x 98 mm
7. The designed pressure drop used for the fan selection shall be the mid-life pressure drop at
nominal air flow.
8. Filters to be of a high MERV characteristic as to meet GSAS requirements.
4.2.7 High efficiency bag filters
1. High efficiency filters shall be bag type, rated from F5 to F9 according to EN 779:2011. The
rigid bag filters shall be Eurovent certified, feature low air pressure drops and long
operating life cycle.
2. They shall be made with glass fiber or synthetic media fitted in 25 mm thick headers. They
shall be lightweight and easy to install.
3. The filters shall be suitable for 70C in continuous service.
4. To optimize maintenance and storage costs, the filter dimensions shall comply with the
Eurovent 2/2 recommendations:
i. 592mm x 592mm x 535mm
ii. 592mm x 287mm x 535 mm
5. Filters shall be fitted into the units on universal holding frames which shall be screwed and
properly sealed to the casing. The optimum airtightness between the filter cells and the
frames shall be insured with continuous rubber seals compliant to the VDI 6022
recommendations.
6. The designed pressure drop used for the fan selection shall be the mid-life pressure drop at
nominal air flow.
7. The filter bypass leakage shall not exceed 0.5% of the nominal air flow at the nominal
operating condition, Class F9 as per EN 1886.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
8. Filters to be of a high MERV characteristic as to meet GSAS requirements.
4.2.8 Inspection windows (Portholes)

1. Inspection windows shall be made of polycarbonate with sealing gaskets.
2. The fastening system made with locking screws only shall the polycarbonate structure, and
not the panels to avoid thermal bridges. A thick and continuous internal-external gasket
shall be fitted to ensure highest air tightness. The windows shall be round, 200mm
diameter as a minimum and double wall construction.
4.2.9 Bulkhead lights

1. Bulkhead lights shall be provided in access.
2. Bulkhead lights shall be made with aluminum bodies and clear polycarbonate lens.
3. They shall be corrosion resistant and watertight, IP65.
4. They shall be suitable for 60W bulbs under 24V or 230V and pre-wired as specified.
4.2.10 Chilled water coils
1. Chilled water coils shall be easily demountable with removable, fitted on rails with
removable front panel.
2. The air velocity through the finned block area shall not exceed 2,5 m/s.
3. Coil performances shall be in accordance to AHRI Standard 410-2001.
4. Chilled water coils shall be designed for a maximum operating pressure of 16 bars, and
factory tested at 30 bars.
5. The coils shall be made of seamless copper tubes, 0,35 mm (for 9mm tubes) and 0,42 mm
thick for 16mm tubes as a minimum and 0,12 thick aluminum fins. The coil frame shall be
made of galvanized steel and the header shall be made of painted mild steel. Coil headers
shall be equipped with drain and air vent. Other materials for the fins, frames or headers or
special treatment shall be provided as specified in the detailed description.
6. The fins shall be flat to avoid fouling and allow a proper cleaning.
7. The minimum fin spacing shall not be lower than 2,5 mm and not lower than 3,0 mm when
the sensible heat ratio is lower than 0,7.
8. Coil connections shall be threaded and capped prior shipment.
9. EUROVENT certified data (Rating Standard 6/C/005-2011), capacity, air and water side
pressure drop.
10. To avoid risk of water carry over, cooling coils shall be provided with droplet eliminators
when the air velocity trough the finned block exceeds 2,49 m/s and/or when the sensible
heat ratio is below than 0,9.
11. The droplet eliminators shall be made of polypropylene blades having a minimum width of
110mm. The blades shall be mounted in a galvanized steel or stainless steel frame. If the
AHU internal height is max. 915mm the droplet separator should be in frameless execution.
12. A properly sized drain tray, with 3 slopes shall be incorporated in the bottom panel of the
cooling coil section, with a 32 mm diameter drain located on the side of the unit.
13. Coil connections shall be capped prior shipment.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
14. Performances, accessories and options as indicated in the detailed description shall be
provided.
4.2.11 Belt driven centrifugal fans
1. Fans and motors shall be assembled on a common base frame isolated from the casing
with rubber or spring isolators and flexible gasket or flexible connection between the fan
discharge and the casing.
2. Scroll reinforcements and properly sized bearings shall be provided to ensure a safe
operation at the nominal air flow/pressure conditions.
3. Centrifugal fans shall be belt driven, double inlet, double width type. Fan scroll shall be lap
jointed and made of galvanized steel.
4. Fan impellers back airfoil type as specified in the detailed description.
5. Inlet cones shall match to the impeller to reduce entry losses to a minimum.
6. The ratings shall be based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with AMCA
Publication 211 and comply with the requirements of the AMCA Certified Ratings Program.
7. Performance data shall be according to DIN 24166 Class 1 or Class 2.
8. Impeller and shaft shall be statically and dynamically balanced as an assembly in according
to DIN ISO 1940.
9. Fan Motors shall be in accordance to the IEC norm, air cooled, type B 3, VDE-tested,
protection class IP55, insulation class F, efficiency class IEC60034: IE2, and suitable for
frequency invertors.
10. Belt drives shall be with high performance belts according to DIN, and balanced pulleys
fitted with taper lock system.
11. Cable glands through casing for motor power cable shall be provided.
12. Fan and motor unit with certified datas acc. EUROVENT "Rating Standard 6/C/0051997"
11.25 SPLIT TYPE AIR CONDITIONING UNIT (Wall Mounted)
A. General
1. This section shall be complied with QCS 2010 section 22 part 3
2. The plant required shall consist of air cooled split type air conditioning unit of wall
mounted type. The unit shall be composed of an indoor unit with refrigerant circuit and
an air cooled outdoor unit for application with R. 22 refrigerant.
B. INDOOR UNIT
1. The indoor Ceiling concealed ducted / wall mounted exposed/slim line type A.C unit
shall comprise of an evaporator, evaporator fan, fan motor, air filter, liquid and gas
inlets, strainer/drier, controls, internal wiring and piping all housed in a decorative
sheet steel cabinet with banked resin pain for the decorative free discharge type. The
cabinet interior shall be fully insulated to prevent sweating and to muffle the sound.
2. The evaporator coils shall be the multi-pass, cross-finned tube type, equipped with
aluminium plate fins, mechanically bonded to seamless oxygen free copper tubes.
The coil shall be cleaned, dehydrated and tested for leakage at the factory.
3. The evaporator fan shall be forward curved, centrifugal type, statically and
dynamically balanced and directly driven by the motor. The fan motor shall be
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
permanently lubricated. The evaporator fan must be selected to operate quietly with
no overloading of fan motors.
4. The air filter shall be washable type, long life as per manufacturers standard. The
panels should be easily removable to provide access for servicing.
5. The refrigerant circuit shall have one shot coupling for liquid and gas inlets, a
strainer, a capillary tube and an evaporator coil. Slim line Type unit shall be complete
with fresh air intake with sand trap louver and volume damper & insect screen.
C. OUTDOOR UNIT
1. The outdoor unit shall comprise of air cooled condenser, condenser fan and fan
motor, suction and discharge outlets, liquid line shut-off valves and necessary safety
controls such as crank-case heater, solid state motor protector, anti-recycling control
etc., all as per manufacturers standard. The outdoor unit shall be factory
assembled, piped internally, pre-wired, charged with R. 22 refrigerant and shall be
designed to operate at outdoor ambient temperatures as high as 50C.
2. The cabinet shall be constructed of steel, finished with baked synthetic resin paint.
The fan guard wire net shall be mounted on top or side of the unit and shall be
adequately protected against corrosion.
3. The unit shall contain a hermetic multi-cylinder reciprocating compressor from the
same manufacturer. The hermetic compressor shall be welded shell type and spring
suspended internally. The compressor shall be protected against breakdown by the
mercury over current relay, pressure switch and an in-built internal thermostat.
4. The condenser coil shall be the multi-pass, cross-finned type, equipped with
aluminium plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless oxygen free copper tubes.
The coil shall be cleaned, dehydrated and tested for leakage at the factory. The
condenser fan shall be propeller type with aluminium blades, statically and
dynamically, balanced and driven directly by the motor for up flow or horizontal
air discharge. The motor shall be permanently lubricated and shall be protected from
water invasion. The refrigerant circuit shall be composed of a gas inlet, one shot
coupling, a condenser coil and a liquid outlet one shot coupling.
D. UNIT CONTROL
1. The indoor unit shall be equipped with an operation switch, fan speed selector switch
and a thermostat mounted on the remote control switch for Indoor Units. The
operation switch shall have the function of OFF-FAN-COOL. The operation control
shall conform to manual starting, automatic continuous operation whenever the
thermostat requires and protection devices allow. The unit shall be restarted by
resetting the operation switch if any one of the protection devices trips.
E. PROTECTION DEVICES
1. The magnetic switch box incorporated in the outdoor or indoor unit shall contain
magnetic contractor for all motors, including condenser fan motor, over current relays
and auxiliary relays.
F. NOISE LEVEL AND SOUND ISOLATION (FOR SPLIT UNIT)
1. Noise level inside the conditioned area resulting from the unit shall not exceed 50 dba
(NC45) at low speed and 55dba (NC50) at high speed when measured at one meter
distance in a room with normal occupancy and furnishing.
2. All the running equipments shall be isolated from the building structure and the
support isolated from other items of equipment. All the units shall have anti-vibration
mountings of approved make and shall be as described elsewhere.
G. ELECTRICAL WORKS
1. The electrical works shall include the following:
a. Provide all power and control wiring from isolator to outdoor unit, from outdoor
unit to indoor D.P switch, from D.P switch to indoor unit and the control panel.
b. Provide Earthling for A.C. equipment as per Kahra-maa regulations.
2. All electrical works shall be carried out in conformity with the current I.E.E and Kahra-
maa regulations.
H. REFRIGERANT PIPES
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
1. Refrigerant pipe work between the condensing unit and indoor unit shall be installed
as per applicable ASHRAE standards and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
2. Refrigerant quality seamless cold drawn copper piping shall be used. Silver brazing
alloy shall be used for making joints. The pipe work will be run as indicated on the
drawings and as per instructions. All necessary unions, flanged valves or fittings
should be provided for disconnecting.
3. In case the refrigerant piping is fabricated at site, the system shall be pressure tested
with nitrogen to at least 1 times the working pressure for leaks, vacuum dried and
then charged with refrigerant in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
4. Factory supplied, pre insulated, pre-charged refrigerant piping kit may be used for the
split unit of smaller capacity (up to 2.5 TR nominal). But this refrigerant piping shall
be additionally wrapped with glass cloth and finished with two coats of vapour barrier
compound.
I. THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPES
1. The thermal insulation shall be non-corrosive to the metal, water repellent and fire
resistant.
2. Refrigerant suction lines and liquid lines (wherever required) shall be insulated with
19 mm thick foam rubber insulation. The insulation materials shall be submitted to
the Engineer for approval prior to ordering.
3. All pipe surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and treated with approved corrosion
inhibitor before applying insulation.
4. The pipe insulation shall be stuck to the pipe work with an approved adhesive. The
insulation shall be applied to the pipes with longitudinal joints staggered; laps and
sealing strips shall be sealed applying adhesive on circumferential joints.
5. Insulation shall be covered externally with 200 gm/sq.m quality glass cloth and
painted with two coats of approved weather proofing compound forming minimum
thickness of 1 mm as per Kahra-maa regulations.
J. PIPEWORK SUPPORTS
1. All refrigerant piping shall be supported to prevent deflection, buckling and vibration.
2. Piping shall be supported at all changes in direction and at intervals of not more than
1.5 meters on straight runs. Pipe supports and clamps shall be subject to approval of
the Engineer.
3. Pipe work on roof shall be supported on off-set clamps, floor or rikker stands. The
pipe support stands shall be bolted to the concrete slab/base.
4. Condensate drain pipe supports shall be capable of vertical adjustment after
installation of piping. Pipe work on roof shall be supported on off-set clamps, floor or
rikker stands. The pipe support stands shall be bolted to the concrete slab/base.
5. All pipe work passing through the walls, floors and roof slabs shall be provided with
pipe sleeves of adequate size to allow the passage of insulation.
11.26 WINDOW AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
1. Window air-conditioning units shall comprise of direct expansion cooling coil,

condenser, compressor, evaporator and condenser fans and washable filter. The
entire air conditioner assembly shall be mounted on robust chassis which shall be
easily removable from the casing for maintenance.
2. The casing and components shall be of robust construction and all items shall be
adequately protected against corrosion, sun, high outside temperature and humidity
and have easy serviceability.
3. The units shall incorporate all thermostatic controls, safety devices, relays etc., to
ensure efficient and safe operation of the unit.
4. Thermostat of the type lockable at the extreme setting shall not be acceptable. The
following operating controls shall be provided:
a. Fan speed selector to give HIGH-MEDIUM-LOW operation (i.e extra quiet).

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
b. Unit control knob to give OFF-FAN-COOL functions. The degree of cooling

provided should be adjustable from a maximum to minimum.
c. Fresh air damper control.
5. The condenser fan shall incorporate a condensate collecting ring in order to allow
condensate to be thrown over the condenser coil.
6. The condenser and evaporator coils shall be made out of copper tubes with
aluminium fins.
7. The air conditioners shall be quite in operation. Sound level shall not exceed 55 dbA
(NC 50) at low speed and 60 dbA (NC 55) at high speed when measured at one
meter distance in a room with normal occupancy and furnishing.
11.27 PRECISION AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
The system shall contain Scroll compressor, Evaporator blower (EC fan), two independent
coils i.e. refrigerant coil (DX) and chilled water (CW) coil, Heater, Humidifier,
Microprocessor control panel and Electronic expansion valve (EEV) all of which shall be
contained within the cabinet of the unit.
The Technical specifications of the construction of unit are as under:
1. Cabinet Construction:
All four side panels (including front door) shall be double skinned sandwiched panels. The
cabinet shall be made of sandwich panels of galvanized steel and painted with epoxy
powder. The panels shall be insulated on the inside with glass wool of 20mm thickness &
30 kg/m3 density, for fire insulation class A1. This type of panel provides good thermal and
acoustic insulation. Panels shall be painted with RAL7016 epoxypolyster powder and
orange peel finishing.
The unit components, related both to refrigeration and the electric part, can only be
accessed from the front of the machine; this solution makes lateral interventions
unnecessary, avoiding the need to consider technical spaces around the units.
2. Cooling Circuit
Refrigerant Coil circuit:

Refrigerant shall be enviro-friendly, energy efficient R-410A or equivalent and shall have
lower Total Equivalent Warming Impact (TEWI).
The circuit should include:
Liquid receiver;
Electronic expansion valve (EEV), complete with external equalizer;
Solenoid valve for the interception of refrigerating liquid;
Sight glass indicator of the passage of refrigerating liquid;
Freon filters with solid cartridge;
Safety valve;
High-pressure safety pressure switch with manual reset;
Low-pressure pressure switch with automatic reset;
Isolation valves in the discharge and liquid lines;
Copper refrigeration pipes with anti-condensation insulation on the input
line;
Chilled water Coil circuit:
The circuit should include:
Three way regulating valve with modulating servomotor, controlled by 0-
10V signal
Flow switch & temperature sensor on inlet water
3. Evaporator Coil
Evaporator coil shall consist of two separate coils i.e. one coil operating on refrigerant (DX)
and other coil operating on chilled water (CW).

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
The evaporation coil shall be of the finned type, with copper pipes and aluminum fins with
corrugated profile and hydrophilic coating. Average air speed through the fins shall be 2.4
m/s. Drain tray for the collection of condensation water made of stainless steel, complete
with a connection for discharge and siphon shall be included.
Both coil operation shall be automatic. In case of in loss chilled water flow or temperature,
electronic control of unit should automatically switch over to refrigerant circuit.
It should also be possible to operate both the coils simultaneously in case chilled water
temp. is not sufficient to care of cooling load.
4. Compressor
The compressor shall be of high efficiency SCROLL design, operating with
R410A/equivalent refrigerant and 400V/3~/50 Hz supply. Compressors, the humidifier shall
be isolated from the air flow in the version with downward flow, and in the air flow in
versions with upward output. Compressor shall have inbuilt overloads, and shall be
mounted on anti vibration mountings.
5. Evaporator Fans (EC Motor)
Fan shall be of Radial backward curved type, directly driven by a high efficient
electronically commuted EC motor with IP-54 protection & class-F insulation. Useful static
shall be 20 Pa, but up to 200-300 Pa can be achievable
6. Expansion device: Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
The unit is available also with a Electronic Expansion Valve, which offers the following
advantages:
Fast, high precision adjustment of refrigerant flow;
Fast arrival of the unit at steady-state conditions;
Superheating value remains constant in variable thermal load conditions;
Efficient operating conditions of the compressor, especially in the presence
of low room temperatures;
Wide working range with consequent extension of the units operating
limits. These properties result in enhanced performance of the unit and
make it possible to obtain very significant energy savings.
7. Electric Heater
Multi-stage electric heating element constructed from a non-oxidable material. If

overheating occurs, a safety thermostat should cuts off the voltage supply to the heaters
and triggers an alarm.
8. Humidifier
Electrode humidifier supplied with water from the mains, controlled by a microprocessor, for
the production of steam with continuous modulation (20-100%).
9. Operating Voltage
The operating voltage of PACs shall be 415 10% Volts./3phase/50Hz
10. BMS Controls
THE PACs shall have provisions to be integrated with the existing BMS system so that
remote start/stop operations can be performed on them.
The unit shall be capable of communicating through an RS-485 communications port to link
up to 16 units for monitoring and control purposes.
11. Service Area

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
The unit shall be serviceable with a maximum service space of 1000mm in front of the unit.
No side & rear access shall be required for servicing.
12. Air Filtration
Filtration shall be provided by synthetic media disposable filters capable of filtering air to
EU4 efficiency. This should be integral part of Package unit. Filters should be removed
from the front part of the unit. Filters shall placed inclined to cover total coil face area to
have more filtration area. Face velocity across the coil and filter should be same.
13. Air-cooled condensers
Condenser shall be suitable for 24 hours operation. Fan shall be axial type with direct
driven motor. Condenser units should be provided with fan Speed controller suitable for
various ambient conditions and thus saving energy during low winter and night operation.
Motor shall have IP-54 protection with IP65 for main switch.
14. De-Humidification
De-humidification cycle shall operate by reducing the speed of EC fan to reduce ADP of
coil. Hence, by reduction of fan speed there shall be additional power saving.
15. Microprocessor Controls:
Microprocessor should control following functions:

Room temperature;
Humidity;
Speed of delivery fans (EC);
Compressor timer with automatic rotation;
Alarms on two levels;
Automatic controlled reset of high and low pressure alarm;
Alarm log;
Management of more than one unit in local network, with automatic
rotation logic and no interference;
Serial connection to supervision systems.
The display shall show:
Room temperature;
Humidity;
Alarm description;
Operation counter;
Status of the controlled devices.
16. Controls and Safeties:
High-pressure safety electro-mechanic pressure meter with manual reset;

High pressure transducer;
Low-pressure pressure meter with automatic controlled reset;
High-pressure safety valve;
Thermal protection of fan and compressor motors.
The unit shall be manufactured by Blue-Box (Italy) / equivalent approved as per project
vendor list.
12. VENTILATION
12.1 Exhaust Fans
1. General
1. This section shall be comply as per QCS2010 Section 22 part 8

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
2. Exhaust fans shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor as shown on the
drawings. Capacity, type and rating of the fans shall be as indicated in the schedule.
The fan motors and switches shall be in accordance with this specification regarding
electrical works. Fixing details shall be in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations. All roof fans shall be suitable to operate for 50C. ambient
temperature.
3. Toilets areas shall be mechanically ventilated using axial wall exhaust
2. Wall Exhaust Fan
1. The wall mounted extract fans shall be sheet metal propeller type having totally
enclosed, Class 'B' insulation, shaded pole/capacitor, start/run motor in aluminium
alloy casing, protected by thermal overload cut-out having the following components.
a. Box enclosure including electrical terminal box.
b. Non lubricating ball bearings.
c. Fan casing, fan impeller and tightly sealed dust proof fan motor.
d. Automatic shutter and outer grille.
e. Fans shall be low speed for silent operation.
2. As an alternative, heat resistant plastic fans, if offered shall have the above
components except for the fan casing and impeller construction. The Contractor shall
also produce a certificate of approval from Qatar Fire Department and further it shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
3. Roof Exhaust air fan Centrifugal type
1. Axial or Centrifugal belt driven in line supply fan shall be constructed of heavy gauge
galvanized steel. The fan wheel shall be axial type and shall be statically and
2. Motors shall be heavy duty ball bearing type carefully matched to the fan load and
furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Motors and drives shall be
mounted out of the airstream for motor be readily accessible for maintenance.
3. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. pulleys shall be
of the fully machined cast iron type keyed and securely attached to the wheel of the
motor shafts. Motor pulley shall be adjustable for final system balancing.
4. A NEMA 1 disconnect switch shall be provided with standard factory wiring shall be
provided from motor to the handy box.
5. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified ratings seal for both sound and air
performance.
6. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturers nameplate containing the
model number and individual serial number for identification.
4. In Line Centrifugal Exhaust and Supply Fans (2-Speed Motor)
1. The centrifugal extract fans shall be of the non-overloading type. The fan housing
shall be rigidly built and braced. Where the fan tube is 450 mm or more in width an
access door with frame and gasket shall be provided. All access doors shall be
fabricated so that the inner surface is flush with the inside of the fan wheel. The fans
shall not produce excessive noise as compared to units of like size and power when
used with the specified vibration isolation. The fan manufacturer shall provide for
approval for each fan, certified sound power ratings with an octave band analysis
and also the volume, horsepower, pressure characteristic curves from shut-off to free
delivery. The fan impeller shall have ample strength and shall be statically and
dynamically balanced to avoid vibration. The blades shall be designed to ensure
quiet and efficient operation. The fans shall be V-belt driven unless otherwise
indicated. The motor pulley shall be an adjustable type for two (2) grooves or less.
Drives requiring three (3) grooves or more shall be the variable pitch type. Drives for
fractional horsepower motors may have one belt rated at 200 % of motor
horsepower. All other fans shall have not less than two belts and shall have sufficient
capacity to drive the fan with one belt broken. The fans shall be provided with belt
and pulley guards manufactured of perforated metal or other approved material.
Covers shall be provided in the guard for the fan and motor shafts for ease of taking
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
tachometer readings without removal of the guard. The fan motor shall be sized to
drive its respective fan when the fan is operating at a speed 10 % in excess of that
required to meet the fan performance. No motor shall operate within the service
factor. . All fans shall be factory coated with one coat of primer and one coat of
machine enamel.
2. The interior of the fans shall be painted as per the manufacturers standard. The fan
shaft shall be supported by least two roller or ball bearings with easy access to the
lubrication points where required.
5. In Line Centrifugal Exhaust Fans
1. Axial or Centrifugal belt driven in line exhaust fan shall be constructed of heavy gauge
galvanized steel. The fan wheel shall be axial type and shall be statically and
2. Motors shall be heavy duty ball bearing type carefully matched to the fan load and
furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Motors and drives shall be
mounted out of the airstream for motor be readily accessible for maintenance.
3. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. pulleys shall be of
the fully machined cast iron type keyed and securely attached to the wheel of the
motor shafts. Motor pulley shall be adjustable for final system balancing.
4. A NEMA 1 disconnect switch shall be provided with standard factory wiring shall be
provided from motor to the handy box.
5. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified ratings seal for both sound and air
performance.
6. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturers nameplate containing the
model number and individual serial number for identification.
13. general requirement
13.1 Quality of Equipment and Materials
1. All equipment and materials shall be brand new, of a quality accepted by the
Engineer and presenting no dent, damage or breakage during transportation or
installation. All metal parts shall be protected on site from rust, corrosion and dirt by
properly storing, packing and covering. All rusted parts of metal, subject to the
Engineer's approval shall be cleaned of corrosion products and given two coats of
anti-rust paint before installation.
13.2 Instructions for Operation and Routine Maintenance
1. The Contractor shall provide written instructions both in Arabic and English
languages as to the method of operation of equipment and the routine maintenance
works (cleaning of air filters etc.). Six copies of such instructions shall be handed over
to the Engineer.
13.3 Painting, Tags, Nameplates
1. All steel works in connection with supports for pipes, cable trays etc., exposed to the
elements are to be painted with two coats of an approved rust preventive paint,
preferably zinc rich primer and two coats of enamel paint of grey color or as approved
by the Engineer.
2. All exposed metal surfaces of refrigeration and electrical apparatus, motors, guards,
insulated pipework etc., must be painted with one coat of under-coat and two coats of
enamel paint finish to approved color. Identification bands, color codes (refer BS
1710 : 1975) and directional flow arrows shall be painted on piping or insulation at
frequent intervals indicating the unit services and the fluid conveyed. Lettering shall
be in English.
3. Identification of ductwork, color codes, directional flow arrows and application of
symbols shall be carried out in accordance with DW 142. Internal surfaces of ducts at

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
the grille or diffuser terminals and connections visible to occupants in rooms shall be
painted with two coats of dull black paint.
4. All power supply switches shall be tagged identifying the area served, the capacity of
switching and equipment they feed. Same identification must appear on the wiring
diagram submitted with the operating instructions. All wires shall bear identification
numbered tags corresponding to the same wiring diagram mentioned above.
13.4 Drawings, Submittals, Instructions, Manuals and Samples
13.4.1 General
1. All drawings and material submissions, other information and samples must be
supplied to the Engineer as laid down in the specifications and as and when agreed
during the site meetings, in the progress chart or as instructed by the Engineer.
13.4.2 Submittals and Engineers Approval

1. The Contractor shall submit for approval a detailed information data for all the
equipment he proposes to install. Such submittals shall contain the following
information:
a. Model number
b. Name of manufacturer and country of origin
c. Manufacturer's data showing the capacity of equipment, physical dimensions,
list of all components and their characteristics.
2. The Engineer shall check, if he so requires, all parts of installation and materials. Any
part rejected shall be immediately dismantled, removed from site and replaced or
repaired to conform to the specifications and to the full satisfaction of the Engineer.
Any part requiring realignment or repositioning in co-ordination with the decoration,
false ceilings, carpentry or finishing works as required by the Engineer shall be
carried out without delay.
3. Any interim approval given by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of his
obligations under this contract.
13.4.3 Shop Drawings to be prepared by the Contractor

1. The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval, detailed shop drawings for all
equipment or distribution services described herein. Such drawings shall indicate :
a. All civil works, openings, bases, position of sleeves etc.
b. The physical dimensions of the equipment.
c. The sizes of foundation base wherever required.
d. Location of centre bolts to base.
e. Position of motors, controls, air duct connections etc.
f. Detailed wiring diagram of all electrical systems consisting of control wiring
diagram for various controls, instruments, sensors, step controllers etc., and their
connections, power wiring diagram from isolator / control panel in various
equipment etc., as detailed elsewhere in the specification.
g. Detail piping connection in double line with position of valves, controls,
instruments and fittings.
h. Isometric piping for the complete piping layout (water/refrigerant).
i. Coordinated drawings with all other services, structure space frame and finishes
or any other drawing found necessary or requested by the Engineer for co-
ordination of works.
j. The following drawings shall be provided by the A.C. Contractor for each panel.
I. General arrangement of control panel
II. Control schematics
III. Single line diagram
IV. Circuit diagram
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
V. Terminal block connection diagram

VI. Cable schedule
VII. Material list
2. The work described on any shop drawing submitted shall be properly checked by the
Contractor for all clearance, field conditions, maintenance space and proper co-
ordination. Equipment layout is to be detailed on drawings showing the exact
method of installing and clearly illustrating components to be used in making all
connections.
3. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, shop drawings of all sheet metal
ductwork and pipe work for approval before work is fabricated and installed.
4. Ductwork drawings must show clearances between the ductwork and masonry. All
dampers, fresh air inlets, exhaust outlets, connections to equipment and methods of
support and any other details necessary for the satisfactory installation of the system
must be indicated. Each type of register, diffuser and louver is to be referenced in a
schedule and the type and size clearly indicated at each location.
5. Piping drawings must be fully detailed showing all piping in double line and indicating
the precise size of fittings, valves and equipment.
6. Position of hangers and supports with reference numbers must be indicated and
large scale detail must be given showing the type and method of installation of each
type of hanger. A schedule is to be included on each drawing, detailing the type of
hanger fixing with a reference number for each type.
7. All general layout drawings are to be drawn in 1: 50 scale. Details of hangers,
method of fixing of pipes and ducts, detailed cross sections of pipes, ducts and
risers, details of control and piping connections to equipment are to be drawn in 1: 10
scale.
8. In case the Contractor fails to produce the shop drawings and co-ordinated shop
drawings in accordance with the specified/agreed time schedule, the Engineer
reserves the right to engage an outside agency to undertake this work and debit the
entire cost to the Contractor's account.
9. At all places where multiple services cross over, the Contractor shall submit specific
details on the drawings of all services on a larger scale, which should be thoroughly
checked by the A.C. Contractor for their location, clearances, method of fixing etc.,
before submitting to the Engineer for approval.
10. The Contractor shall prepare drawings and schedules showing precise details of
holes in concrete, masonry etc., and necessary wooden frames required for passage
of ducts, pipes and fittings of grilles, registers, diffusers, louvers, plant, plant supports
etc. Drawings and schedules approved by the Engineer must be available before any
structural work requiring holes or other modification is constructed. This schedule is
to be submitted in a form to be agreed with the Engineer.
11. All drawings prepared by the Contractor shall be submitted in the form of three sets
of blue prints to the Engineer for approval, who in turn, after making his comments
will return one set of the same to the Contractor for necessary revisions if any.
Thereafter the Contractor shall submit five sets of blue prints for the Engineer's final
approval. Once the drawings are finally approved, the Contractor shall submit in
reproducible copy negative for Engineer's signature and the same shall be kept on
site for execution. It is the Contractor's responsibility to co-ordinate all grilles,
equipment, pipes, light fittings, false ceiling layout and other services to allow a
completely symmetrical installation.
12. The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer a set of 'As-installed' drawings showing
the works 'As-installed' together with any other information necessary for operation
and maintenance. Six copies of each such drawing shall be supplied. In addition, two
sets of copy negatives for each drawing shall be handed over to the Client.
13.4.4 Manuals

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
1. The Contractor shall make provision for the supply of three copies of the Instruction
Manual before issue of Practical Completion Certificate. This manual shall include the
following items
a. Complete list of all items of equipment, controls and accessories as actually
supplied including serial nos. and all name plate details.
b. A set of 'As-built' drawings showing equipment layout foundation details, ducting
layout and details, electrical wiring and drain piping. The drawings shall show
plans and sections necessary to show all required information correctly.
c. A set of manufacturer's catalogues, wiring diagram and installation drawings
relevant only to the particular item of air conditioning and ventilation equipment
concerned. General catalogues will not be acceptable.
d. Manufacturer's printed spare parts list for all items of equipment.
e. Operational description of the air conditioning plant including starting, stopping
and seasonal shut-down.
f. Preventive maintenance routine at weekly, monthly and yearly maintenance
procedures for all plant and equipment. intervals and
g. Manufacturer's full name and address together with telephone, fax numbers.
h. Name, address, telephone and fax numbers of local agents / suppliers.
13.4.5 Storage of Materials and Equipment

1. All materials and equipment must be stored properly so as to prevent damage,
corrosion, deterioration or dirt penetration.
2. All duct outlets must be adequately closed to prevent dust and dirt penetration during
the course of erection.
13.4.6 Tests Certificates

1. The Contractor shall supply all the Test certificates in original to the Engineer at the
time of handing over the project.
14. test at site
14.1 General
1. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, one month prior to the date of
commencement of the tests, six (6) copies of the complete test procedures to be
used. The procedure, method of calculation etc., shall be approved by the Engineer
before any test is carried out. Six (6) copies of the test results shall be furnished to
the Engineer for his approval.
2. The Contractor shall supply skilled staff and all necessary instruments and carry out
tests of any kind on a piece of equipment, apparatus, part of system or a complete
system if the Consultant requests such a test, for determining specified or guaranteed
data as given in the specifications or in the schedule of equipment filled in by the
Contractor.
3. Any damage resulting from the tests shall be repaired and/or damaged material
replaced, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer. In the event of any repair or
adjustment required to be made, other than the normal running adjustment, the tests
shall be void and shall be recommended after the adjustments or repairs have been
completed. The tests shall not be void due to circumstances beyond the Contractor's
control.
4. All testing, balancing and final adjustment shall be in accordance with the provision of
the applicable 'ASHRAE' standards.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
14.2 Piping System
1. Pressure tests shall be applied to piping only before connection of equipment and
appliances. In no case shall, piping, equipment or appliances be subjected to
pressure exceeding their rating. If necessary, piping shall be taken down and
reassembled and no make-shift method of temporarily repairing leaks etc. will be
permitted.
2. Tests shall be completed and approved before any insulation is applied or pipes,
valves and fittings have been concealed. Tests shall be performed in the presence of
and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Any leaks or defects uncovered by the tests
shall be repaired and the system retested as above, at no additional cost to the
Employer.
3. All pipe work shall be hydraulically tested to a minimum test pressure of 1 times the
maximum working pressure or 8 bars, whichever is higher. Prescribed pressure shall
be maintained for four hours. All refrigerant systems shall be tested and proven
tight under nitrogen pressure of at least 150% of maximum working pressure which
shall be maintained for four hours. Before completely charging refrigerant, the
whole system shall have holding charge and be tested for leaks by means of a leak
detector.
4. All chilled water pipe welding shall be done by certified welders.
14.3 Ductwork
1. All branches and outlets shall be tested for air quantity and the total of the air
quantities shall be within five percent of fan capacity. Volume control dampers and
splitter dampers shall be tested for proper operation.
14.4 Equipment
1. All air handling and ventilating equipment, ductwork and air outlets shall be adjusted
and balanced to deliver the specified air quantities indicated at each inlet and outlet
on the drawings.
2. Where the equipment or systems depend upon controls for proper operation,
functioning and performance, the latter shall be operated simultaneously with the
equipment or system during tests. If air quantities cannot be delivered without
exceeding the speed range of the sheaves or the available horse-power, the
Engineer shall be notified before proceeding with the balancing of air distribution
system.
3. Other tests as specified under the specific equipment headings are to be completed
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
14.5 Electrical Equipment
1. All electrical equipment shall be cleaned and tested on site before application of
power as mentioned below:
a. Wire and cable tests
b. Insulation resistance test, phase to phase and phase to earth on all circuits and
equipments using a 500 volt megger. The insulation resistance shall not be less
than one (1) meg.ohm.
c. Earth resistance between conduit system and earth must not exceed five (5)
ohms.
d. Phasing out and phase rotation tests.
e. Operating tests on all protective relays to prove their correct operation before
energizing the main equipment.
f. Operating tests on all starters, circuit breakers etc.
g. Any other test required as per Kaahra-maa regulations.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
14.6 Test on Completion
of all plant & equipment including air balance and water balancing. The specialist
contractor shall be subject to approval of the engineer.
2. After finishing the above tests and adjustments, the Contractor shall be responsible
for running a reliability trial test for the whole plant installed. The whole of the trial of
the plant shall take place during the appropriate seasons when design conditions are
met or approximated. The trial shall take place at any reasonable time subject to the
approval of the Engineer. The trial shall last for a period of thirty one (31)
consecutive days during which time the whole of the plant shall operate continuously
without readjustments or repair to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3. During the reliability trial test, performance tests shall be conducted on the
refrigerating and air conditioning equipment. The test data shall not deviate by more
than three percent from the guaranteed capacity data. Temperature readings shall
be taken for the entering and leaving air of each air handling unit. Should any part of
the apparatus or system fail to meet with the specification requirements, it shall be
adjusted, repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The complete
performance test shall then be repeated. The date of commencement of the above
said tests shall be subject to agreement with the Engineer. As soon as all tests
prescribed in this clause are carried out satisfactorily in the opinion of the Engineer, a
formal letter of completion shall be drawn up in three (3) copies and signed by the
Engineer.
4. During the maintenance period, the Contractor shall demonstrate that all equipment
and apparatus fulfil the requirements of the specifications and he shall operate all
fans, refrigeration and air conditioning equipment for a sufficient time to adjust all
dampers, thermostats and controls and shall provide the Engineer with a complete
log and report indicating air quantities, fan speed etc., throughout each of the various
systems for the operating seasons.
14.7 Maintenance Test
1. During 400 days maintenance period, the operation and day to day routine
maintenance of the plant and equipment shall be carried out by the owner's staff
whereas the defects / failure in the plant and equipment not as a result of inadequate
maintenance, shall be part of the Contractor's responsibility and shall be rectified free
of cost by the Contractor. After testing and commissioning, first set of filters for all
AHUs shall be provided by the Contractor.
2. During the last month of the Maintenance period, the Contractor shall demonstrate to
the Engineer that all equipment and systems are operating according to the
capacities and the manner set down in the specifications. On completion of these
tests, the Engineer shall issue a formal letter of acceptance for the equipment and
system or parts of the system satisfactorily tested and approved.
3. The Maintenance Certificate will not be issued to the Contractor by the Engineer until
all plant has received the above mentioned letter of acceptance and/or unless a bank
guarantee is provided by the Contractor for the performance of that part of the plant
and equipment not formally tested and accepted.
15. VIBRATION ISOLATORS
1. All plant shall be isolated from the building structure and the supports isolated from
other items of equipment.
2. The chillers shall be provided with suitable anti-vibration mountings. The anti-
vibration mountings shall be installed in accordance with the maker's
recommendations and the Mechanical Contractor shall ensure that the performance
and type of isolator is suitable for the machinery to be installed.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
3. The air handling units and chilled water pumps shall have anti-vibration mountings in
the following form:
a. Multi-layer rubber pads with square grid convolutions on both
sides, spaced with steel shims and of a thickness to suit the
points of uniform loading of the plant item, but of a minimum
thickness of 32 mm spaced not more than 750 to 1000 mm
apart.
4. The condensing unit of split unit shall also have similar A.V. pads as described
above. However, the thickness shall be 10 mm.
16. CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPES
1. Condensate drains shall be provided in copper pipes to BS 2871 Part 1 Table 'X'
above ground and in UPVC to BS 5255 for vertical drops buried in the walls, in floors
or below ground and shall be adequately supported along their length. All condensate
drains shall be fitted with 75 mm deep trap with dirt pocket and removable plug
provided and extended to the nearest drains/soakaways as shown on the drawings.
Removable plugs shall be provided at every change in direction to allow rodding
access.
2. All surface mounted condensate drains within the building shall be insulated with 10
mm thick rubber foam and weather proofed with glass cloth & vapour barrier to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. All exposed pipes external to the building shall be
painted with two coats of paint matching with the building color.
17. DUCTWORK
17.1 General

2. The Contractor shall provide and erect all ductwork including controls,
isolating/balancing dampers, grilles, diffusers and vapor proof insulation to form a
complete air distribution system as indicated on the tender drawings. The Contractor
shall balance, test and commission all installations prior to the Engineer issuing a
Completion Certificate. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the
commencement of works.
3. All sheet metal ductwork shown on the drawings, specified or required for various air
conditionings and ventilating systems, shall be fabricated and finished from best
quality, cold rolled annealed galvanized mild steel sheets of soft bending quality
specially suitable for air conditioning works. Materials used for ductwork, shall be free
from blisters, pits and imperfections in coating.
4. All bracing and reinforcement angles shall be preferably galvanized or made of black
steel properly cleaned from rust and painted with two prime coats of zinc-chromate
paint prior to installation, as approved by the Engineer. Angles shall be carried
around all four sides of ducts.
5. Reinforcing angles shall be fixed to the ducts by means of bolted joints made with
cadmium plated or galvanized steel hexagonal nuts and bolts with flat steel washers
to the following sizes:
* 25 mm angles : 6 mm diameter bolts at 10 cm center
* 38 mm angles : 8 mm diameter bolts at 10 cm center
6. Pockets, locks, deflectors and all branch ducts which need joints between two sheet
metal pieces, shall be made by aluminium rivets 5 mm diameter by 10 mm length
minimum size having head at one side. Rivets will be as specified in HVAC/DW/142.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
7. Ductwork shall be so constructed that when erected, it shall be made air tight by
tightly sealing after fabrication and free from movement, sagging or drumming under
all operating conditions. It shall be true to size and accurately lined-up.
8. While the tender drawings shall be adhered to as closely as possible, runs and sizes
of ductwork may be varied only by the Engineer, at no extra cost to the Client, when
deemed necessary for co-ordination purpose with other works.
9. All duct elbows having an inside radius smaller than the width of the elbow shall be
equipped with approved vanes tightly riveted to the duct and in general as shown on
the details of the tender drawings.
10. Approved duct-turn shall be installed in all cases where 90 degree square elbows are
used and short take-offs are used on large ducts. Guide splitter vanes shall not be
spaced more than 15 cm apart.
11. Take-offs from main ducts shall be conical. All take-offs and connections shall be
constructed to minimize pressure loss. All raw edges of ductwork seams, rivets and
areas where galvanizing has been destroyed shall be cleaned, prepared and painted
with zinc rich paint at works and a further coat shall be applied after erection.
12. Allowances shall be made in ductwork construction for instruments and control
connections and adequate local stiffening shall be incorporated to provide rigid
mountings.
13. The fabrication of ductwork shall be carried out in accordance with HVAC/DW/142,
ASHRAE or SMACNA standards.
14. Galvanized Sheet Hot dip galvanized steel shall be to ASTM-A527-87 standard, steel
shall be of lock forming quality, zinc coating designation Z-27 or equivalent approved
standard.
15. Flexible Ducting Pre-insulated flexible ducting for the linear diffusers shall be suitable
for low / medium pressure. The inner core shall shield the fibre glass insulation from
the air stream. The outer jacket shall be of very tough spirally reinforced multi-layer
aluminium laminated construction.
16. Duct Sealant: Duct sealant shall be non hardening, non migrating mastic or liquid
sealant as compounded and recommended by the manufacturer specially for sealing
joint and seams in the duct.
17. Aluminium: Aluminium alloy sheet shall be easy to form and to join and shall have
extra resistance to moist atmosphere (BS 1470).
18. PVC/Polyethylene/GRP Suitable material shall be proposed by the Contractor for
Engineers approval.
18. MANUAL DAMPERS
18.1 Damper Quadrants
1. All dampers other than dampers behind registers shall be fitted with substantial
locking cast metal quadrants. Quadrants shall be mounted outside the duct in an
accessible position. On insulated ducts, the quadrants shall be fastened to bearing
plates flush with the outside finish of the insulation.
18.2 Volume Control Dampers
1. Manual volume control dampers shall be provided as shown on the drawings or as

required additionally for balancing purposes. The dampers shall have sturdy
corrosion resistant construction. All dampers shall have multi-leaf double skin
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
aerofoil section opposed blades. Individual blades should not exceed 1200 mm in
length or 175 mm in width. Double skin blades shall be made out of minimum 22
gauges galvanized steel sheet. Damper frames shall be galvanized made out of 16
gauge steel sheet.
2. Single blade dampers with single skin blade section may be used for damper sizes
up to 300 x 150 mm. Single skin blades shall be fabricated from 18 gauges
galvanized steel sheet. The blades shall be securely bolted to plated steel spindles,
the ends of which shall be extended to the outside of the duct with a groove in line
with the blade. Spindles shall be carried in brass or nylon bearings.
3. The control linkage shall be outside the air stream. Clear air flow area equal to the
duct size shall be maintained within the damper frame. Maximum clearance between
the blades and between the blades and the frame shall be limited to 3 mm. It should
be noted that the dampers shall be separate and independent from the dampers,
here-after specified to be set behind registers and diffusers.
18.3 Splitter Dampers
1. At each point of division in a supply duct, where a branch is taken off a trunk, an
adjustment splitter or deflecting damper shall be fitted to the duct, with the operating
rod and locking quadrant as above, with length extending through the duct to
externally mounted bearing plates. These deflecting dampers shall be permanently
set and locked in position after completion of the installation and adjustment. For
Phenolic duct system follows manufacturers recommendation on the installation of
splitter dampers.
18.4 Non-return Dampers
1. Non-return dampers shall be manufactured similar to duct dampers but shall

incorporate additionally, felt rubber or neoprene strips on long edges of blades to
ensure positive shut-off and quiet closure.
2. Dampers on fresh air inlets shall be similarly edged to prevent ingress of dust and
sand particles.
18.5 Motorized Dampers
1. Motorized dampers shall be provided in the positions indicated on the drawings.

Dampers shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheet or extruded aluminium frame
in natural anodized finish. All dampers shall have multi-leaf double skin aerofoil
section opposed blades. The blade shaft shall be in steel / brass and bearing section
in PVC or ball bearings. Dampers shall be two stage type with motor suitable for 24
volt supply (low voltage) and tied to the timer for fresh air intake control.
2. Location of all dampers shall be identified by fixing different coloured pins on the false
ceiling tiles.
18.6 FIRE DAMPERS
1. Fire dampers shall be of the galvanized steel curtain type.

2. The steel blades of the damper curtain shall fold completely upon themselves and be
stacked at one end of the damper outside the air stream. The dampers shall be
arranged for vertical operation as detailed on the drawing.
3. The damper fusible links shall be rated at 72C.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
4. The fire dampers shall be constructed generally to the same standards of air
tightness as the rest of the system. Both the curtain and the fusible link shall be
accessible for servicing through air tight inspection doors placed up and down stream
wherever possible.
5. Each access door shall be of a minimum size of 450 mm square or full duct width on
ducts less than 450 mm.
6. Each damper shall be rated at 2 hours fire resistance.
7. Dampers shall be fitted in all fire-break walls and other fire barriers as indicated on
the contract drawings.
8. Ducting dampers and casings are to be manufactured in strict compliance with BS
476 Part 8 and appropriate fire and other statutory regulations for fire damper
specifications where such exist (otherwise to HVAC specifications DW/142). The fire
damper frame shall not be less than 18 G thick.
9. Any necessary fixing framework shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor.
18.7 Smoke Dampers
1. Where fire dampers are also designated as smoke control dampers they shall be
constructed from similar materials as above but be of the parallel multi-blade type
and incorporate fail-safe closing and motorized re-setting.
2. Precise details of control shall be as described
3. All smoke dampers shall carry the QCDD Approved
19. TEST HOLES
1. The test holes shall be provided in the horizontal side of the duct and shall be of 22
mm dia fitted with an effective removable seal. The test holes shall be located at the
following locations:
a. At fans (in the straight section of duct near to fan outlet)
b. At cooling coils
c. At main branches after regulating dampers
d. At any other position as per Engineer's requirements.
e. Location of test holes shall be marked on the duct surface or on the insulation.
20. FRESH AIR INTAKE AND OUTLET LOUVeRES
1. This section shall be comply as per QCS2010 Section 22 part 6 clause 6.6
2. All fresh air inlets shall be fitted with double skin opposed blade volume control
dampers, sand traps, insect wire mesh and filter as indicated on the drawings.
3. All fresh air inlets shall be fitted with aluminium mesh bird screens and louvers in
addition to 50 mm thick washable metallic filters. Filter media thickness shall not be
less than 45 mm, having same efficiency as filters for AHUs.
4. Fresh air louvers shall be of extruded aluminium having color / finish as approved by
the Engineer.
5. Louver blade extrusion shall be of a design to prevent ingress of rain and shall be
approved by the Engineer.
6. Exhaust air outlets shall be fitted with aluminium mesh bird screens.
21. FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
1. Flame proof flexible connections shall be fitted on all intake and discharge
connections of fans and air conditioning units for preventing the transmission of
vibration through the ducts to occupied spaces.
2. Flexible connections shall also be provided where ductwork passes across building
expansion joints.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
3. Flexible connections shall be factory fabricated from chemically impregnated canvas.

Connections shall fit closely and be secured in airtight fashion to connections to
ductwork, fans and apparatus.
4. The material shall have a penetration time of at least fifteen minutes when tested in
accordance with BS 476 and shall remain flexible and without strain or distortion.
Flexible connections shall be 150 mm minimum and 250 mm maximum in length.
22. DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
1. Ductwork shall be supported by means of pre-galvanized fully threaded drop rods

and also pre galvanized mild steel angle/channel sections, with spacing between
supports not exceeding 2.4 m and projecting 100 mm on either side to allow for
proper insulation.
Rectangular Duct
Maximum Supporting Alternative Rod Bolt
Duct size bottom angle flat iron hanger dia.mm
(longer side) mm iron - mm mm dia. mm
400 25x25x1.5 25x0.8 6 6
600 25x25x3 25x3 8 8
1000 30x30x3 30x3 8 8
1500 40x40x3 40x5 10 10
2000 40x40x4 40x5 10 10
3000 According to 40x6 12 12
circumstances
Circular Duct
Maximum Duct Supporting stirrup Rod hanger Bolt. dia.
dia. mm mm mm
305 25x0.8 6 6
813 30x4.0 8 8
1016 40x5.0 10 8
1524 50x5.0 15 15
2. All channels and angles shall be pre galvanized and shall be painted with a further
two coats of grey paint on exposed metal parts after erection. Ductwork supports
shall preferably be positioned close to dampers, diffusers and all similar equipment.
Ductwork supports shall in general conform to HVAC/DW/142 or SMACNA
standards. Galvanized serrated band with insulating band type supports shall also be
acceptable up to duct size of 600 mm except in the Plant room. Cotractor to sumit
complete details for approval before fixing.
23. GRILLES, REGISTERS and DIFFUSERS
23.1 General
2. Air outlets and air inlets of an approved make, type and model shall be provided with
sizes as indicated on the drawings. They shall be fitted with sponge rubber gasket
behind the frames and nylon bushings at the blades connection to the frame. All air
outlets and inlets shall be of white powder coated extruded aluminium / custom
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
proprietary finish and a sample of all air devices must be approved by the Engineer
prior to ordering.
23.2 Grilles and Registers
1. Supply and return air registers shall have individually adjustable horizontal front
blades, vertical rear blades and shall be equipped with opposed blade dampers.
Exhaust air registers shall be single deflection fixed horizontal blades and be
equipped with opposed blade volume control damper. Exhaust air grilles shall be
similar to exhaust air registers but without volume control dampers.
2. Outside air louvres shall be equipped with insect screen.
3. Wooden frames with grooved jointed pattern shall be used with all grilles and
registers and shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor.
23.3 Diffusers
1. The diffusers shall be fitted with opposed blade volume control dampers as furnished
by the manufacturer. Volume controls for these outlets shall be accessible through
the outlet from below the ceiling and shall maintain their setting, when adjusted.
Each diffuser shall be provided with sponge rubber or felt gasket and angle ring or
frame for securing to ductwork. Return air diffusers shall be identical to supply air
diffusers.
2. Diffusers shall be of the type and shape indicated on the drawings, a sample of which
must be approved by the Engineer prior to ordering.
23.4 Door Grilles/Undercuts
1. Door grilles shall be of the inverted 'V' blade type, not permitting vision through the
grille blades and not more than 12 mm apart. Minimum free area shall be at least
50%.Louvres shall be of the double frame type with a frame on each side of the door.
2. Undercuts shall be provided on doors wherever indicated on the drawings.
23.5 Linear Diffusers
1. Linear Diffusers shall be of approved make and be of continuous type including mitre.
They shall be fitted with pattern adjustment and volume control elements.
Note :
All diffusers, grilles, registers, linear diffusers etc., shall be powder coated including
the pattern adjustment and volume control elements in linear diffusers to match the
interior finish or as advised by the Engineer.
23.6 Circular diffusers
1. The circular diffusers shall also be fitted with opposed blade dampers. and shall be
aluminium construction, however, throw and noise level should comply with the
requirement and specifications as shown in the drawing.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
23.7 Sound Attenuators
1. All air ductworks shall be attenuated to limit the noise level to the values specified in
the design criteria. The method of fabrication and supporting ducts should be such
as to avoid generation of noise because of air movement or drumming of sheet metal.
2. The silencers shall be provided in the supply and return air ducts as shown on the
tender drawings. The silencers shall be constructed and tested according to BS 4773
Part 1971 and ASHRAE Standard 36 B-63 for dynamic insertion loss, self generated
noise and aerodynamic performance. The outer casing of the silencers shall be
constructed of 22 gauge galvanized sheet steel. Baffles shall be made of 24 gauge
perforated galvanized steel, filled with an odorless, incombustible, vermin and
moisture proof inorganic sound absorbing material. The fill shall be compressed 10%
and shall be of a density sufficient to meet catalogued performance. The acoustical
fill shall have the following minimum ratings - flame spread not over 25, smoke
developed not over 20. The silencers construction shall be such that perforated
sheet shall cover the black neoprene sheet over the insulation in order to avoid
ingress of fiber particles.
3. The silencers shall be complete with flanges to facilitate their removal for inspection.
Externally, the silencers shall be insulated in the same manner as the adjoining air
ducting. The Contractor shall carry out sound absorption calculations with respect to
the characteristics and the duct system to ensure the proper selection of silencers.
24. ACCESS DOORS
1. Wherever necessary, the Contractor shall provide suitable access openings to permit
inspection, operation and maintenance of all filters, controls, dampers, fire dampers,
bearings or other apparatus. Doors shall be of double skin construction of not less
than 20 gauge metal sheet and shall have sponge rubber gaskets around their entire
perimeter. On insulated ductwork, the space between the inner and outer door
sheets shall be insulated as specified for ductwork and insulation thickness be equal
to duct insulation. All access doors in sheet metal shall be air tight and shall be
hinged or lift-off type and secured in the closed position by means of cam latches.
25. PIPEWORK AND FITTINGS
25.1 General
1. Each part of the system of piping shall be complete in all details and provided with all
control valves and accessories necessary for satisfactory operation. The tender
drawings indicate generally the sizes of all main piping but the right is reserved to
modify the runs of piping to accommodate conditions during construction.
2. All piping shall be grouped wherever practical and shall be erected to present a neat
appearance. Pipes shall be parallel to each other and paralleled or at right angles to
structural members of the building and shall give maximum possible headroom.
Piping shall not pass in front of doorways or windows and shall be generally arranged
so that it is at least 2.5 cm from the finished wall face. Sufficient space is to be
allowed for accessibility, servicing and proper insulation works.
3. Sleeves shall be provided for pipes passing through walls or slabs. Pipes shall be
pitched for proper circulation and drainage.
4. Run-outs shall be graded in such a manner as to prevent air traps being formed
within them when the mains expand or contract. Automatic or open vents are to be

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
provided at high points, piped to suitable drains or terminating over expansion tanks
wherever possible.
5. All drain piping shall pitch down in the direction of flow. All low points of the system
must be fitted with drain valves to allow the complete draining of the system. Bottom
of all risers must have dirt pockets of the size of riser and at least 15 cms long with a
drain valve fitted. All water piping to equipment and valves shall be connected with
either flanges or unions for dismantling and removal. All piping shall be reamed after
cutting to remove all burrs.
6. All reductions in sizes of piping in the direction of downward pitch shall be installed
with eccentric fittings to maintain a level top.
7. Approved pipe fittings shall be used and bending of pipes will not normally be
allowed, except that bending of black steel pipes 50 mm nominal diameter and
smaller shall be permitted, where space conditions allow for a bending radius of at
least 10 times the diameter of the pipe. A hydraulic pipe bender shall be used to
bend all pipes. Bends showing kinks, wrinkles or other malformations will not be
acceptable. Cutting and shutting of bends will not be permitted.
8. Alternatively, Contractor can provide mechanical grooved system fittings with
companion couplings. The complete grooved system shall be submitted for
Engineers approval and shall meet ISO 9001 certification.
9. Piping shall not be installed passing through ductwork or directly under electric light
outlets or extend beyond footing lines, as determined by the drawings.
10. In placing pipes through sleeves, near walls, partitions or in chases, care must be
taken to provide sufficient space for pipe covering. Where pipes are held in vices, as
and when screwing, care shall be taken to ensure that the pipe surface is not
damaged. Any pipe work so damaged shall not be fitted.
11. All pipes stored on site shall be kept clear of the ground and where possible stored
under cover. Pipes corroded beyond normal 'stock-rust' condition shall not be used.
Special care should be taken to prevent dirt and foreign materials entering open ends
of pipes during erection. A valve fitted to the open end of a disconnected pipe will not
be considered satisfactory to prevent entry of foreign matter.
12. Screwed iron caps or plugs or plastic covers shall be used to seal pipe ends. Wood,
rag paper or other make-shift plugs will not be permitted.
13. Before connecting up to return mains, the system of piping must be blown and
flushed out. After flushing, all strainers shall be opened and baskets cleaned.
14. Liberal allowances shall be made for expansion and contraction of pipes by means of
changes in the direction or by the inclusion of expansion joints in the piping system.
25.2 Condensate Drain Pipes
1. Condensate drains shall be as described elsewhere in the specifications.
25.3 Chilled Water Pipes
1. Chilled water pipes shall be black ERW mild steel to BS 1387 - 1957 and BS 3601
Grade B ERW. Screwed fittings shall be used for 50 mm pipes and smaller. Welding
fittings shall be used for 65 mm pipes and larger. Branch welds will not be permitted.
Screwed fittings shall be 125 lbs, black malleable iron. Welding fittings shall be steel
medium duty compatible with the piping.
2. Sufficient number of unions shall be provided near the coils and valves for easy
dismantling. The temperature conditions for chilled water pipes are mentioned in the
Design Data.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
25.4 Welding
1. Where shown on the drawings or specified or directed, welded joints, outlets and
flanges shall be used.
2. Care shall be taken to ensure that welding metal or flux does not project into the bore
of the pipe. All welds shall be of good clean metal, free from slag and porosity, of
even thickness and contour, well fused with the parent metal, hammered on
completion and finished smooth.
3. The Engineer reserves the right to have cut for examination 2% of all welds made.
The Contractor shall remake the joints at no extra charge.
4. All welded joints (except pipe welded end to end) shall be made by use of forged one
piece, welding flanges, caps, elbows, branch outlets and tees of approved make. All
such fittings etc., shall be of a type which maintains full wall thickness at all points,
ample radius, fillets and proper levels or shoulders at ends.
5. All joint welding may be by the electric arc or acetylene process.
6. Wherever welded piping connections to equipment, valves or other units needing
maintenance, servicing or requiring possible removal, the connecting joints shall be
by means of unions or flanges.
7. Pressure rating of the flanges shall match the pressure rating of the flanges on the
equipment to which the pipe connects.
25.5 Mechanical Couplings for Joining Carbon Steel Pipe
1. Mechanical couplings shall be rigid couplings with angle pad design (Rigid Zero
Flex). Flexible couplings shall be used wherever flexibility is desired. Noise and
vibration reduction at mechanical equipment connections is achieved by installing
three flexible couplings near the vibrations source. Couplings shall be cast of ductile
iron conforming to ASTM A-395, Grade 65-45-15 or malleable iron conforming to
ASTM A-47, Grade 32510. Manufacturer to be ISO-9001 certified.
2. Reducing Mechanical Couplings -Use reducing couplings for pipe runs for direct
reduction on 2" (DN50) through 8" (DN200) pipe sizes.
3. Mechanical Coupling Bolts -Mechanical Coupling bolts shall be zinc plated (ASTM B-
633) heat treated carbon steel track head conforming to physical properties of ASTM
A-183, minimum tensile strength 110,000 psi (758450 kPa). Optional Type 304 or
316 stainless steel bolts per ASTM A-193, Grade B8 or B8M class where required.
25.6 Flange Adapters
1. ANSI Flange Adapters -For sizes from 50mm-600mm (DN50-DN600), use flange
adapters suitable for connection to ANSI class 125/150 class 250/300 flanged
components. Cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395, Grade 65-45-15.
2. PN Flange Adapters - For sizes 50mm-600mm (DN50-DN600), use flange adapters
suitable for connection to PN10 OR PN16 flanged components. Cast of ductile iron
conforming to ASTM A-395, Grade 65-45-15.
25.7 Gaskets
1. All the gaskets shall be manufactured by the same source of couplings and fittings to
secure compatibility. These shall be Grade E EPDM compound (green color coded)
conforming to ASTM D-2000 designation 2CA615A25B24F17Z. Grade E gaskets
are UL / ULC classified to ANSI / NSF 61 for cold + 86F (+30C.) and hot + 180F
(+82C.) potable water service. Temperature operating range -30F to +230F (-
34C to +110C).

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
25.8 Valves for Chilled Water System
2. Gate valves of 125 psig WSP shall be used for shut-off purposes and globe valves of
125 psig WSP shall be used for balancing purposes.
3. Shut-off valves shall be installed on both sides of all equipment.
4. Check valves shall be installed at the discharge end of pumps.
5. Balancing valves shall be installed on the return lines of air handling units and chillers
or as detailed in the schedules. Valves, 50 mm and smaller shall be screwed
connection. Valves, 65 mm and above shall be flanged type with companion flanges.
A. Valves up to 50 mm
Bronze Gate Valves
1. Bronze gate valves shall be solid wedge disk, non rising stem screwed in bonnet and
shall be minimum PN16. Valves shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 5154
PN16 Series B and shall preferably have Kitemark. Hand wheel shall be of
aluminium.
Bronze Globe Valves

1. Bronze globe valves shall incorporate spherical shape disk spum on upto 38 mmsize
and one size 50mm detailed by threaded ring and shall be minimum PN16. Body seat
shall be integral and narrow contact angle type. Valves shall be manufactured in
accordance with BS 5154 PN16 Series B and shall preferably have Kitemark. Hand
wheel shall be of aluminium.
Bronze Double Regulating Valves

1. Bronze double regulating valves shall be Y pattern having characterized throttling
disk tending towards equal percentage performance. Valve shall have integral square
edged entrance orifice plate and insertion test points. Fitting valve shall be minimum
PN16. DRV-valve opening shall have setting with an allen key and operation by
means of the microset.
Bronze Swing Check Valves

1. Bronze swing check valves shall have disk and connected to hinges by a spud and
nut and free to rotate. The hinge shall be mounted on a hinge pin and free to rotate
in internal lugs. Valve shall be manufactured to BS 5154 PN16 for Series B rating
and shall be Kite marked.
B. Flanged Valves 65 mm and above

Gate Valves
1. Gate valves shall be of cast iron body, bronze disc, bronze seat ring and shall be
manufactured and tested in accordance with BS 5163 and BS 5150 and their
amendment. All valves shall be double flanged (BS 4504 - PN16) and shall be inside
screw, solid wedge and non-rising stem type. All valves shall be suitable to use with
water temperature up to 50C. Hand wheel shall be marked with open and close
with arrow in appropriate direction.
Globe Valves
1. Globe valves shall be of cast iron body, bronze disc, bronze seat ring and shall be
manufactured and tested in accordance with BS 5152 and their amendment. All
valves shall be double flanged (BS 4504 - PN16). All valves shall be non-rising stem
type and suitable to use with water temperature up to 50C. Hand wheel shall be
marked with open and close with arrow in appropriate direction.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
25.9 Screwed Joints on Steel Piping
1. Screwed joints shall be clean threaded, pulled up tightly and made with approved
joining compound and long strand hemp. After joints have been formed, all surplus
hemp shall be cut away and the joints wiped clean. Where pipes are galvanized, care
shall be taken to ensure that threads are carefully cut so that the number of exposed
threads is minimized.
25.10 Flanged Joints
1. All flanged joints shall be flush and truly aligned and made with approved brass
corrugated rings or compressed asbestos in compositions. Flanges for connection to
welded pipe shall be 'slip-on' or 'welding-neck' standard steel type, made as called for
in the schedules. Flanges or unions shall be provided on straight runs at not greater
than 12 m intervals.
25.11 Unions
1. Unions are required on pipe sizes 50 mm and under. Unions shall be ground taper
joint type, good for 150 psi working pressure.
25.12 Strainers
1. Approved strainers shall be provided in the suction line of each pump and at the inlet
connections to each feeder and connections to each automatic control valve. The
intention is to protect by strainers, all apparatus of an automatic nature, whose proper
functioning would be impaired by dirt on the seat or by scoring of the seat. All
strainers shall be suitable for pressure as stipulated for the system concerned and
shall be inspected and pressure tested at works.
2. All strainers shall be 'Y' type cast iron or bronze bodied of ample strength for the
pressure to which they shall be subjected and suitable flanges to connect with the
piping they serve. Strainer basket screens shall be of stainless steel/brass and shall
be of ample strength to prevent collapsing of the basket under shock loading.
3. 'Y' type strainer, size 65 mm and above shall be fitted with drain cock and threaded
nipple. One roll (30 meter length) of flexible plastic hose shall be supplied loose,
suitable for connection to the drain cocks.
Perforations shall be in accordance with the following table:

Size of pipe Perforation size Number of perforation
per sq. inch
Up to 32 mm 1/64 inch 968
50 to 100 mm 1/32 inch 413
100 mm & above 3/64 inch 161
25.13 Flexible Connections and Expansion Joints
1. Expansion joints shall be fitted in straight lengths of pipe at distances not exceeding
18 meters unless otherwise approved by the Consultant.
2. All flexible couplings and expansion joints must be selected so that the working
pressure, temperature and movement encountered will not be more than 75% of that
allowable for the joint selected. One side of the joints must have all piping and/or
adjacent equipment adequately anchored. The other side must be supported,
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
aligned and guided so as to allow free movement without imposing unnecessary

stresses on the joints.
3. Expansion joints shall have integral duck flanges. They shall have individual solid
steel ring reinforced with a carcass of highest grade woven cotton or acceptable
synthetic fiber. Joints shall be constructed to pipe line size and to meet working
pressure conditions, face measurements etc., as designated. They shall be of an
arch type construction with the number of arches (corrugations) dependant on
projected movement. All joints must be finish-coated with eypalon paint to prevent
ozone attack.
4. Split back or retaining rings shall be furnished. Joints size 2" and below shall have
threaded malleable iron unions on both sides. All joints shall be suitable for minimum
test pressure of one and a half times the working pressure or 225 ft. of water,
whichever is higher.
5. Flexible connections shall be provided to AHUs, FCUs, pumps, chillers etc., in order
to prevent transmission of vibration to pipe work.
25.14 Automatic Air Vents
1. At all high points in the system, an automatic air vent shall be fitted. Air vents shall
be of brass body and shall be of the float type. The size and working pressure shall
be as per the schedule. Automatic air vents shall be connected to the nearest drain.
25.15 Air Cocks and Bottles
1. Air bottles shall be formed from 1.5 m length of pipe one size larger than the pipe
being vented. A 15 mm pipe fitted with 15 mm needle valve shall be welded into top
and taken to low level. These items shall be fitted so that they are not concealed and
are readily accessible. Where equipment is cased, vents shall be extended so that
they can be operated from the outside of the casing.
25.16 Pipe Supports, Hangers and Anchors
1. All supports and hangers for steel piping shall be ferrous. Supports for copper pipes
shall be non-ferrous and chromium plated, wherever specified. Brackets or supports
shall be set out so that they do not obstruct the access to valves, flanges or other
fittings requiring maintenance. All pipe work shall be supported by means of
approved clips or hangers at centers as detailed. In the event of two or more pipes
being carried by a single support, the spacing shall be of a shorter interval.
2. All vertical drops shall be supported so as to prevent sagging or swinging. Unless
otherwise indicated, pipe hangers shall be spaced as follows:
20 to 32 mm - Not over 2.4 m apart - 10 mm rods
40 to 100 mm - Not over 3.0 m apart - 15 mm rods
Over 100 mm - Not over 3.6 m apart - 22 mm rods
3. Horizontal steel pipes on the roof shall be supported to prevent sagging or swinging.
The pipes supports spacing shall be as follows:
a. 20 to 32 mm - 2.4 m
b. 40 to 65 mm - 3.0 m
c. 80 to 100 mm - 3.6 m
d. 125 to 250 mm - 4.5 m
4. Piping of all equipment and control valves shall be supported to prevent strains or
distortions in the connected equipment, valves and control valves. Piping shall be
supported to allow for removal of equipment, valves and accessories with a minimum

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
of dismantling and without requiring additional supports after these items are
removed.
5. All channels, angles, plates, clamps etc., necessary for fastening of hangers shall be
furnished by the Contractor. All hangers shall be properly sized for the pipe to be
supported. Oversized hangers shall not be permitted. Details of hangers and
supports to be used by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval
before fitting. All hangers shall be provided with lock-nuts and have provision for
vertical adjustment of pipes.
6. Parallel groups of pipes shall be supported by trapeze type hangers of steel
construction. Individual horizontal piping shall be supported by hangers consisting of
malleable split rings with malleable iron sockets or steel clevis type hangers or roller
hangers where specified. Pipe standard with base flange and adjustable type yokes
shall be used for pipes supported from the floor. Vertical piping shall have heavy
wrought iron or steel clamps securely bolted on the piping with the end extension
bearings on the building construction.
7. Piping shall be anchored where required to localize expansion or to prevent undue
strain on piping and branches. Anchors shall be entirely separate from hangers and
shall be heavy forged or welded construction of approved design.
8. Hangers and supports for cold piping shall have tongue and groove design rubber
support inserts of approved make or high density insulation capable of withstanding
the compression and allowing the hanger to support the pipe without any metal to
metal contact.
9. All internal pipe supports, hangers and anchors etc., are to be painted with two coats
of an approved rust preventive paint, preferably zinc rich primer and two coats of
enamel paint of grey color or as approved by the Engineer.
10. All external pipe supports including for chillier yard pump room and plant room roof
etc., shall be finally painted with two coats of enamel paint of grey colour or as
approved by the Engineer
25.17 Pipe Sleeves
1. All pipe openings through walls, partitions and slabs shall have sleeves having an
internal diameter at least 25 mm larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or of the
insulation for insulated services. All the building expansion joints shall also be
provided with pipe sleeves. The pipe with insulation shall be carried through the
walls, floor or roof slab and pipe sleeves around them shall be projected minimum 50
mm on either sides of the wall, floor and roof slab.
2. Pipes passing through interior partitions shall be provided with sleeves of 22 gauge
galvanized sheet steel set flush with finished wall surfaces.
25.18 Flashing Sleeves
1. Flashing sleeves shall be provided where pipes pass through water proof
membranes. Flashing sleeves details shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval, but generally, they shall be provided with an integral flange set into the
membrane. The associated pipes shall have flange and shield which shall extend
beyond the insert and be sealed with approved mastic.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
26. INSULATION
26.1 General
1. All insulating materials required for piping, mechanical equipment, ductwork etc.,
shall be furnished and installed under this section of the specifications. The thermal
insulation shall be non-corrosive to the metal, water repellent and fire-retardant.
2. All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and treated with approved corrosion
inhibitor before applying insulation. Inhibitor coating will not be required for
galvanized surfaces. All surfaces to be insulated shall be dry and free of loose scale,
dirt, oil or water, when insulation is applied. Application and completion shall be of
highest quality and shall comply with BS 5244 and CP 3005.
3. Insulation shall be carried out neatly and to a high standard by skilled workers,
experienced in the trade. Insulation shall be applied in such a manner that there will
be no air circulation within the insulation or between the insulation and the applied
surface.
4. Surface imperfections in the insulation such as chipped edges, small joints or cracks
and small voids not over 25 mm square shall be filled with light insulating material or
with insulating cement. Samples of all materials proposed for use shall be submitted.
5. All duct flanges, stiffeners and inspection doors etc., shall be insulated in accordance
with the recommended practices and to the Engineer's approval. Where a vapour
barrier is fixed at site, it shall be fixed in such a manner as to obviate the possibility of
moisture penetration.
6. No piping, ducts or equipment shall be insulated until tested and approved for
air/water tightness.
7. Insulation for all services shall be continued through sleeves. The insulation on
exposed risers extends through the floor slab. All materials including fixing and
furnishing materials shall be rated Grade 'P' when tested for ignitability as defined in
BS 476 - Part 4.
26.2 Thermal Insulation to Ductwork (Internal) and Exhaust Ducts (Internal / External)
1. Ductwork internal to the building shall be insulated with 25 mm thick rigid fibre glass
insulation of 48 kg/m3 density covered with re-inforced aluminium foil. The insulation
for the round ductwork shall be flexible fiber glass blanket of not less than 24 kg/m 3
density with reinforced aluminium foil and thickness of 50 mm compressed to 25 mm
during application. The Contractor shall ensure that the surface to be insulated is
completely cleaned and free from dust before applying the insulation.
2. The method of application shall be as follows:
a. An approved adhesive material shall be applied on the entire surface of duct-
wall and entire surface of insulation. In addition, adhesive shall also be
applied on insulation butt and lap joints. The adhesive applied to the
insulation shall cover evenly the faces to be fixed, the surfaces forming the
longitudinal joint and the surfaces forming the circumferential joint. Upon the
application of the approved adhesive, the insulation shall be fixed in position
immediately and permanently.
b. Adhesive tape, not less than 75 mm wide, shall be used to seal both the
circumferential and longitudinal joints. Suitable GI angle edges shall be
applied on the four corners of square and rectangular ducts as an additional
protection.
c. Cover and secure 200 g/sq. meter high quality glass cloth while it is wet
(soaked in approved vapor sealant) and then wrap carefully to become a
vapor seal with a smooth surface free from wrinkling and gaps. Ensure that
the overlap shall be 50 mm minimum. After it is dry, apply further brush coats

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
of vapor seal to the Engineer's satisfaction. The vapor seal material shall be
fire-resistant, non-toxic, weather resistant and of anti-fungus quality.
26.3 Thermal Insulation to External Ductwork

2. Ductwork external to the building shall be insulated in the same manner as the
internal ductwork but the insulation thickness shall be 50 mm and covered with glass
cloth.
3. For insulating the underside of the internal and external ducts whose longest side is
more than 600 mm, apply plastic hangers and washers riveted to the duct as
additional supports. Hangers shall be provided at 300 mm centers.
26.4 Thermal Conductivity
1. The duct insulation (both internal and external) shall have a thermal conductivity of
0.036 W/MC at a mean temperature of 24C.
26.5 Chilled Water Piping Insulation (Inside & Outside the Building)
1. Pipe insulation shall be 50 mm thick for pipes up to 6" dia and 75 mm thick for 8" dia
and above. The insulation shall be sectional rigid fiber glass having thermal
conductivity of maximum 0.036 W/MC. at mean temperature of 24C. with density of
96 kg/m3, bonded to conform to pipe, with a factory applied flame retardant vapor
barrier jacket of aluminium foil, laminated to Kraft paper with a flame retardant type
adhesive.
2. Each joint shall be sealed by using 75 mm wide aluminium foil adhesive tape and the
whole shall be covered with 200 g/sq.m. high quality glass cloth securely wrapped
and all joints lapped and sealed with vapor seal, followed by two coats of weather
proofing compound of approved make to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
26.6 Pipe Cladding
1. Exposed pipework on the roof and in Pump room shall be provided with aluminium
cladding of thickness 0.63 mm. The cladding material shall be submitted to the
Engineer for his approval.
26.7 Chilled Water Piping Insulation (Inside & Outside the Building)
1. Pipe insulation shall be 50 mm thick for pipes up to 6" dia and 75 mm thick for 8" dia
and above. The insulation shall be sectional rigid fiber glass having thermal
conductivity of maximum 0.036 W/MC. at mean temperature of 24C. with density of
96 kg/m3, bonded to conform to pipe, with a factory applied flame retardant vapor
barrier jacket of aluminium foil, laminated to Kraft paper with a flame retardant type
adhesive.
2. Each joint shall be sealed by using 75 mm wide aluminium foil adhesive tape and the
whole shall be covered with 200 g/sq.m. high quality glass cloth securely wrapped
and all joints lapped and sealed with vapor seal, followed by two coats of weather
proofing compound of approved make to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
27. ELECTRICAL WORKS
27.1 General
1. All electrical works and materials shall be as described under the Electrical
specifications and shall conform to the regulations of Ministry of Electricity and Water.
2. All electrically operated equipment shall be so designed that it will continue to
function without damage to itself or otherwise, if the voltage and/or frequency vary
within the following tolerances:
f. Voltage - 6%
g. Frequency - 0.3%
3. All electrically operated equipment shall be suitable for continuous and prolonged
operation within the ambient temperature or exposed condition to the atmosphere
where they are installed to operate. Allowance for the local high ambient temperature
shall be made by reducing the permitted rise of temperature above ambient or by
derating the capacity and ratings.
27.2 Electrical Motors
1. All motors shall be designed to suit the maximum temperature of air passing over the
motors and the additional temperature rise caused by exposure to the sun. The type
of winding insulation shall, however, be not less than Class 'B'. The motors for
exhaust fans shall have the insulation suitable to operate on 50C ambient
temperature.
2. All motors smaller than 0.50 kW shall be designed to operate on single phase. All
motors 0.75 kW and above shall be designed to operate on three phase. All motors
shall be wound for 240 volts, single phase, or 415 volts, 3 phases, 50 Hz, A.C.
system.
3. Any motors brought to site not complying with above mentioned voltage and
insulation requirements shall not be accepted.
27.3 Electrical Wiring
1. All power cabling up to and including isolators to the control panels in Plant rooms,
Pump room, Chillers yard roof and fan controlled isolator as indicated on the drawing
shall be carried out by the Electrical Contractor. The electric supply shall be
terminated into the main incomer of the control panel/isolator. It is the A.C.
Contractor's responsibility to continue the connections from the isolator up to all the
air conditioning and ventilation units.
2. The A.C. Contractor shall be responsible for complete electrical equipment/controls
associated with the Air conditioning and Ventilation works.
27.4 Starters
1. All three phase motors for A.C. units shall be provided with D.O.L. / Star Delta
starters having the following facilities :
a. To disconnect the supply in the event of power failure or voltage drop.
b. To protect the motor from over load in each phase.
c. Start/stop push button.
d. ON/OFF/TRIP indicating lamp.
e. Single phase preventer.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
2. All three phase starters shall have thermal overload protection in each phase as well
as under voltage reset plus two auxiliary normal open contacts.
27.5 Isolators
1. All electrical drives shall have local isolators, weather proof to IP 55. Isolators shall
be of reputed manufacturers, up to Engineer's approval.
27.6 Earthing
1. All motors starting equipment panels shall have their frames, carcasses and all metal
parts effectively and continuously connected to the general mass of the earth.
27.7 Testing
1. All wiring within control panels shall be works checked, prior to despatch, for loose
connections, correct terminations and compliance with wiring diagrams. In addition,
functional checks shall be carried out in the works to ensure that all interlocking and
sequencing is in accordance with the performance requirements of the specification.
The Engineer shall be given 7 days written notice of such tests so that he may attend
if he so desires.
2. With all control circuits disconnected but with all isolators closed and power fuses
fitted, the panels shall be subjected to a voltage test of 2.5 kV for one minutes, across
the following points:
a. Phase to phase
b. Phase to neutral
c. Phase to earth
d. Neutral to earth
3. Certified schedules detailing all tests and their results shall be submitted to the
Engineer within fourteen days of the test.
27.8 Approval of Workmanship Standards
1. The standard of workmanship shall comply with the requirements of the Engineer
who shall carry out periodic inspections of completed work and work in progress.
2. Any work not to the Engineer's satisfaction during such inspection shall be replaced
to a standard satisfactory to the Engineer at no cost to the contract for the
subsequent inspection.
27.9 Tags, Color Coding
1. All equipment shall be properly identified by means of permanent tags. All

components shall be labeled in the control panel as per the approved drawings. All
wires shall be color coded in accordance with the Electrical regulations of the Kahra-
maa. Labeling system shall be agreed with the Engineer.
27.10 Wiring and Regulation
1. All installation shall comply with the Electrical regulations of Kahra-maa.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
28. CONTROL SYSTEM
28.1 General
1. This section shall be complied with QCS 2010 section 22 part 9 clause 9.4
2. The air conditioning installation shall be capable of automatic operation. Necessary
operational and safety controls shall be provided for chillers, pumps, and air handling
units. Low voltage control system shall be preferred. The location of controls should
permit easy access for calibration, adjustment and maintenance.
3. Selector switches shall be provided for manual selector switch for pumps and
automatic operation of A.C. plants. The A.C. control panel to be located as indicated
on the drawings shall be suitable for operation at 50C ambient condition.
4. The Contractor shall submit the control schematic diagrams indicating the single line
from all the control functions in sequential order, control wiring diagram and power
wiring from control panel as a whole to the Engineer for his approval.
28.2 Exhaust Fan Controls
1. Exhaust fans shall be controlled from automatic starters installed as shown on the
drawings. All other fans shall be controlled through their respective control panels.
Interlinking shall also be carried out as detailed elsewhere.
2. Volt free control for BMS monitoring shall be provided for monitoring.
28.3 Smoke Detectors
1. Smoke detectors suitable for duct mounting shall be installed in the main return air
duct adjacent to air handling units. The smoke detectors shall be photo-electric
obscuration type and interlocked with air handling unit to stop it in the event of smoke
detection. Smoke detectors shall be interlocked with fire alarm system by the
Electrical Contractor. The smoke detectors shall be suitable for operation on 240
volts and shall have two volt-free relay contacts. These relays shall be energized
only when the smoke detector operates on detection of smoke. It shall be manual
reset type.
28.4 Time Schedule Control
1. The starting and stopping of AHUs shall be carried out by the selector switch at
ACCP or out by the selector switch at ACCP or from DDC based on time schedule.
DDC shall have provision to program time zones for AHUs. (Maximum 5 zones each
controller).
28.5 Contractor shall provide the following:
1. Portable operator terminal - 1 No.

2. Any one of the DDCs with built-in operator terminal with display such that all the
DDCs in network can be accessed for monitoring / control.
29. BUILDERS WORK
1. The Contractor shall carry out the cutting of holes and making them good where
pipes, conduits, cable and cable trays are passing through the walls, floor and roof
slabs as measured in the Bill of Quantities.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
2. Two sets of builders work drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for his
approval.
30. Pipes / Ducts Cross Over Bridges
1. The Contractor shall provide cross-over bridges as shown on the drawings. Pipe
cross over bridges shall be fabricated from G.I. angle / channel frame with G.I.
chequer plate and hand rail etc. Bridges details shall be agreed with the Architect
and Engineer before fabrication.
31. IDENTIFICATION/COLOUR CODING
1. All insulation, exposed pipework and ductwork shall be identified by color

codes/safety indicated and basic color identification bands to B.S. 1710.
2. The safety color and color code indication bands shall be 100 mm wide between two
basic color identification bands each of length 150 mm. The identification shall be at
centers of not more than 6 meters and adjacent to all valves, items of plant, changes
in direction and both sides where the pipework passes through walls, floors etc., and
all service access points.
3. Pipe sizes, pipe contents, flow and return (F & R) designation and direction of flow
arrows in black shall be applied on the basic color identification band as detailed in
Tables 1, 2 and Appendix 'D' of B.S. 1710. An extract from the 1975 edition of
Appendix 'D' is shown in the table at the end of this section.
4. The safety color, contents, code and color identification bands shall be applied by
means of self adhesive colored or printed tape.
5. Flow and return (F & R) and direction of flow arrows shall be in black with letters 25
mm high on 50 mm wide white self adhesive tape applied in a continuous band
around the pipe insulation.
6. Pipe contents shall be in black lettering 25 mm high on 50 mm wide clear self
adhesive tape with one set of identification letters per color code.
7. Pipe sizes shall be metric in black printed lettering 25 mm high on 50 mm wide clear
self adhesive labels.
8. All ductwork whether insulated or exposed shall be identified in accordance with
DW/142 Appendix 'A' together with descriptive lettering approved by the Engineer.
9. The materials employed shall be as for pipework identification, i.e. self-adhesive
plastic.
10. All the lettering and wording shall be in Arabic and English.
32. INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
1. All works shall be inspected at any stage during the progress of work and after the
completion of works. All works shall be tested and commissioned in accordance with
the relevant British Standards, Specifications and Codes of practice to the entire
satisfaction of the Engineer. Any defects pointed out at any time during the progress
of work during the test or occurring after the test, shall be rectified and retested at no
additional cost to the contract.
2. No insulation shall be carried out on any section of the works or concealed in any
other way prior to testing and inspection.
3. At least two copies of Test Certificates of the tests carried out at manufacturer's
works shall be forwarded to the Engineer prior to despatch of the materials to site.
4. All the test points required for carrying out the tests and commissioning of the system
including the measuring instruments to measure pressure, temperature, pressure
drop, velocity, volume, flow rate or any conditions to be measured shall be provided
by the Contractor.
of all plant & equipment including air balance and water balancing. The Contractor
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
shall carry out all the performance tests initially before requesting the Engineer to
witness the tests in order to avoid unnecessary delay. All the necessary labour force,
skilled or unskilled, required during the test, prior to or after the test shall be provided
by the Contractor.
6. It shall be ensured that the system is free from any dirt, welding snag or any other
foreign matter before the system is finally filled with working fluid. The system shall
be properly vented for bringing it to operating conditions. The system shall then run at
full load and the flow rate then regulated to specifications and design conditions. All
readings on air, water and electrical power consumption shall be recorded every hour
and details forwarded to the Engineer.
7. The system shall be regulated and balanced for flow rates, temperature and pressure
drop tests. A copy of the test showing the final operating point shall be submitted to
the Engineer.
8. During the tests, all the readings of pressure, temperature, flow rates, pressure drop,
power consumption, noise level or any other, as advised by the Engineer shall be
tabulated and at least two copies submitted to the Engineer.
9. Statutory Authority Approval
10. Contractor shall submit the final official approval from the concerned statutory
authority.
33. WARRANTY
1. The Contractor shall guarantee for a period of 400 days after the practical completion
of the installation that all plant and equipment shall operate free of any defects due to
defective material and bad workmanship and that any part found defective during this
period shall be replaced free of cost by the Contractor.
2. Maintenance period for all air conditioning equipment, controls, components and
systems etc., shall start only after regular electricity power supply is available at site.
3. All the compressors up to and including 15 HP shall be guaranteed for a period of 5
years from the date of regular power supply at site. The Contractor shall also
guarantee the performance and efficiency of the plant and equipment as per the
specifications for a similar period of 400 days after the practical completion and if the
services of Contractor's personnel are requisitioned during this period, such works
shall be made available free of cost to the Client.
4. If the defects are not rectified within a reasonable period, the Client may proceed to
do so by another agency at the Contractor's entire risk and expense without prejudice
to any rights of the Client.
34. SCHEDULES, EXPLANATORY NOTES
1. The schedules have been prepared for the purpose of facilitating selection of
equipment and evaluating the tenders. The reference given against each item in the
schedules refers to the appropriate references in the drawings.
2. Technical details of the equipment offered by the Contractor should be furnished, as
asked for in the technical schedules enclosed.
3. The external static pressure for fans, where given are approximate and the
Contractor will be required to supply equipment to handle the requirements of his
installation without extra cost to the contract.
4. Should the Contractor wish to amplify any information to be provided, this should be
set out on separate sheets and submitted with his tender together with explanatory
manufacturer's catalogues, curves and selection charts.
5. If the equipment selected by the tenderer should require any special alteration or
addition to the architectural or structural work, he must list the requirements
separately.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
35. DETAILS OF PROPOSED EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
1. The technical schedules listed hereunder must be filled in and signed by the
Tenderer and they must be attached with the offer with complete engineering
catalogues for every piece of equipment to enable the Engineer to evaluate each
offer. Offers submitted without such information will not be acceptable.
Split Air conditioning Units

General
Make :..................................................................................
Type :..................................................................................
Model :..................................................................................
No. of units offered :..................................................................................
Net cooling capacity

of each :.................................................................................
Refrigerant used :.................................................................................
Power supply :.................................................................................
Power consumption :.................................................................................
Indoor Unit
Model :.................................................................................
Nominal Capacity :.................................................................................
Net Capacity
H :.................................................................................
W :.................................................................................
D :.................................................................................
Net Weight :.................................................................................
Refrigerant :.................................................................................
No. of circuits :.................................................................................
Flow Control :.................................................................................
Evaporator fan :.................................................................................
Nominal air flow :.................................................................................

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
High :.................................................................................
Low :.................................................................................
Motor :.................................................................................
Evaporator :.................................................................................
Coil construction :.................................................................................
Type of blower :.................................................................................
Outdoor Unit
Model :.................................................................................
Outer dimension :.................................................................................
Net weight :.................................................................................
Refrigerant :.................................................................................
Number of circuits :.................................................................................
Compressor model :.................................................................................
Motor :.................................................................................
Quantity :.................................................................................
F.L. Current :.................................................................................
Condenser :.................................................................................
Condenser fan :.................................................................................
Motor :.................................................................................
Quantity :.................................................................................
Coil construction :.................................................................................
Insulation
Manufacturer :
Type :
Density :
Finish :

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
Ventilation/Exhaust Fans
Reference : ..
Location : ..
Service : ..
Type : ..
Make : ..
Mode : ..
Size : ..
CFM : ..
Static Pressure : ..
Motor Rating : ..
END OF SECTION

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
SECTION 23
FIRE FIGHTING INSTALLATION

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
_Toc403473574
1.0 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................................... 143
1.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................................ 143
1.2 GOAL ............................................................................................................................................................................... 144
1.3 OBJECTIVE ...................................................................................................................................................................... 144
1.4 TERMINOLOGY ................................................................................................................................................................ 144
1.5 CONTRACTUAL DOCUMENTS .......................................................................................................................................... 144
1.6 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES / REQUIREMENTS...................................................................................................... 145
1.7 SCOPE DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................................................................... 145
2.0 CODES AND STANDARDS ..................................................................................................................................... 146
2.1 LOCAL CODES & STANDARDS ............................................................................................................................ 146
2.2 NFPA CODES & STANDARDS ............................................................................................................................... 146
3.0 SCOPE OF WORK .................................................................................................................................................... 147
3.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................................ 147
3.2 MATERIALS...................................................................................................................................................................... 148
3.3 QUALITY OF MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................................. 150
3.4 ANCILLARY MATERIALS .................................................................................................................................................. 150
3.5 APPROVAL LISTING OF MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................ 150
3.6 SUBMITTALS .................................................................................................................................................................... 150
3.7 W ORKMANSHIP ............................................................................................................................................................... 151
3.8 NOTICES.......................................................................................................................................................................... 151
3.9 DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................................................................................... 151
3.9.1 SHOP DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................................................................ 151
3.9.2 AS BUILT DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................................................................... 151
3.10 W ORK LIMITS .................................................................................................................................................................. 151
3.11 DESIGN RULES ............................................................................................................................................................... 152
3.11.1 GENERALITIES ............................................................................................................................................................ 152
3.11.2 OBTENTION OF PERFORMANCE ................................................................................................................................. 152
3.11.3 SPECIAL POINTS ........................................................................................................................................................ 153
3.12 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTATION ................................................................................................................................. 153
3.13 INSPECTION AND TESTING .............................................................................................................................................. 153
3.14 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING ...................................................................................................................................... 154
3.15 PROTECTION SYSTEMS APPROVAL ................................................................................................................................. 154
3.16 AS BUILT DOCUMENTS .................................................................................................................................................... 154
4.0 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS ...................................................................................................................... 154
4.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................. 154
4.2 DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................................................ 155
4.3 PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................................... 155
4.3.1 WATER FIRE EXTINGUISHER ............................................................................................................................... 155
4.3.2 ABC DRY POWDER FIRE EXTINGUISHER .......................................................................................................... 156
4.3.3 CARBON DIOXIDE FIRE EXTINGUISHER ............................................................................................................ 157
4.3.4 FOAM FIRE EXTINGUISHER .................................................................................................................................. 157
4.3.5 WET CHEMICAL FIRE EXTINGUISHER ................................................................................................................ 159
4.4 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................ 159
5.0 STANDPIPE AND HOSE SYSTEM ......................................................................................................................... 159
5.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................. 159
5.2 SCOPE OF WORK ............................................................................................................................................................ 160
5.3 PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................................................................... 160
5.3.1 FIRE HOSE REELS .......................................................................................................................................................... 160
5.3.2 FIRE BLANKET ................................................................................................................................................................. 161
5.3.3 LANDING VALVES ............................................................................................................................................................ 161
5.3.4 FIRE HOSE & NOZZLE..................................................................................................................................................... 161
5.3.5 FIRE HOSE CABINETS ..................................................................................................................................................... 161
5.3.6 BREECHING INLET........................................................................................................................................................... 162
5.3.7 BREECHING INLET CABINET ........................................................................................................................................... 162
5.4 DESIGN DETAILS FOR STAND PIPE SYSTEM .................................................................................................................. 162

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
1.0 DRY STANDPIPE SYSTEM :................................................................................................................................... 163

2.0 WET STANDPIPE SYSTEM: ................................................................................................................................... 163
2.1 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................ 163
2.2 LOCATION PLAN ..................................................................................................................................................... 163
2.3 VALVE LABELS AND CHARTS ............................................................................................................................. 164
2.4 CLEANING & TESTING ........................................................................................................................................... 164
3.0 EXTERNAL FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM .................................................................................................................. 165
3.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................. 165
3.2 DRY BARREL FIRE HYDRANT .............................................................................................................................. 165
3.3 UNDER GROUND FIRE HYDRANT ........................................................................................................................ 166
4.0 SPRINKLER SYSTEM .............................................................................................................................................. 167
4.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................. 167
4.2 HAZARD CLASSIFICATION ................................................................................................................................... 169
4.3 DESIGN DETAILS .................................................................................................................................................... 169
4.4 SPRINKLER SYSTEM PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................................... 170
4.4.1 SPRINKLER HEADS ................................................................................................................................................ 170
4.4.2 SPRINKLER ALARM CONTROL VALVES ............................................................................................................ 171
4.4.3 AUTO ZONE CHECK ASSEMBLY ......................................................................................................................... 172
4.4.4 PRE-ACTION VALVE ASSEMBLY ......................................................................................................................... 173
4.4.5 RISER CHECK VALVE ............................................................................................................................................ 174
4.4.6 SUPERVISORY AIR PRESSURE SWITCH ........................................................................................................... 174
4.4.7 ALARM PRESSURE SWITCH ................................................................................................................................. 174
4.4.8 PRE-ACTION VALVE RELEASE CONTROL PANEL .......................................................................................... 175
4.4.9 AIR COMPRESSOR ................................................................................................................................................. 175
4.4.10 AIR MAINTENANCE DEVICE ............................................................................................................................. 176
4.4.11 ISOLATION VALVES ........................................................................................................................................... 176
4.4.12 FIRE BREECHING INLET ................................................................................................................................... 176
4.4.13 FIRE BREECHING INLET CABINET ................................................................................................................. 176
4.5 INDICATOR PLATES ............................................................................................................................................... 177
4.6 VALVE LABELS & CHARTS ................................................................................................................................... 177
4.7 DRAIN LINES ............................................................................................................................................................ 177
4.8 EXECUTION .............................................................................................................................................................. 177
4.9 CLEANING AND TESTING ...................................................................................................................................... 178
5.0 FIRE WATER PUMPSETS ....................................................................................................................................... 178
5.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................. 178
5.2 FIRE PUMP SET PRODUCTS ................................................................................................................................. 179
Fire Pumps ............................................................................................................................................................................. 179
Fire Pumps Type: .................................................................................................................................................................. 180
Pump Construction: ............................................................................................................................................................... 180
Pump Discharge & Head ...................................................................................................................................................... 180
Fire Pump Accessories: ........................................................................................................................................................ 180
Electric Motor Drive ............................................................................................................................................................... 180
Control Equipment for Electric Motor Drive ....................................................................................................................... 181
Diesel Engine Drive ............................................................................................................................................................... 181
Fuel System ............................................................................................................................................................................ 182
Silencer ( Muffler ) ................................................................................................................................................................. 182
Diesel Engine Drive Controller ............................................................................................................................................. 182
Jockey Pump set ................................................................................................................................................................... 184
5.3 FIRE PUMP SET UNIT RESPONSIBILITY ............................................................................................................. 186
5.4 EXECUTION .............................................................................................................................................................. 186
5.5 CONTROLS ............................................................................................................................................................... 188
5.6 FIELD ACCEPTANCE TEST ................................................................................................................................... 188
6.0 FIRE WATER TANKS (BY THE MAIN CIVIL CONTRACTOR)............................................................................ 189
6.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................. 189
6.2 EXECUTION .............................................................................................................................................................. 189
6.3 WATER LEVEL SWITCHES & INDICATORS ........................................................................................................ 190

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
7.0 INSTALLATION MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................... 190

7.1 PIPING ....................................................................................................................................................................... 190
7.2 PIPE FITTINGS (ABOVE GRADE).......................................................................................................................... 194
7.3 SUPPORTS ............................................................................................................................................................... 194
7.4 EXECUTION .............................................................................................................................................................. 195
8.0 CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM (FM-200 / HFC-227EA) .......................................................... 197
8.1 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................................... 197
8.2 APPLICABLE CODES & STANDARDS ................................................................................................................. 197
8.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................................................................... 197
8.4 SCOPE OF WORK .................................................................................................................................................... 197
8.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ........................................................................................................................................... 198
8.6 INSTALLER ............................................................................................................................................................... 198
8.7 SUBMITTALS ............................................................................................................................................................ 199
8.8 CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................................... 200
8.8.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION & OPERATION .............................................................................................................. 200
8.9 MATERIALS & EQUIPMENTS ............................................................................................................................... 201
8.9.1 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................................. 201
8.9.2 CLEAN AGENT SYSTEM & DISTRIBUTION ........................................................................................................ 201
8.9.3 Releasing Control Panel ......................................................................................................................................... 202
8.9.4 Optical Smoke Detector.......................................................................................................................................... 203
8.9.5 Manual Release (Electric) ...................................................................................................................................... 203
8.9.6 Abort Station ............................................................................................................................................................ 203
8.9.7 Audible and Visual Alarm ....................................................................................................................................... 204
8.9.8 Caution and Avisory Signs ..................................................................................................................................... 204
8.9.9 Illuminated Warning Signs ..................................................................................................................................... 204
8.9.10 System and Control Wiring ............................................................................................................................... 204
8.9.11 System Inspection and Checkout ..................................................................................................................... 205
8.10 Training Requirements ........................................................................................................................................... 205
8.11 Operation and Maintenance .................................................................................................................................. 205
8.12 AS-BUILT Drawings ................................................................................................................................................ 205
8.13 Acceptance Tests .................................................................................................................................................... 206
8.14 System Inspections ................................................................................................................................................. 206
8.15 Warranty ................................................................................................................................................................... 207
9.0 MISCELLANEOUS ................................................................................................................................................... 207
9.1 ENVIRONMENT AN HAZARDOUS AREA ............................................................................................................. 207
9.2 EARTHING ................................................................................................................................................................ 207
9.3 PAINTING .................................................................................................................................................................. 207
9.4 PASSAGE THROUGH WALLS OF CABLES AND PIPES ................................................................................... 207
9.5 SAFETY SIGNAGE ................................................................................................................................................... 207
9.6 COMMENCEMENT & PROGRAMME OF WORKS ............................................................................................... 208
9.7 INSTALLATION ........................................................................................................................................................ 208
9.8 TESTING .................................................................................................................................................................... 208
9.9 ACCEPTANCE TESTS ............................................................................................................................................. 209
9.10 SYSTEM INSPECTIONS .......................................................................................................................................... 209
9.11 WARRANTY .............................................................................................................................................................. 209
9.12 SPARE PARTS & TOOLS ....................................................................................................................................... 209
9.13 MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................................................................ 209
9.14 OPERATION SUPPORT .......................................................................................................................................... 210
9.15 HANDING OVER OF INSTALLATIONS ............................................................................................................................... 210
10.0 APPROVED SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS ............................................................................................... 210

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 General
This technical specification provides an overview of the comprehensive Fire protection

system to be provided for the protection of Headquarter of General Directorate of
Boarders Passports, Expatriates Affairs and Nationality and Travel Documents
Department in Wadi Al Banat, Doha, State of Qatar
The proposed complex is consisting of multiple buildings as follows:
The Headquarter of General Directorate of Boarders Passports & Expatriates Affairs
Building, consisting of a 3-storey superstructure ground floor consists of Visitors
receptions & waiting halls, offices, lounges, facilities entrances, VIP lounges & service
rooms, first floor consists of offices, lounges, meeting rooms, employees services and
facilities, archives & ancillaries & second floor is designed for future extension, the
building shall be comprised of, but not limit to, the following departments:
a) General Directorate.
b) Passport Department.
c) Expatriates Affairs Department
d) Administration Department
e) Unified Services Department
f) Airport Passport Department
g) Search & Follow-up Department
The Nationality and Travel Documents Department building is consisting of a 3-storey

superstructure ground floor consists of Visitors receptions & waiting halls, offices,
lounges, facilities entrances, VIP lounges, archive & service rooms, first floor consists of
offices, lounges, meeting rooms, employees services and facilities, archives &
ancillaries & second floor is designed for future extension, the building shall be
comprised mainly of the following departments:
a) Travel Documents Section.
b) Nationality Section.
c) Administration Affairs Section
d) Archives Section
e) Public Relation , Planning& Statistics Office
f) Permanent Committee For Nationality
The Clubhouse building is consisting of a 2-storey superstructure ground floor consists

of Auditorium, manager office, lounges, facilities entrances, VIP lounges, GYM,
swimming pool & service rooms, first floor consists of lounges, dining areas, facilities, &
ancillaries.
The two underground parking basements are divided as first basement parking for
visitors 952 parking slots, and second basement parking for employees 1316 parking
slots, in addition to ancillary buildings and main entrance from basement 1
The purpose of this technical specification is to summarize the fire detection & alarm
system and automatic & manual fire protection system requirements as recommended
in the applicable codes and standards for the proposed project. This specification also
identifies the minimum code requirements that will provide an acceptable level of fire
safety measures referring to the applicable codes, chapters and sections in detail.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
1.2 Goal
The main goal is to provide the sustainable fire protection system to protect the
occupants life and property.
1.3 Objective
The overall purpose and objective of the Fire Protection system for the entire project is
to provide systems or equipment which will provide means of mitigation in the event of
fires so as to reduce the risk of escalation for the facility and extinguishing of fires.
In order to protect life, the environment and asset the fire protection systems are
designed to:
a) Provide the ability to combat and extinguish fires;
b) Minimize the spread of fire, smoke and combustion products;
c) Control larger fires to limit escalation and equipment damage.
The fire detection & alarm system and fire protection system that are designed, installed,
tested & commissioned shall be in accordance with relevant NFPA (National Fire
Protection Association) fire safety codes & standards to protect the human life from fire
emergency and from other emergencies.
1.4 Terminology
In this document:
The term Employer refers to the Client MOI-BUILDING AFFAIRS DEPT
The term Engineer refers to CEG INTERNATIONAL
The term Contractor refers to the company executing the works.
1.5 Contractual Documents
This document is part of the contractual documents mentioned in the Contract

given to the contractor (as defined in the General Conditions of Contract).
This document is a technical description of the works given to the contractor and is
supplemented with drawings. These drawings are listed in drawings list documents
appended to this file.
The present tender document has been precisely defined according to the latest
characteristics.
The contract drawings provide the necessary guidelines so as to define the main
elements.
The contractor, using his professional knowledge, will define, in their entirety, the
works to be performed according to the specification.
The contractors can verify this specification by consulting the architectural and all
technical documents.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
The contractors shall present any eventual errors or omissions to the documents
before signing the contract. The Engineer shall take no claims relative to tender
documents into account once the contract has been signed.
1.6 Contractor Responsibilities / Requirements
The Contractor is responsible for the quality and the satisfactory operation of the
installations entrusted to him, as well as for compliance with the performance
stipulated in this document. Consequently, for his own account and under his own
responsibility, he must carry out all calculations and select the necessary materials
and equipment.
Apart from the required performance definitions, this document and the relevant
drawings also provide many indications resulting from the studies carried out by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall review these studies and check the corresponding
indications. The same applies to equipment selection, for which the information
given in this document must be deemed as indicative and defines only the minimum
requirements.
The specialist fire protection system contractor shall have minimum 20 years of
experience in the design, engineering, manufacture, procure, supply, installation,
testing, commissioning and maintenance of relevant fire protection systems. The
specialist fire protection system contractor shall be ISO 9001, ISO 29001, ISO
14001 & OSHAS 18001 certified and shall be of UL registered firm. In addition, the
specialist contractor shall be A Grade approved contractor by the Qatar Civil
Defence department to carry out the fire protection system design & installations of
unlimited projects.
1.7 Scope Description
The contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, supplies, equipment,
transportation, supervision, technical, professional and other services, and shall perform
all operations necessary and required to satisfactorily complete all the necessary
engineering, procurement services, construction work and commissioning for the fire
protection systems and equipments and warranted for 400 days from the date of
commissioning for the Headquarter of General Directorate of Boarders Passports,
Expatriates Affairs and Nationality and Travel Documents Department in Wadi Al Banat,
Doha, State of Qatar
Design Criteria
Refer to the tender drawings and the specific technical documents issued and stated in
this document.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
2. CODES AND STANDARDS
This Specification is prepared referring to the internationally recognized codes and

standards of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) and QCDD Qatar Civil
Defence Department requirements.
3. Local Codes & Standards
Fire Protection Regulations followed by the QCDD, Qatar Civil Defence Department
requirements shall be referenced and complied the requirements as recommended
4. NFPA Codes & Standards
All the systems shall be designed and installed in accordance with the requirement of
International Codes and Standards and Local Authority having Jurisdiction. They shall
be particularly in accordance with the following NFPA /BS EN/Vds standards:
NFPA 10, Standard for Installation of Portable Fire Extinguisher
NFPA 13, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 14, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems
NFPA 17A, Standard for wet chemical extinguishing systems
NFPA 20, Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection
NFPA 22, Standard for Water Tanks for Private Fire Protection
NFPA 24, Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and their
Appurtenance
NFPA-25, Standard for Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water Based Fire
Protection Systems
NFPA-70, National Electric Code
NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code
NFPA 92A, Standard for Smoke Control Systems
NFPA-101, Life Safety Code
NFPA-110, Standard for Emergency and Stand by Power systems
NFPA-170, Standard for Fire Safety Symbols
NFPA-220, Standard for types of Building Construction
NFPA-221, Standard for Fire Walls and Fire Barrier Walls
NFPA-2001, Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing systems
NFPA 5000, Building Construction & Safety Code
OSHA, Code of federal regulations, Title 29, Part 1926
BS EN3 for portable fire extinguishers
BS EN 1866 for mobile extinguishers
BS EN 671-1 for fixed fire fighting system

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
BS 5041-3 for dry riser inlet

BS EN 54 Standard for installation of Fire Alarm System.
5. SCOPE OF WORK
5.1 General
This specification covers the supply, delivery and complete installation on site and in full
working order of the equipment specified in this document and/or shown on the
drawings.
Full particulars, performance curves and illustrations of the equipment, complying as
closely as possible with this specification, shall be provided with the tender, but any
deviations from the specification must be fully and clearly indicated in the tender
submission schedules.
The Contractor shall provide and install:
The complete fire pumping station, including the firewater pumps (pumps, diesel
engines drive, engines drive controllers, skid, diesel underground storage &
pump,...), the jockey pump (pumps, electric drive, electric drive controllers), the
piping & hanging, the valves, check-valves, relief valves, fittings, the
instrumentation, the storage fire water tanks and feeding controllers (valves &
controllers)
The firewater mains (sprinkler, standpipe & hydrant), including the piping, the
fittings, the hanging, the block-valves & the hydrants
The wet / dry / pre-action sprinkler systems, including the control valves, the piping,
the hanging, the heads, the instrumentation
The hose reels (standpipes, hose connections, external hose streams)
The portable fire extinguishers
Clean agent fire suppression system as shown on the drawings
The fire detection and alarm system c/w all accessories as shown on the drawings
The marking of all the safety equipment
The Contractor shall be responsible for all the following aspects of the provided
systems:
The checking of the tender drawings and any calculations supplied with the
drawings. The Contractor shall check each drawing and satisfy himself that the
design is correct for the equipment offered and will meet all applicable rules and
regulations
The provision of any additional information required by the Contractors installation
engineers who are particular to the equipment being supplied e.g. fabrication
drawings, equipment data sheets, commissioning instructions etc.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
the provision of drawings and equipment data related to the systems as required by
the Engineer
the supply of all required equipment and other fixtures associated with the systems
painting
shop testing of equipment and provision of inspection facilities
certification
packing
transport
offloading into stores
drawing from stores
test in site
commissioning and arrangement for inspection
the provision and fittings of suitable wall boxes, transits and plates where pipe work
or cable passes through walls, etc...as well as fire rating reinstatement materials
the supply of as built drawings and as built calculations
the supply of a complete set of spares and special tools and equipment required for
use in connection with the systems
the provision of scaffolding, ramps and any other equipment required to enable the
systems to be installed, tested and commissioned correctly
a demonstration to key personnel in the use and testing of the systems and
equipment supplied
Operating and maintenance manuals.
5.2 Materials
The Contractor shall supply all materials necessary to make up effective and operable
fire protection, detection and alarm systems, voice alarm system and emergency & exit
lighting systems for the facilities indicated in the drawings and in the present
specification, and particularly :
All the necessary pipe work, valves, equipment and instrumentation required for the
facilities
All electrical cable between panels, junction boxes, sensors, call points, pressure
switches, alarm bells, flashing lights, ... and generally all the cable (and their
supports) required for the facilities.
Pipes & Cables passing through fire walls shall not modified the fire rating of the
wall (reconstitution of fire rating with approved sealant materials by the Contractor)
local alarms indicating actuation of the systems

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
All detectors, fire signalling and alarm cabling shall be installed by the Contractor
using materials in accordance with NFPA.
All emergency lights, exit lights with directional arrow marks & pictograms as
required,central battery panels, addressable monitoring panel, interface modules,
phase monitoring relays and interconnecting cabling shall be installed by the
contractor using the materials in accordance with NFPA.
The main electrical supply to the Contractors equipment will be by others.
All instrumentation and electrical equipment will be enclosed to suit the Hazard
Class of the area. The Hazard Class of each area is indicated on the Hazardous
Area Layouts.
Hazardous Area Certificate will be required for each item supplied within the
Hazardous Area.
The Contractor shall define in the quotation the full specification of every system
proposed (pipe work, cables, equipment,)

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
5.3 Quality of Materials
Only materials meeting quality guidelines mentioned specifically for the products shall
be subject to the approval of the Authorized Engineer.
Wherever applicable, the system and material is to comply with the relevant
International Standards or British Standards /VDs /LPCB.
All Materials should have at least been certified by two independent Certification
Organizations from International Testing Laboratories & Accredited Certification Bodies
as LPCB/ BSI Kite mark / VDs and or UL/FM.
5.4 Ancillary Materials
The Contractor shall be responsible for detailing, supplying and fittings all ancillary
materials such as supports, cables trays, bolting, gaskets, sealants, foundation bolts,
sealing materials, earthing straps and bosses, clips, junction boxes, glands and closure
plates, as necessary for the satisfactory completion of works.
Generally, galvanized steel straps, rods, sections are acceptable for supports but where
pipe work is painted, supports shall also be painted.
5.5 Approval Listing of Materials
The equipment shall have been tested and, where applicable, shall have been granted a
certificate of approval or listing for the intended service. UL listed, FM approved, BSI
Kitemark, Vds approved equipment shall be used where possible. Where equipment is
offered without the above approval or listing, these items shall be listed with the type of
certificate or approval granted indicated.
Certification shall be required for electrical equipment to be used in areas classified as
hazardous due to a potentially explosive atmosphere.
The Contractor shall supply only proven and established equipment which is suitable for
the duty.
The Employer reserves the right to call for either substitute or alternative units, or to
nominate manufacturers or models for any class of equipment.
5.6 Submittals
The installing contractor shall submit the following design information and drawings for
approval prior to starting work on this project:
Product Data: submit manufacturers technical product
Field installation layout drawings having a scale of not less than (1:100m) detailing the
location of all equipments, pipe runs including pipe sizes and lengths, controls and
other accessories.
Auxiliary details and information such as panels, door holders, special sealing
requirements and equipment shutdown.
Separate layouts, or drawings, shall be provided for each level, (i.e.; room, under floor,
and above ceiling) and each system for mechanical and electrical work.
A separate layout or drawing, shall show isometric details of all major equipments,
mounting details and proposed pipe runs and sizes.
Electrical layout drawings shall show the location of all devices and include point-to-
point conduit runs and a description of the method(s) used for detector mounting.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
A complete sequence of operation shall be submitted detailing all alarm devices,

shutdown functions, remote signaling, and agent discharge for each system.
Submit drawings, calculations and system component data sheets for approval to the
local Fire Prevention Agency, owners Insurance Underwriter and all other Authorities
Having Jurisdiction before starting installation. Submit approved plans to the
Architect/Engineer for record.
5.7 Workmanship
The workmanship shall be of the highest grade and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
All inferior work shall, on indication by the Engineer, immediately be removed and
rectified by and at the expense of the Sub-Contractor.
5.8 Notices
The successful Tenderer for this Contract shall, immediately after he has been officially
notified that his tender has been accepted, and at any time thereafter as may be
necessary, notify all the relevant authorities, pay fees and take any other steps which
may be required or prescribed to execute the installation as specified.
Copies of such correspondence shall be forwarded to the Engineer who shall at all times
be kept informed.
5.9 Drawings
5.10 Shop Drawings
The Sub-Contractor shall provide shop drawings for each system floor wise in detail as
required by the engineer in charge and Authority having jurisdiction. It is the contractor
responsibility to co-ordinate with other services while preparing the shop drawings and
obtains approval from the engineer in charge.
5.11 As Built Drawings
Upon completion of each system, the installing contractor shall provide four (4) copies of
system "As-Built" drawings to the owner. The drawings shall show actual installation
details including all equipment locations as well as piping and conduit routing details.
Show all room or facilities modifications, including door and/or damper installations
completed. One (1) copy of reproducible engineering drawings shall be provided
reflecting all actual installation details.
These drawings shall be as accurate and complete as possible.
5.12 Work limits
Fire water system:

The contractor shall provide and install the complete fire fighting and sprinkler system
including fire water tanks, fire pumpsets and external fire water mains as shown on the
drawings.
Power:
The Contractor shall provide and install the entire systems (equipment, cables, cables
trays,) from his systems to power cabinets and/or panels.
The main supply to the Contractors power cabinet and/or panels shall be made by the
Main contractor.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
Fire Alarm Supervision Station:

The Contractor shall provide and install the entire systems of detection & alarm and
other interfaces with his extinguishing systems (Control panels, Graphic display units,
detectors, manual call points, sounders, flashers, interface modules, Auto dialer, power
supply units, cables, cables trays..,).
The connection and cables from the Contractors control panels to Fire Alarm
Supervision Station will be made by others.
5.13 Design Rules
5.14 Generalities
This specification, together with the related documents and drawings, is intended to
express with the maximum possible detail, the design principles and general
arrangements which the structures and/or installations to be built must satisfy.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor, selected among other criteria for its professional
skill, to:
Draw the Employers attention to possible unsuitability of any general arrangements
or principles proposed, due to the type or intended use of the structures and/or
installations to be built,
Request any further information he feels necessary in order to be able, in full
knowledge of the facts, and with full responsibility, to carry out his own execution
studies, and then build the structures and/or installations planned within the present
lot.
It is pointed out that the approvals which may be given by the Employer concern
the Contractor's respect of the general arrangements and design principles he sets.
The approvals cannot be taken to be a check regarding the relevance of
calculations, execution studies and construction details, which remain the
contractor's exclusive responsibility.
Under no circumstances can the Contractor use the inaccuracy of parts supplied or
omissions as an argument to refuse within the context of his contract all or part of
the structures required for entire completion of his installations.
It is his responsibility to evaluate the importance and type of the structures, and to
propose, through his professional experience, the modifications required to obtain
correct execution of the work in agreement with the Employer.
5.15 Obtention of performance
This concern all the Works.

The Contractor shall provide an efficient fire protection system. The Contractor shall
take all the necessary steps to obtain these performances.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
5.16 Special Points
The installations are designed for fully automatic operation and easy maintenance.
Parts which are frequently dismantled must not require intervention by specialists other
than the installation operators.
It must be possible to access all areas, on every type of device, for inspection, cleaning,
lubrication, dismantling, replacement and repair of all the parts.
5.17 Drawings and Documentation
Refer to tender documents.
5.18 Inspection and Testing
Inspection and testing shall be performed as required by the Engineer / Employer.

The Employer or his appointed representative shall, at his discretion, check for
compliance with specified requirements and approved drawings and for satisfactory
practice.
Certificate shall be provided by the Contractor certifying that the provision of this
specification has been incorporated into the design and manufacture of the equipment.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
5.19 Testing and Commissioning
Functional performance and discharge tests shall be carried out on Site at the discretion
of the Employer.
All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Employers insurers or their
nominated representatives.
The Contractor shall provide all the necessary tools and equipment for testing and
commissioning activities.
As the minimum, the tests indicated in the relevant NFPA Standards shall be carried out
and reports shall be submitted duly signed and stamped by the QCDD approved fire
protection system specialist contractor.
In the event of the results being unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall provide the
materials, equipment and personnel to effect the necessary corrections and re-test
within a reasonable period, to prove the system. The cost of these will be to the account
of the Contractor.
5.20 Protection systems approval
All the Fire Protection systems installed in the proposed facility / Building shall be
approved by the Authority having jurisdiction (Qatar Civil Defence Department).
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to produce the fire protection systems detailed
engineering drawings to obtain the Consultant Engineer approval prior to the
commencement of work and to implement the Authority requirements. The Contractor
shall also submit the As Built drawings to the Consultant Engineer and make necessary
arrangements for Final Inspection & testing in order to obtain the Final NOC / approval
from the concern Authorities.
5.21 As built documents
All the documentation (drawings, diagrams, specifications,) shall be updated as the

final issue to be in accordance with the as built systems.
6. PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
6.1 General
All First Aid Equipment (Fire Extinguishers, Hose Reels, Fire Hose Rack, Fire blankets)
shall have been certified by two Certification Organizations from International Testing
Laboratories & Accredited Certification Bodies as LPCB Approval / BSI KITE mark
approval and or UL listed/FM Approved.
Cabinets housing fire extinguishers shall be stainless steel and shall not be kept in
locked position.
Fire Extinguishers shall be manufactured to comply with BS EN 3 (portable), BS EN
1866 (Mobile) standards. Fire Extinguishers shall comply with NFPA-10 or BS 5306 for
the installation.
The classification of fire extinguishers shall consist of a letter that indicates the class of
fire on which a fire extinguisher has been found to be effective, preceded by a rating
number (Class A, Class B and Class F only) that indicates the relative extinguishing
effectiveness.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
The distribution of fire extinguishers shall comply with the prescribed requirements of
NFPA-10, as shown on the drawings and the specific requirements of the local Civil
Defence Authorities.
Portable fire extinguishers shall be maintained in a fully charged and operable condition,
and kept in their designated places at all times when they are not being used.
6.2 Definitions
The type of extinguisher needed depends on the right type of fire that may occur in the
room or building.
According to NFPA 10, several classes of fire have been defined as below:
Class A Fires: Fires in ordinary combustible materials, such as wood, cloth, paper,
rubber, and many plastics.
Class B Fires: Fires in flammable liquids, combustible liquids, petroleum greases, tars,
oils, oil-based paints, solvents, lacquers, alcohols, and flammable gases.
Class C Fires: fires that involve energized electrical equipment where the electrical non-
conductivity of the extinguishing media is of importance. (Where electrical equipment is
de-energized, fire extinguishers for class A or B fires can be used safely.)
Class D Fires: Fires in combustible metals, such as magnesium, titanium, zirconium,
sodium, lithium, and potassium.
Class K Fires: Fires in cooking appliances that involve combustible cooking media
(vegetable or animal oils and fats.)
Building presenting class B or C fire hazard shall be equipped with a regular number of
class A extinguishers dedicated to the building protection, and shall also be equipped
with adding class B or C extinguishers.
According to these definitions, all parts of the buildings shall be equipped with class
ABC type extinguishers. In the meantime, rooms such as Storages, Workshops and
other rooms housing electrical equipments, shall be equipped with adding class C
extinguishers.
6.3 Products
6.3.1 Water Fire Extinguisher

Water type Fire extinguisher shall manufactured in accordance to BS EN 3 (portable)
and BS EN 1866 (mobile) and shall be operated by means of a lever operated self
closing control valve to enable the discharge to be interrupted temporority and provided
with a safety pin. The cylinder shall have minimum working pressure of 14bar. The
temperature shall range from +5 to 60C. The extinguisher must have a plastic base. It
must be coated inside by electrostatic PVC resin to resist corrosion. The cylinder shall
be made special cold rolled steel sheet with Argon/CO2 welding process and the suction
tube shall be made of Rigid PVC with filter. The water type fire extinguisher capacity
shall be of 6 Ltrs & 9 Ltrs stored pressure type . All extinguishers shall carry instructions
for use in English and Arabic.
The water type fire extinguishers: The product should have at least been certified by two
independent Certification Organizations from International Testing Laboratories &
Accredited Certification Bodies as LPCB approval/KITE mark approval and or UL
listed/FM approved.
The capacity of the extinguisher shall be of 9Lts and shall have a minimum fire rating of
13A as per BS EN3.
The water extinguishers are recommended with the capacities and minimum fire rating
as follows:

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
SL # Capacity Fire Rating

1 6 ltr Water 13A
2 9 ltr Water 21A
6.3.2 ABC Dry Powder Fire Extinguisher
ABC Dry powder fire extinguishers (Multi purpose) shall be manufactured in accordance
with BS EN3 for portable extinguishers and BS1866 for mobile extinguishers and shall
be operated by means of a lever/squeeze handle operated valve provided with a safety
pin which shall avoid inadvertent operation and the valve shall be capable for controlling
partial discharge. The cylinder shall have minimum working pressure of 14bar. The
temperature shall range from -20 to +60 C. The extinguisher must have a plastic base
(Only for portable). It must be coated externally by electrostatic polyester powder and
oven baked for corrosion resistance. The cylinder shall be made special cold rolled steel
sheet with Argon/CO2 automatic welding process and the suction tube shall be made of
PVC material. All extinguishers shall carry instructions for operation and maintenance in
English and Arabic.
The Dry powder fire extinguishers: The product should have at least been certified by
two independent Certification Organizations from International Testing Laboratories &
Accredited Certification Bodies as LPCB Approval / BSI KITE mark approval and or UL
listed/FM Approved.
The extinguishers are recommended with the capacities and minimum fire rating as
follows:
1 1 Kg ABC Dry Powder 8A & 34B

4 4 Kg ABC Dry Powder 21A& 113B

8 25kg Dry powder Mobile IIB
9 50kg Dry powder Mobile IVB
Multipurpose Dry Chemical Extinguishers (Class A, Class B, and Class C Fires).

Fire extinguishers of this type shall contain an ammonium phosphate base agent.
Multipurpose agents used are shall exactly the same manner as ordinary dry chemical
agents on Class B fires. For use on Class A fires, the multipurpose agent shall have the
additional characteristic of softening and sticking when in contact with hot surfaces. In
this way, it can adhere to burning materials and form a coating that will smother and
isolate the fuel from air. When applying the agent, it is important to try to coat all burning
areas in order to eliminate or minimize the number of small embers that could be a
potential source of re-ignition. The agent itself has little cooling effect and, because of its
surface coating characteristic, it cannot penetrate below the burning surface. For this

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
reason, extinguishment of deep-seated fires could possibly not be accomplished unless

the agent is discharged below the surface or the material is broken apart and spread
out.
6.3.3 Carbon Dioxide Fire Extinguisher
Carbon dioxide fire extinguishers shall be manufactured in accordance with BS EN 3
(portable) and BS EN 1866 (mobile) and shall be operated by means of a lever
/squeeze handle operated valve provided with a safety pin which shall avoid inadvertent
operation and the valve shall be capable for controlling partial discharge. The cylinder
shall be made of high grade seamless carbon steel pipe or aluminum alloy and it must
be coated externally by electrostatic polyester powder quoting and oven baking to resist
corrosion. The cylinders shall be free from leakage during hydrostatically pressure
tested to 250bar. The temperature shall range from -20 to 60 C.
The suction tube shall be Aluminium. All extinguishers shall carry instructions for
operation and maintenance in English and Arabic.
Typical applications are electrical & electronic equipment, food preparation areas,
telephone equipment Rooms, Engine Rooms, Control Rooms, Flammable liquid storage
areas etc,. Since the agent is discharged in the form of a gas/snow cloud, it has a
relatively short range of 3 ft to 8 ft (1 m to 2.4 m). This type of fire extinguisher is not
recommended for outdoor use where windy conditions prevail, or for indoor use in
locations that are subject to strong air currents because the agent can rapidly dissipate
and prevent extinguishment. The concentration needed for fire extinguishment reduces
the amount of oxygen (air) needed for life safety when the discharge is in a confined
area (space).
The Carbon dioxide fire extinguishers: The product should have at least been certified
by two independent Certification Organizations from International Testing Laboratories &
listed/FM Approved.
The CO2 extinguishers are recommended with the capacities and minimum fire rating
as follows:
1 2 Kg CO2 55B
2 5 Kg CO2 55B
3 10Kg CO2 Mobile Min 70B
4 20kg CO2 Mobile Min 89B
5 30kg CO2 Mobile Min 113B
6.3.4 Foam Fire Extinguisher

Foam type Fire extinguisher shall manufactured in accordance to BS EN 3 (portable)
and BS EN 1866 (mobile) and shall be operated by means of a lever operated self
closing control valve to enable the discharge to be interrupted temporority and provided
with a safety pin. The cylinder shall have minimum working pressure of 14bar. The
temperature shall range from +5 to 60C. The extinguisher must have a plastic base. It
must be coated inside by electrostatic PVC resin to resist corrosion. The cylinder shall
be made special cold rolled steel sheet with Argon/CO2 welding process and the suction
tube shall be made of Rigid PVC with filter. The Foam type fire extinguisher capacity

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
shall be of 9 Ltrs stored pressure type . All extinguishers shall carry instructions for use
in English and Arabic.
The capacity of the extinguisher shall be of 9Lts and shall have a fire rating of 21A &
183B as per BS EN3.
The Foam type fire extinguishers: The product should have at least been certified by two
independent Certification Organizations from International Testing Laboratories &
listed/FM Approved.
The Foam extinguishers are recommended with the capacities and fire rating as follows:
1 6 ltr Foam 21 A & 144B
2 9 ltr Foam 21A & 183B
3 50 Liter Foam Mobile IVB

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
6.3.5 Wet Chemical Fire Extinguisher

The Wet Chemical Fire Extinguishers shall have LPCB Approved /BSI KITE mark
approved and comply with BS EN3 standards. The cylinder shall be tested to 30 bar and
shall have minimum pressure of 10 bar. The capacity shall be of 3 liters 25F/13A & 6
liters with 75F/13A ratings. They shall be provided in all the kitchens. The temperature
shall range from +5 to 60C.
The Wet chemical type fire extinguishers: The product should have at least been
certified by two independent Certification Organizations from International Testing
Laboratories & Accredited Certification Bodies as LPCB approval/KITE mark approval
and or UL listed/FM Approved.
The Wet Chemical extinguishers are recommended with the capacities and fire rating as
follows:
1 3 ltr Wet Chemical 8A & 25F

2 6 ltr Wet Chemical 13A & 75F
6.4 Installation
Fire extinguishers shall be conspicuously located where they will be readily accessible
and immediately available in the event of fire. Preferably they shall be located along
normal paths of travel, including exits from areas.
Fire extinguishers shall not be obstructed or obscured from view.
Portable fire extinguishers other than wheeled types shall be securely installed on the
hanger or in the bracket supplied or placed in cabinets or wall recesses. The hanger or
bracket shall be securely and properly anchored to the mounting surface in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions. Wheeled-type fire extinguishers shall be located in
a designated location.
Fire extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 40 lb (18.14 kg) shall be
installed so that the top of the fire extinguisher is not more than 5 ft (1.53 m) above the
floor. Fire extinguishers having a gross weight greater than 40 lb (18.14 kg) (except
wheeled types) shall be so installed that the top of the fire extinguisher is not more than
31/2 ft (1.07 m) above the floor. In no case shall the clearance between the bottom of
the fire extinguisher and the floor be less than 4 in. (10.2 cm).
Fire extinguishers shall be installed in stainless steel cabinets where required in finished
rooms / office areas and as shown on the drawings and shall be confirmed with the
Architect.
7. STANDPIPE AND HOSE SYSTEM
7.1 General
Stand pipe & hose system shall be provided as per NFPA 14 and Authority having
jurisdiction. The purpose of stand pipe system is to provide a means to manually apply
water to fires in buildings while automatic sprinkler systems are not responding
automatically to a fire. They shall be available at strategic points for use by the
occupants and the fire department personnel. They shall be used convey the water to

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
hose points without the need for laborious laying out of hoses over large heights and
distances, thus significantly improving the efficiency of manual fire fighting operations.
The standpipe system proposed for the protection of B2 warehouse used as cold store
shall be of automatic dry standpipe system with all accessories as shown on the
drawings and for the protection of B3 & B4 warehouses shall be of wet standpipe
system with all accessories as shown on the drawings.
7.2 Scope of work
The contractor shall include in his tender for the complete procurement, supply, proper
storage, co-ordination, installation, testing and commissioning of the systems detailed
on the tender drawings and in this specification to the standards and approval of
Authority Having Jurisdiction. The contractor shall include for all labor, materials, tools
and tackle, complete with all supports and fixings back to approved building structural
members. The contractor shall be responsible for all dimensions and location of other
services, and the correct setting out of the installation.
7.3 Products
7.4 Fire Hose Reels
The hose reel drum shall be made of electro galvanized steel sheet or stainless sheet
and the cabinet shall be supported with reinforced support arm and swing through 180
degrees. Welding of any part on cabinet front shall not be allowed. The middle piece of
the hose reel shall be not less than 200mm diameter. The reels shall comply with BS EN
671-1 and comprise a reinforced semi rigid hose. The semi rigid hose use for the hose
reel shall be LPCB/BSI Kite mark and or having Local Civil Defense approved in
conformance to BS EN 694. The semi rigid hose shall be 25mm or 19mm diameter x
30m long, coiled on a revolving drum. The outer end of a hose shall be fitted with a jet /
spray / shut-off control nozzle. The inner end of the hose shall be connected through
the reel to the water supply. All water passage must be brass chrome plated and plastic
parts are not permitted. Complete unit to be listed. The product should have at least
been certified by two independent Certification Organizations from International Testing
Laboratories & Accredited Certification Bodies as LPCB approval/KITE mark approval.
Incase of automatic hose reels, the reels shall incorporate a valve that automatically
turns on the water supply when approximately 3 mtr of hose is unreeled, and shut off
again when the hose is re-wound onto the reel. A manual shut-off valve of the wheel
type shall also be installed on the service pipe to each hose reel.
The hose nozzle shall be, (JET/SPRAY/SHUT OFF) type nozzle.
Each hose reel shall be installed and tested to BS 5306 and shall deliver not less than
0.4 l/s when the two top-most reels are in use simultaneously providing a jet of
approximately 6 mtr. in length. Pressure reducing devices shall be provided whenever
necessary to limit the pressure as per local authority remotest point requirenment.
Brief operating instructions should be clearly displayed on or by each hose reel in both
English & Arabic languages
The hose reels shall be suitable for working pressures up to 12 bar (175psi) and shall be
installed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
7.5 Fire blanket
Provide fire blankets in Kitchens. Fire blanket shall be good quality with silicon coating
provided on both sides. The size shall be 4 feet x 4 feet, 4 Feet x 6 feet and 6 feet x 6
feet. The product should have at least been certified by two independent Certification
as LPCB/KITE mark approved.
7.6 Landing Valves
Landing valves shall be of pressure reducing and restricting type devises acceptable to
the Fire Brigade use inside buildings. This device shall have 65mm inlet diameter bore
fitted with 65 mm. instantaneous female coupling conforming to BS 336 and a blank cap
secured by a suitable length of chain. The product should have at least been certified by
two independent Certification Organizations from International Testing Laboratories &
Accredited Certification Bodies as LPCB approval/BSI KITE mark approval and or UL
listed/FM Approved.
The valve shall be of brass / Gunmetal construction with approved finish.If the landing
valve is UL listed then the outlet coupling must be quick instantanious with local fire
services. The installation of the coupling should be done by an authorized installer.
Landing valves shall be installed inside the cabinet, at a height above floor level
between 750 mm and 1100 mm. The outlet shall be installed to give clearances of not
less than 150 mm on both sides and below the valve and not less than 200 mm
clearance above the hand wheel.
7.7 Fire Hose & Nozzle
Fire Hose and Nozzles should have at least been certified by two independent
Certification Organizations from International Testing Laboratories & Accredited
Certification Bodies as LPCB approval/BSI KITE mark approval and or UL listed/FM
Approved.
Fire hose shall be of synthetic re-inforced rubber lined, 65 mm diameter and 30 m long
equipped with brass chrome plated male coupling for the connection with the landing
valve, and female coupling for the connection 65 mm chrome plated adjustable diffuser
nozzle. The fire hose unit shall include the landing valve specified above, and shall have
minimum working pressure of 15 Bar and bursting pressure of minimum 45 Bar.
7.8 Fire Hose Cabinets
Fire Hose Cabinets should have at least been certified by two independent Certification
as LPCB/BSI Kitemark approval.
The hose reel cabinet shall be either wall-mounted type or recessed type as shown on
the drawings. The cabinet can be single or double to accommodate fire hose reel in the
upper compartment . The cabinet has to be made of minimum 1.2mm thickness electro-
galvanized steel sheet or stainless steel as per design requirement. The cabinets shall
be of UL listed, 1 hour fire rated. The stainless steel cabinets shall be polished finish
type, the finish shall be decided upon the approval of the architect.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
The Double fire hose reel cabinet in different locations of the building shall have
following specified fire equipment:
Automatic or manual Fire Hose Reel
5 kg CO2 Fire Extinguisher
6 kg DCP Fire Extinguisher
Cabinet shall manufacture by ISO9001 manufacturing company and duly certified e.g.
UL, LPCB and others.
7.9 Breeching Inlet
The unit shall be of BSI kitemark/LPCB approved and or UL Listed/FM approved.

The inlet breeching piece shall be of horizontal pattern having a 150 mm flanged outlet
and four 65 mm instantaneous male inlets complete with blank caps and chains. A non-
return (check) valve shall protect the inlet. The coupling shall comply with BS 336. The
inlet connections shall be of suitable type of local fire brigade department.
The breaching piece shall be equipped with a 25 mm drain valve to drain the riser.
All parts including valve body, chain and caps shall be brass / gunmetal if it is UL Listed
and valves body shall be made of DI body with Brass Inlet Valves polished chrome
plated if it is BSI kitemark/LPCB approved. The product should have at least been
7.10 Breeching Inlet Cabinet
The unit shall be BSI kitemark/LPCB approved. The product should have at least been
Laboratories & Accredited Certification Bodies as LPCB approval/BSI KITE mark
approval.
The inlet breeching unit shall be housed in an steel flush box painted by polyster powder
coated, 1 hour fire rated, UL listed cabinet with wired glass glazed front panel as per BS
5041-5 standard and:
a. Conspicuously indicated by the words: Dry Riser Inlet, Sprinkler Inlet, Wet Riser
Inlet in block letters on the inner face of the glass, depending on the project
type.
b. Fastened only by means of a spring lock, which can also be operated from the
inside without the aid of a key after the glass has been broken.
c. Made large enough for hose to be connected to inlets even if the door cannot be
opened and the only means of access is by breaking the glass.
7.11 Design Details for Stand Pipe System
The Specialized Sub-Contractor is required to complete the hydraulic calculation to

determine the pipe size beyond the hazard classification back to the riser control and fire
pump set.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
7.4.1 DRY STANDPIPE SYSTEM :
SYSTEM AUTOMATIC DRY STANDPIPE SYSTEM

DESIGN STANDARD - NFPA 14 : 2010
CLASS OF STANDPIPE CLASS I
SIZE OF HOSE CONNECTION 65 mm (LANDING VALVE)
MINIMUM FLOW REQUIRED/LANDING
946.25 LPM (250 GPM)
VALVE
3785 LPM (1000 GPM) FOR FULLY
MAXIMUM FLOW REQUIRED
SPRINKLERED BUILDING
MINIMUM PRESSURE AT REMOTEST
6.9 BAR
LANDING VALVE
7.4.2 WET STANDPIPE SYSTEM:
TYPE OF SYSTEM AUTOMATIC DRY STANDPIPE SYSTEM

DESIGN STANDARD - NFPA 14 : 2010
CLASS OF STANDPIPE CLASS II
SIZE OF HOSE CONNECTION 25 mm (HOSE REEL)
MINIMUM FLOW REQUIRED/LANDING
189.25 LPM (50 GPM)
VALVE
MAXIMUM FLOW REQUIRED 378.5 LPM (100 GPM)
MINIMUM PRESSURE AT REMOTEST
4.5 BAR
LANDING VALVE
7.12 Installation
Standpipe and hose systems shall be installed in accordance with NFPA-14 and
Authority having jurisdiction requirements and as shown on the drawing.
The Fire protection contractor shall be responsible to co-ordinate his work with all other
trades and shall be completely familiar with and shall make allowance for conditions
which affect the fire protection installation.
The Fire hose cabinets shall be mounted securely in the concrete block walls,
shimmying the back box and mortaring tightly in place.
Provide a pressure guage with a isolation cock with inspectors test plug on top and
bottom of the each stand pipe risers.
Chrome plated nipples shall be provided in between the landing valve and hose
connection. Chrome plated escutcheons shall be provided where pipes penetrate the
cabinet.
A drain valve and piping, located at the lowest point of the standpipe piping downstream
of the isolation valve, shall be arranged to discharge water at an approved location.
7.13 Location Plan

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
The MEP sub-Contractor shall provide and fix in an approved position a fire safety plan
of the risk upon which shall be clearly indicated the location of the fire hose cabinets and
main stop valves.
7.14 Valve labels and Charts
The contractor shall label each valve. The number shall relate to a framed glass covered
valve chart to be supplied and installed in each stand pipe riser chamber / fire pump
house, as required by the engineer in charge. The charts shall indicate the function of
the valves and shall be to the civil defense and engineers approval. No two valves on
the system shall bear the same number.
7.15 Cleaning & Testing
Pipes and all items of equipment shall be delivered, stored and maintained in closed
storage with their open ends effectively plugged, capped or sealed. All fittings, valves
and sundry items shall be stored in clean bins or bagged and stowed in suitable racks.
All such stored items shall be maintained under weatherproofed cover to be supplied by
the contractor until they are ready for incorporation in the works. Particular care shall be
taken to ensure that electrical equipment and components are kept clean and dry.
Before installations are handed over or subjected to the inspection and tests, the entire
installation shall be thoroughly cleaned, both internally and externally.
All fire protection installations shall be flushed out with clean water. During the flushing
out, provision shall be made to exclude any items of plant, which could be damaged by
the cleaning operation. The entire operation shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
The fire protection system shall be tested in accordance with the NFPA codes and the
relevant standards, with particular reference the requirements set forth in this section:
All testing shall be performed under the work of this section. All services required for
testing shall be a responsibility of the work of this section. The Contractor shall notify the
Engineer of all tests, 48 hours prior to testing.
The fire protection piping System shall be tested hydrostatically for not less than 2 hours
and at not less than 200 psi or 50 psi above the system working pressure or 1.5 times of
the system pressure without any leaks or as directed by the local Civil Defence
department.
If the systems are tested in sections, the connection to the previously tested section
shall be included.
All tests that may be required by the local fire authorities shall be performed under the
work of this section, in the presence of their representative, if so required.
All leaks shall be corrected and the system re-tested until no leaks are found, at no cost
to the client.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
Functional tests of all water flow alarms are a responsibility of the works of this Section.
When the various systems are completed, operation tests shall be run on all equipment
to demonstrate proper operating conditions. These tests shall be run under the
observation of the inspector and the clients operating engineer. The clients operators
shall be instructed during this period. Operation tests shall be performed under the work
of this section.
Should any piece of equipment or apparatus of any material or work fail in any of these
tests, it shall be immediately removed and replaced by a perfect material, and the
portion of the work replaces shall again be tested under the work of this Section.
Cost to repair any damages to the building construction occasioned by pipe leaks or
defective materials shall be become under the works of this section, at no cost to the
client. All corrective work shall commence immediately after damage occurs.
8. EXTERNAL FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM
8.1 General
External fire hydrants consist of dry barrel pillar type fire hydrants or underground type
fire hydrants shall be placed around the buildings in accordance with NFPA-24 and
Qatar Civil Defence regulations. Fire Hydrants shall be installed in accordance with
NFPA 24, Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their
Appurtenances.
Hydrants shall be provided in sufficient number and be located in a manner that will
enable the needed fire flow to be delivered through hose lines to all exterior sides of
structure. Hydrants shall be located such as to maintain a minimum of 6m clearance
from any building. Hydrants shall be positioned to be within 100m from the entry to any
building and spaced not more than100 m apart.
8.2 Dry Barrel Fire Hydrant
Fire hydrants shall be manufactured either to comply with AWWA Standard C502
meeting all requirements of UL/FM or BS EN 14384 standard approved by LPCB.
i. AWWA C502 hydrant specifications:
1. Fire hydrants shall be rated for a minimum working pressure of 150 Psi (1034
kPa) and manufactured to comply UL/FM and AWWA C502 standard.
2. Fire hydrants shall have a main valve which shall provide complete closing of the
drains after 4 to 5 turns of the operating nut in the opening direction.
3. The drain ring assembly shall be replaceable without removing the hydrant from
the connecting pipe or having to dig.
4. Fire hydrants shall be three-way in design, having one pumper nozzle (size as
specified) and two 2-1/2 hose nozzle(side outlet). Nozzle thread type shall be as
specified by the end user.
5. The operating nut shall be a one piece design, manufactured of Bronze. It shall be
pentagon in shape and the nut dimensions shall be as specified by the end user.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
6. An arrow shall be cast on the bonnet flange to indicate the specified opening
direction.
7. Hydrants shall be a traffic-model having upper and lower barrels joined at the
ground line by a separate and breakable swivel flange providing 3600 rotation of
upper barrel for proper nozzle facing.
8. The lower barrel shall be an integrally cast unit. The use of threaded on or
mechanically attached flanges is deemed unacceptable.
9. All ferrous part shall be epoxy coated, the lower barrel shall be bitumen coated.
10. Hydrants shall be internally coated by Epoxy to avoid corrosion
11. A bury line shall be marked on the lower barrel below the break flange to indicate
proper installation depth.
12. Hydrant Inlet shall flanged and the size shall be minimum 6
ii. BS EN 14384 hydrant specifications:
1. Fire hydrants shall be suitable for maximum working pressure of 16bar and
manufactured to comply BSEN 14384:2005 standard.
2. The design of obturator (base valve) in hydrant is made in such a way that it can
be replaced at site.
3. The material of base valve shall be High Tensile Brass.
4. The drain system shall start automatically when hydrant is closed.
5. Fire hydrants shall be three-way in design, having one pumper connection 1X4
Male/Female BSRT to BS 336 and 2X2-1/2 St. thro landing valve with female
Inst. Outlet to BS 336 or 2 x 2-1/2 adaptor having female Inst. Outlet to BS 336.
6. The operating nut shall be a one piece design, manufactured of Bronze. It shall
be pentagon in shape.
7. An arrow shall be cast on the bonnet flange to indicate the specified opening
direction.
8. Hydrants shall be a either Breakable or Non-breakable models.
9. All ferrous part shall be epoxy coated, the lower barrel shall be bitumen coated.
10. Hydrants shall be internally coated by Epoxy to avoid corrosion.
11. Hydrants shall be compatible against resistance to disinfection products.
12. A bury line shall be marked on the lower barrel below the break flange to indicate
proper installation depth.
13. Hydrant Inlet shall flanged and the size shall be either 4 or 6
8.3 Under Ground Fire Hydrant
Under ground fire hydrant valves shall be of screw down type and are suitable for a
maximum working pressure of 16 bar. The Inlet shall be flange type and the Outlet of
this hydrant shall be round threaded 2 size to BS 336 Standard.
Under ground fire hydrants are manufactured to comply BS 750:2006 & EN14339:2005
and shall be BSI KITE Mark Approved.
MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
Body material shall be made of Grey cast iron or Ductile Iron as per BS standard
Material of spindle shall be made of Stainless steel to BS EN 10088-1
Material for the screwed outlet is made of High tensile brass to BS 12163
Spindle sealing (two seals) is of the toroidal sealing ring (O ring) type
Design of the spindle cap in accordance with BS 5163
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
A Wiper ring is positioned above the spindle sealing to prevent the ingress of
foreign matter.
DESIGN FEATURES
The Hydrant shall be compactable against resistance to disinfection products.
RESISTANCE TO OPERATING LOADS

Maximum operating torque value (MOT) 105 N-m
Minimum strength torque value (mST) 210 N-m
CORROSION PROTECTION
All Ferrous components liable to corrosion shall be shot blasted (inside & outside)
to SA 2-1/2 standard
Each hydrant should be painted from inside a 3 Coat epoxy paint system including
primer, intermediate & Top coat
DRAINING
Hydrant draining system is by self operating frost valve
Volume of retained water 80ml
Time of draining~3 min. 20 Sec.
HYDRAULIC CHARACTERISTICS
Flow co-efficient Kv equal 120 m3/hr @ 1.7 bar
9. SPRINKLER SYSTEM
9.1 General
The Police Academy Complex shall be protected mainly by an automatic sprinkler

system except for some buildings as shown on the tender drawings.
The contract includes for the design, supply, and installation, commissioning and testing
of a complete Wet Automatic Sprinkler System and Pre-Action Sprinkler System as
shown on the drawings.
Automatic Wet Sprinkler System is the simplest and most common type of fire sprinkler
system which employs automatic and closed-type sprinklers heads, which are
connected to a water-filled piping system. The sprinklers contain either a heat-
responsive glass bulb element that prohibits water from discharging from the sprinklers
orifice. The water is contained until such time as the heat from the fire activates the
element, causing its release, allowing the water to discharge over the fire to control and
to extinguish.
Automatic Double Interlock Pre-action System is a system which employs automatic and
closed-type sprinkler heads connected to a piping system that contains pressurized air,
with a supplemental system of detection serving the same area as the sprinklers.
These systems are typically used in applications where maximum protection against
inadvertent flooding of water into the hazard is required . The Preaction System shall be
of the Double Interlock Release type. Double Interlock method of release of the deluge
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
valve priming water pressure shall be by activation of both the detection system and loss
of air pressure in the piping system. The preaction system riser shall be of a listed and
approved assembly. The system riser shall be equipped with a rubber seated check
valve downstream of the deluge valve and prior to the supervisory air connection. The
double interlock pre-action system design and installation shall comply the requirements
of NFPA-13 & QCDD standards.
The sprinkler system shall comply in every respect with the Rules for Automatic
Sprinkler Installation issued by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA-13) or
other approved Ruling Organizations. The system shall also comply with the
requirements of the local Fire Authority, together with any particular requirements of
Qatar Civil Defense Department and Qatar Construction Standards. The design and
installation shall be carried out by a specialist sub-contractor approved by the Civil
Defense Department and shall employ the computer method of predicting flow rates and
sizing pipe work together with all hydraulic calculations. The layout shown on the
drawings is indicative only.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
9.2 Hazard Classification
The sprinkler system shall be designed as per NFPA-13 Installation of Sprinkler System
requirements. Spacing of sprinklers shall suit the hazard of the occupancy as shown in
the drawing.
The Hazard Classifications shall be as follows:
Light Hazard for all office areas, accomodations, mess hall, corridors,s, toilet etc.
Ordinary Hazard for all mechanical service rooms, plant rooms, pantry, Horse stable,
etc.
Storage Hazard Commodity Classifications:
Armory Storage Class I to Class IV Commodities
9.3 Design Details
The Specialized Sub-Contractor is required to complete the hydraulic calculation to

determine the pipe size beyond the hazard classification back to Alarm Check Valve and
fire pump set.
DESIGN CRITERIA FOR SPRINKLER SYSTEM

1. WET SPRINKLER SYSTEM (LIGHT HAZARD)
SYSTEM AUTOMATIC WET SPRINKLER SYSTEM

DESIGN STANDARD NFPA 13 : 2010
DESIGN DENSITY 4.1 LPM/M
DESIGN AREA 139 M
MAXIMUM SPRINKLER COVERAGE 21.0 M
100 GPM (TOTAL COMBINED INSIDE
HOSE ALLOWANCE
+OUTSIDE)
WATER SUPPLY DURATION 30 MINUTES
PENDENT TYPE/UPRIGHT, QUICK
TYPE OF SPRINKLER RESPONSE, STANDARD COVERAGE,
1/2 NPT
K-FACTOR 5.6 GPM/PSI ^1/2
AREA OF APPLICATION:
OFFICES, BEDROOMS, MESS HALLS, MOSQUE,
LOBBIES, HALLWAYS, PRAYING ROOMS, GYM, TOILETS,
MAJLIS, ETC.
2. WET SPRINKLER SYSTEM (ORDINARY HAZARD GROUP 1)

DESIGN AREA 139 M
HOSE ALLOWANCE
+OUTSIDE)
TYPE OF SPRINKLER PENDENT TYPE/UPRIGHT, QUICK
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
RESPONSE, STANDARD COVERAGE,

1/2 NPT
AREA OF APPLICATION:
STORAGE, MECHANICAL ROOMS, WORKSHOP, SHOPS, KITCHEN,ETC.
3. WET SPRINKLER SYSTEM (EXTRA HAZARD GROUP 1)

DESIGN AREA 232 M
HOSE ALLOWANCE
+OUTSIDE)
PENDENT TYPE/UPRIGHT, QUICK
TYPE OF SPRINKLER RESPONSE, STANDARD COVERAGE,
1/2 NPT
9.4 Sprinkler System Products
The installation shall be complete with all necessary valves, pressure gauges, alarms,
proving equipment, etc., as required by NFPA 13, QCDD & QCS Standards.
All zone or sectional valves shall be provided with monitor switches to indicate closure.
Water flow switches shall be installed in the zone check valve asembly to sense the flow
of water in the corresponding zone. The tamper switches & flow switches shall be inter-
connected with the fire alarm system panel.
9.4.1 Sprinkler Heads
1. General
The sprinkler heads shall be of the spray pattern installed in an upright position or
pendant position as may be required. Sprinkler in false ceilings shall be concealed to
ceiling and to architects approval.
The design Criteria for all sprinklers such as K-factor, type and operating temperature
shall be submitted for approval.
A set of spare sprinkler heads shall be provided and located in a cabinet in the fire pump
room together with sprinkler spanners for use in removing and installation of the heads
as recommended in NFPA-13 and local authority requirements.
The sprinklers and lines shall not be spaced too close together in order to prevent an
operating sprinkler from wetting and hereby delaying operation of adjacent sprinklers.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
In locations where sprinkler heads are liable to be operated or damaged by accidental

blows, stout metal guards should protect them; care being taken to ensure that the
normal operation of the sprinkler head in the event of fire is not thereby impeded.
The contractor shall supply set of spare sprinkler heads in each type / temperature
range and located in a cabinet in the fire pump room together with sprinkler spanners for
use in removing and installation of the heads as recommended in NFPA-13 and local
authority requirements.
Finish of sprinklers shall be to the approval of the architect.
All sprinklers shall be of UL listed / FM Approved / LPCB approved type.
2. Concealed Sprinkler
Silhouette sprinklers consisting of a unique 2 piece base and cover assembly with a
pendant sprinkler. The base element shall be suitable for accommodating the pendant
sprinkler and shall also orient the sprinkler in the ceiling opening. The silhouette cover
shall snap onto the sprinkler deflector by a heat sensitive memory, which releases
during a fire. The finish of cover plate shall be decided upon the approval of the
Architect.
The sprinkler head shall have 1/2 NPT or BSPT inlet, K- Factor K-80, Standard
coverage, Quick response type, Quartzoid Bulb having 68 C Operating temperature
range, in Brass finish as approved by the architects.
3. Upright Sprinkler Heads

Upright sprinkler heads shall be installed in stores and plant rooms and other areas
without false ceiling and in ceiling voids in upright position. The sprinkler head shall have
1/2 NPT or BSPT inlet, K- Factor K-80, Standard coverage, Standard /standard
response type, Quartzoid Buld having 79 C & 68 C Operating temperature range, in
Brass / chrome finish as approved by the architects. All sprinklers shall be of UL listed /
FM Approved / LPCB approved type.
4. Institutional Sprinkler Heads

Institutional sprinkler heads shall be of concealed pendent or sidewall and tamper
resistant type which are installed in jail / prison and educational buildings. The
institutional sprinkler heads shall have 1/2 NPT or BSPT inlet, K- Factor K-80, Standard
or extended coverage, Quick response type, link type having 74 C Operating
temperature range with all operating parts are flush. The escutcheon plates shall be
either painted or chrome plated finish as approved by the architects. All sprinklers shall
be of UL listed type.
5. Sprinkler Head Guards

Upright sprinkler heads shall be fitted with wire guards. The guards shall be constructed
from metal with PVC jacketing or epoxy anti-corrosion coating. Wire guard shall be of a
pattern approved by the Fire Insurers.
9.4.2 Sprinkler Alarm Control Valves

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
ALARM CHECK VALVES

Alarm valves shall be complete with Water Motor Alarm Gong, all required auxiliary
valves and drains and with pressure switch for wiring into the building electric alarm
system.
Alarm check valves shall be iron body bronze trim for 175 psig(12bar) working pressure
complete with electric pressure switches, test and alarm bell connections.
Pressure gauges and all other ancillaries.
Alarm Check Valves shall be UL 753 listed conforming to NFPA-13. Retarding device of
approved design to obviate false alarms due to mains pressure variations where
necessary or where indicated.
Alarm Check Valves shall be of a type approved by UL/FM and conform to NFPA-13.
Retarding device of approved design to obviate false alarms due to mains pressure
variations where necessary or where indicated.
WATER MOTOR ALARMS

The sprinkler system shall be fitted with an approved water motor alarm, which shall be
located at a distance not exceeding 21m from the alarm valve, and at a height not to
exceed 6m above the alarm valve.
The pipe work and fittings used shall be galvanized and to the sizes determined by the
NFPA-13. The pipe work shall be arranged to drain through a fitting having an orifice not
exceeding 3 mm in diameter. The orifice plate may form an integral part of the fitting but
shall be manufactured from a non-ferrous material to prevent the hole from becoming
blocked by corrosion or foreign matter.
A 15 mm test valve shall be installed on the installation side of each alarm valve.
ELECTRIC ALARM PRESSURE SWITCHES

The electric alarm pressure swithch should be UL 753 Listed. It shall be installed in the
system as per NFPA 13 and they shall be mounted on a vertical branch pipe at least
300 mm long.
The pressure switch shall be sufficiently sensitive to operate when only one sprinkler is
discharging. The pressure switch shall be provided with volt free contracts to facilitate
monitoring by a Building Management System, and wired to the main fire alarm panel.
PRESSURE GAUGES
Pressure gauges shall be fitted to meet the requirements of the LPCB. Pressure
gauges shall conform to BS 1780 or equivalent International Standards. The maximum
reading of the scale shall be 150% of the maximum system pressure and each scale
shall have divisions not exceeding 0.2bar.
9.4.3 Auto Zone Check Assembly

Auto zone check assembly shall be of UL, FM, LPCB, Vds Approved and it is to be
provided for each sprinkler system zone as shown in the drawings, and shall
comprise:
Butterfly valve, fitted with an indicator showing OPEN and CLOSE positions, and
complete with padlocked securing straps. The valve shall be mounted on the

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
incoming side of the flow switch. Butterfly valve shall have UL 1091 .It shall be fitted
with factory installed UL/Fm apporved tamper switch
Dial pressure gauges suitable for the water pressures shall be fitted so arranged that
it can be easily removed for testing and checking without shutting down the water
supply.
Sprinkler system zone drain connections shall be provided in accordance with
NFPA-13
Automatic zone check assembly to support monitoring, controlling, inspection,

testing & maintenance of each zone in sprinkler system consists of
1. Re-circulating Pump.
2. Two sets of valve, elbows and pipes to facilitate the circulation of the water
around water flow monitoring switch.
3. Vane-type water flow monitoring switch (WFMS).
4. Electrical box enabling control of motor and monitor of WFMS, local / remote as
required.
When actuated they shall perform the following:

Test mode actuation: When activated in test mode, the pump shall circulate the water,
within the sprinkler riser, around WFMS to stimulate the flow of one sprinkler head in
operation. The electrical box shall control and monitor, motor and WFMS respectively,
as required.
Fire mode actuation: When fire occurs, the sprinkler burst and water starts flowing to
control / extinguish the fire. This leads to flow equal to or more than one sprinkler
through the WFMS actuating it. The fire alarm panel / flow monitoring panel performs
monitors / controls required in the fire condition when the WFMS actuation signal reach
them.
AZCV shall have following features in the system:
1. Insure the testing of WFMS as per the requirements of BS5306 Part-2 & NFPA
25 without activating the fire pump and opening of test/drain valve.
2. Installed in such a way that the test shall be conducted from a central control
room, through single push button and the individual WFMS status can be read
from main fire alarm panel or separate flow monitoring panel.
3. Have the future (contacts and relays) facilitating the connection to BMS, for
automatic actuation, once in 3 months which records the status as required.
9.4.4 Pre-Action Valve Assembly

The pre-action valve assembly shall be a pre-assembled fire protection valve package
enclosed within a free- standing cabinet designed to occupy minimal floor space and to
provide an aesthetically pleasing enclosure for a fire protection valve riser. The entire
package shall be pre-wired and the water inlet and outlets to the valve riser are grooved

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
to provide minimal installa tion time. The valve package includes the system (manual)
shut-off control valve, automatic water control valve, and waterflow /supervisory
switches. A built-in air compressor with associated controls provides an automatic air
supply for use as either supervision or automatic water control valve actuation.
Pre-action control panel shall be an Integral part of the cabinet with back-up batteries for
providing electrical alarm, supervi sory, and trouble functions. All switches within the
cabinet shall be pre-wired to the control panel, making the electrical connections for
power, detection circuits, and alarms the only remaining connections to complete the
system.
In addition to the control panel being integral to the cabinet, windows shall be provided
in the door for viewing the releasing panel functions and essential system pressure
gauges. A lock for the control panel access door shall be standard, and a lock for the
cabinet door is optional.
Features shall include as follows:
Aesthetically pleasing appearance

Professionally assembled
Internally wired
Custom manufactured
All gauges and panel display are externally visible
Removable side panels for ease of maintenance
Furniture grade rollers (4) are standard at bottom of cabinet
9.4.5 Riser Check Valve

Pre-action system riser check valves shall be UL Listed for use on fire protection
systems. The system riser check valves shall be manufactured with supply side and
system side gauge connections and a main drain outlet in conformance with N.F.P.A.
13, Standard for Installation of Sprinkler Systems. The check valves shall be
constructed of a ductile iron body with a brass seat and a rubber faced clapper
assembly hinged to a removable access cover. The check valves shall be equipped
with a removable access cover for periodic inspection as required in N.F.P.A. 25,
Standard for Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire Protection
Systems.
9.4.6 Supervisory Air Pressure Switch

A supervisory air pressure shall be maintained on all preaction systems with 20
sprinklers or more on the system piping. A low air pressure alarm will activate by way of
a pressure supervisory alarm pressure switch. The low air pressure alarm switch shall
be compatible with system devices. The low air pressure alarm switch enclosure shall
be UL Listed and Factory Mutual Approved for the application in which it is used. The
low air pressure alarm switch shall have the ability to be wired for Class A or Class B
service.
9.4.7 Alarm Pressure Switch

Water flow will activate an alarm by way of an alarm pressure switch. The alarm
pressure switch shall be compatible with the system devices. The alarm pressure
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
enclosure shall be UL Listed and Factory Mutual Approved. The alarm pressure switch
shall have the ability to be wired for Class A or Class B service.
9.4.8 Pre-Action Valve Release Control Panel

The control panel shall be a SHP (Single Hazard Panel) Control Panel.
The SHP Control System, and its components, shall be UL listed and FM approved for
releasing service and be suitable for clean Agent release service.
The SHP Control System shall perform all functions necessary to operate the system
detection, actuation and auxiliary functions, as outlined.
The SHP Control System shall be capable of providing 7AH or 18AH battery standby
power supplies.
The SHP Control System shall be microprocessor based with hardware and software
integration designed to guarantee reliability.
The SHP Control System shall support Cross Zoned, Sequential, Single Detector
Release and Manual Release detection/actuation methods.
The SHP Control System shall provide the following capabilities and functions:
1. Three (3) Class B (Style Y) indicating appliance circuits rated for 2.0 amps @ 24
VDC.
2. Four (4) Class B (Style A) initiating circuits
3. Optional Class A (Style D) module for initiating circuits
4. Eight (8) Status LEDs plus alpha-numeric display for troubleshooting: AC normal;
alarm; pre-discharge; release; supervisory; trouble; alarms silenced and system
abort.
5. Programmable pre-discharge and discharge timers
6. Resettable and continuous auxiliary output power
7. Five (5) optional Abort types
8. Intelligent Transistor protection to prevent noise spikes and microprocessor
failure from inadvertently activating release outputs
9. A dedicated Disarm switch for release outputs
10. Dedicated alarm and trouble contacts programmable for alarm, trouble, pre-
discharge, discharge, abort, supervisory or waterflow functions, depending on
panel configuration.
11.
board. Installation of the optional SRM4 Relay Module (P/N 10-2176) will
provide four (4) additional 5 amp relays.
12. Multiple input power source - 120 VAC or 208/220 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
13. 2.6 amp @ 24 VDC power supply to operate high current draw horns and
strobes. Capable of allowing expansion to 8 amp external power supply for a
total of 10.6 amps of available power.
14. Shall be available in either Red or Gray finish.
9.4.9 Air Compressor

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
An air supply capable of restoring system pressure within 30 minutes shall be provided
as shown on the drawings.
A riser mounted or A tank mounted air compressor with an air maintenance device
between the air compressor and the air supply inlet on the system riser.
9.4.10 Air Maintenance Device

Air supplies provided for sprinkler systems shall be equipped with an automatic air
pressure maintenance device. The air maintenance device shall be equipped with a "
air supply bypass with a field adjustable air pressure regulator with a built in ball check
valve to eliminate air loss when system is in service. The air maintenance device shall
have a factory setting of 40 PSI.
9.4.11 Isolation Valves
Isolating valves shall be UL 262 Listed and shall be fitted to the installation in order to
shut the valve, the spindle must turn clockwise. The hand wheels of all stop valves shall
be clearly marked to indicate which direction the wheel is to be turned to close the valve.
An indication shall also be provided which shows whether the valve is open or shut.
Each main stop valves shall be installed with a tamper / supervisory switch and
interconnected to the building fire alarm system or secured open by a padlock or riveted
strap.
9.4.12 Fire Breeching Inlet

The unit shall be of BSI kitemark/LPCB approved and or UL Listed/FM approved.
The inlet breeching piece shall be of horizontal pattern having a 150 mm flanged outlet
and four 65 mm instantaneous male inlets complete with blank caps and chains. A non-
return (check) valve shall protect the inlet. The coupling shall comply with BS 336. The
inlet connections shall be of suitable type of local fire brigade department.
The breaching piece shall be equipped with a 25 mm drain valve to drain the riser.
All parts including valve body, chain and caps shall be brass / gunmetal if it is UL Listed
and valves body shall be made of DI body with Brass Inlet Valves polished chrome
plated if it is BSI kitemark/LPCB approved. The product should have at least been
9.4.13 Fire Breeching Inlet Cabinet

The unit shall be BSI kitemark/LPCB approved. The product should have at least been
Laboratories & Accredited Certification Bodies as LPCB approval/BSI KITE mark
approval.
The inlet breeching unit shall be housed in an steel flush box painted by polyster powder
coated, 1 hour fire rated, UL listed cabinet with wired glass glazed front panel as per BS
5041-5 standard and:
a. Conspicuously indicated by the words: Dry Riser Inlet, Sprinkler Inlet, Wet Riser
Inlet in block letters on the inner face of the glass, depending on the project
type.
b. Fastened only by means of a spring lock, which can also be operated from the
inside without the aid of a key after the glass has been broken.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
c. Made large enough for hose to be connected to inlets even if the door cannot be
opened and the only means of access is by breaking the glass.
9.5 Indicator Plates
Location plates shall also be fixed on the outside of the Tank Room walls adjacent to the
sprinkler chamber. The location plate shall bear the following words in raised letters:
SPRINKLER
STOP VALVE INSIDE
The letters shall be a minimum height of 35 mm.

The location plate shall be of cast iron constructed with raised figures and letters. The
figures and letters shall be painted white on a flame red background. The alarm valve
shall be suitably identified.
9.6 Valve Labels & Charts
The sub-contractor shall label each valve. The number shall relate to a framed glass
covered valve chart to be supplied and installed in each sprinkler chamber / fire pump
house, as required by the engineer in charge. The charts shall indicate the function of
the valves and shall be to the civil defense and engineers approval. No two valves on
the system shall bear the same number.
9.7 Drain Lines
All drain lines from test valves, drain down points etc., shall discharge over suitable and
proper drain vent. Each drain vent shall be connected to a 50 mm galvanized steel drain
line, which shall discharge over a suitable gully.
All drain-vent, pipe fittings, and support clips used for the drain lines shall be galvanized.
9.8 Execution
The Protection Area of Coverage per sprinkler shall be determined as the multiplication
of the distance between sprinklers upstream and downstream, and the perpendicular
distance between a sprinkler and another on the adjacent branch line.
Installation for hydraulically calculated system with concealed pendent and upright
sprinklers shall be, according to NFPA 13 latest edition and local authority requirements.
Complete Sprinkler system shall be installed in accordance with NFPA-13 and authority
having jurisdiction requirements and as shown on the drawing.
The Fire protection contractor shall be responsible to co-ordinate his work with all other
trades and shall be completely familiar with and shall make allowance for conditions
which affect the fire protection installation.
The Zone control valve assembly locations and access panels shall be mounted
securely and provided with proper sign boards.
Provide a pressure guage with a isolation cock with inspectors test plug on top of the
each sprinkler pipe risers.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
9.9 Cleaning and Testing
Pipes and all items of equipment shall be delivered, stored and maintained in closed
storage with their open ends effectively plugged, capped or sealed. All fittings, valves
and sundry items shall be stored in clean bins or bagged and stowed in suitable racks.
All such stored items shall be maintained under weatherproofed cover to be supplied by
the contractor until they are ready for incorporation in the works. Particular care shall be
taken to ensure that electrical equipment and components are kept clean and dry.
Engineer.
department.
shall be included.
to the client.
of this section.
client. All corrective work shall commence immediately after damage occurs.
10. FIRE WATER PUMPSETS
10.1 General
The firewater shall be feed by:

1 Electric Main Fire pump
1 Diesel Stand By Fire pump
1 jockey pump.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
The pump capacity shall be in accrodance with the fire water demand based on worst
case fire scenario and however the capacity of each fire pump shall not exceed as
mentioned below:
Each system shall be design to insure the maximum pumping capacity even if 1 pump
fails. Where higher flow rate is required, multiple fire pumps shall be installaed in parallel
to cater the required fire water demand during emergency.
The total supplying of all the necessary equipment for the firewater production (including
pumps, engines driven, controllers, instrumentation, piping, valves, relief valves, ) is
included in the Contractors scope of work.
The supplying and installation of the day fuel tank of the engines is included in the
Contractors scope
The fuel tank (and all the fuel installation) shall be in accordance with NFPA standards.
The air supply system of the diesel engines drive (automatic opening, venting panels, ..)
is included in the Contractors scope.
The fire pumps, motor, engine and electric pump controllers and diesel pump controllers
shall be UL listed or FM approved, built in the country where the agreement is made.
Unit responsibility must be submitted from the manufacturer.
The fire pumps and engine driven shall be in accordance with NPFA 20 (curves, starting,
protection, ).
The problem of surge (hammer effect) shall be taken into account in the design. A surge
analysis shall be conducted and specific surge pressure control system shall be
installed.
Over-pressure system shall also be installed.
The contractor shall provide fully certified hydraulic calculations for exact sizing of the
pumps.
The pumps shall be furnished with a full set of bench test certificates proving
acceptability for the design points of this installation.
10.2 Fire Pump Set Products
10.2.1 Fire Pumps

Fire pumps shall be UL or ULC listed and FM approved and manufactured by an
approved manufacturer. Each pump shall have a capacity as shown in pump schedule,
adjusted as necessary to suit the hydraulic calculations.
The pumping unit shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., and shall be fully
approved by the Associated Factory Mutual Fire Insurance Companies. The pumping
unit shall meet all requirements of the National Fire Protection Association Pamphlet No.
20.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
The pumps shall also deliver not less than 150% of rated capacity at a pressure of not
less than 65% of rated pressure. The shutoff pressure shall not exceed 140% of the
rated pressure at rated capacity.
10.2.2 Fire Pumps Type:

Each fire pump shall be of horizontal split case centrifugal single stage or multistage
construction, specifically labeled for fire service and capable of proving the required flow
and pressure of the entire development. The suction supply for the fire pump shall be
from a storage tank at a maximum pressure of 20 kPa and a minimum pressure of 0
kPa. The pump casing shall be cast iron and rated to withstand twice the system working
pressure.
10.2.3 Pump Construction:

The pump construction shall be cast iron casing, Bronzr impeller, Stainless Steel shaft
and gland packing.
Note: The pump shall also deliver not less than 150 % of the rated capacity at a
pressure of not less than 65 % of the rated pressure. The shut off pressure shall not
exceed 140 % of the rated pressure at rated capacity.
10.2.4 Pump Discharge & Head

The pump discharge & head shown on the drawing schedule is an estimate. The fire
protection contractor shall select a pump discharge and head to satisfy the fire protection
system requirements resulting from the system hydraulic calculations based on worst
case fire scenario including handline hose stream water demand as recommended in
NFPA codes & standards.
10.2.5 Fire Pump Accessories:

The Fire Pumps shall include the following accessories, as required by NFPA standards:
1. Flow Metering Device, shall be of the Venturi type. Pilot and annubar devices will not
be acceptable- One metering device shall be provided for each pump. or as shown
on the drawings. Pipe water back to the storage tank.
2. Discharge tee.
3. Necessary isolating valves with supervisory switches.
4. Air release valve and fittings.
5. Discharge pressure gauge.
6. Main relief valve, pilot operated, enclosed relief valve overflow cone and discharge
tee with elbow (diesel drive only).
7. Main relief valve with discharge pipes to water tank.
8. Pump casing relief valve.
10.2.6 Electric Motor Drive

On installations where the Fire Pump is to be operated electrically, the electric motor
shad be a horizontal, open drip-proof type, wound for 380 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz (cycle)
current The motor shall be of such capacity that 115% of the full-load ampere rating shall
not be exceeded at any condition of the pump load for UL Listed fire pump.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
With an ambient temperature not exceeding 50 deg. C, the motor shall be designed for a
temperature rise not exceeding 60 deg. C when carrying fully rated-load continuously,
and shall be capable of operating continuously with an overload of 15% without stress or
excessive rise in temperature. The locked rotor current shall not exceed the values
specified in NFPA Pamphlet No. 20.
Bearings shall be anti-friction ball or roller type.
10.2.7 Control Equipment for Electric Motor Drive

The Fire Pump motor control shall be UL listed and FM Approved. It shall be completely
assembled, wired and tested by the control manufacturer before shipment from factory,
and shall be labeled 'Fire Pump Controller". The controller shall be located as practical
and within the sight of the motor.
The controller shall be so located or protected that it will not be injured by water
escaping from the pump or connection. The controller shall be of the combined manual
and automatic star & delta type. and shall be complete with:
1. Disconnect switch - externally operable, quick-break type.
2. Circuit breaker - time delay type with trips in all phases set for 300% of the motor full
load current-
3. Motor starter, capable of being energized automatically through the pressure switch
or manually by means of an externally operable handle. Motor starter shall be of the
autotransformer type.
4. Pressure switch, of adjustable type.
5. Running period timer - set to keep motor in operation, when started automatically, for
a minimum period of one minute for each 10 HP motor rating, but not to exceed 7
minutes.
6. Pilot lamp - to indicate circuit breaker closed and power available.
7. Ammeter test link and voltmeter test studs.
8. Alarm relay - to energize an audible or visible alarm through an independent source
of power to indicate circuit breaker open or power failure.
9. Manual selection station - a two position station shall be provided on the enclosure
marked "Automatic" and Non-automatic".
10. Means shall be provided on the Controller to operate an alarm signal continuously
while the pump is running.
11. Provisions for power supply at 220 V for diesel pump battery chargers.
12. Control equipment shall meet all requirements of NFPA20 & NFPA72.
10.2.8 Diesel Engine Drive

Diesel engine shall be UL listed and FM approved for fire protection service.
The engine shall be of the self contained open type, mounted on a suitable base with the
following minimum plus any others that may be necessary by NFPA-20 and local CD
requirements.
1. Dual battery set sized to NFPA -20 requirements with electrolyte shipped in separate
containers, rack and cables.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
2. Dual battery charger of proper type for batteries used ( included in UL Listed / FM
Approved controller ). Power to battery charger shall be supplied from electric pump
control panel. Wiring from control panel to battery chargers shall be by the
contractor.
3. Electric starter with suitable generator and voltage regulator.
4. Engine water pump.
5. Heat exchanger cooling system.
6. Water cooled or ceramic blanketed exhaust manifold.
7. Lubricating oil pump and filter.
8. Fuel injection system.
9. Air cleaner.
10. Proper instrument panel, complete with engine run warning light, water temperature
gauge, oil pressure gauge, voltmeter, totalizing type tachometer and hour meter.
11. Residential Grade Muffler.
12. Cooling water line for the engine heat exchanger assembly.
13. Flexible exhaust connectors.
All engine wiring for automatic operation shall terminate in a proper junction box to
permit connection to control panel.
10.2.9 Fuel System
A suitable fuel system for the diesel engine shall be furnished. It must be in accordance
with NFPA Pamphlet No.20 and shall include above surface day storage tank, flexible
hose connectors, combination vent, flesh arrestor and fill cap.
10.2.10 Silencer ( Muffler )
The silencers shall be Silex series JA. The silencer shall be for turbo-charged engines,
sized and selected to accommodate the allowable pressure drop of the engine.
The silencer shall provide an average attenuation of 20-25 dB(a).
The silencer shall be designed by HEAVY DUTY APPLICATIONS, with noise
attenuation across the entire audible range of the frequency spectrum 63 through 8000
Hz. The silencer shall consist of a series of chambers connected by non-resonant
tubes. The entire silencer shall be manufactured from plate steel and be of a completely
welded design. The heavy plate ensure longer silencer life and better resistance to
damage. The heavy plate shall prevent shell radiated noise. There shall be no spot
welds or press fits used.
Silencer inlet and discharge shall be flanged, manufactured from minimum 10mm thick
plate and drilled to ANSI 70 kg. Silencers shall be either and in/end out and side in/end
out configurations to suit installation.
Provide 12mm drain connections. Prior to shipping, the silencers shall be thoroughly
cleaned and coated in a high temperature 650C aluminum paint.
10.2.11 Diesel Engine Drive Controller

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
Automatic Diesel Drive Engine Control Panel : The automatic engine control panel shall
be UL/FM approved for fire pump service and meet the requirements of NFPA20. The
panel shall be of the floor mounted type, and enclosed in a moisture and dust tight
housing. A combination manual and automatic type controller with Manual-Off-
Automatic selector shall be provided and a 240 volt single phase power failure relay or
a pressure switch, which will ( when the system pressure drops ) activate all electric
circuits to automatically start the engine.
Should the engine fail to start after the required cranking cycles, the controller shall
disconnect the starting circuit and activate an alarm system using lights and buzzer or
bell. Low oil pressure and high jacket-water temperature shall also be indicated by a
suitable alarm system. The engine shall not shut down if either of these conditions
occurs during an operating cycle.
The engine shall be started automatically by the Controller at least once a week,
adjustable, and operate a minimum of 30 minutes ( adjustable ). An appropriate timing
arrangement shall determine the day and hour of this test.
Pressure recorder ( 7 day drive ) shall be provided within the control panel.
Fire Pump Controller shall be a diesel engine type, Controller approved and listed by the
Underwriters Laboratories for fire pump service, carry the labels of both UL/FM and meet
the requirements of the NFPA20.
The controller shall incorporate the following :
1. Each charger shall be completely independent of the other charger and equipped
with its own individual power transformer, rated for a maximum continuous
charge current of 10A. The charger shall be of solid state electronic design, with
semi-conductor type rectifier, and include the following supervisory and safety
features :
i. Current limiting in every charging mode

ii. Over current shut-off
iii. Automatic selection of bulk or charge by sensing battery voltage
iv. Trickle charge limited to less than 500MA
v. Reverse voltage shut-off
vi. Dead cell detection
vii. Over and under voltage alarm
In case of battery failure, the charger shall initiate an alarm and provide a signal to
prevent the use of the defective battery during the start attempt cycle.
1. Relays : All relays shall be equipped with manual test buttons, status ON
OFF indicators, be of the plug in type and shall meet all voltage and current
requirements.
2. Remote Alarm Circuit : A total of five ( 5 ) standard alarm contacts, rated at 10 A,
125 V shall be provided and wired to the field terminal block, to indicate the
following engine conditions :
i. SPDT contact : Engine Running

ii. 1 N/O contact : Contact shall close when main switch in Auto-position
iii. 1 N/O contact : Contract shall close when main switch is in OFF or Manual
position.
iv. SPDT contact : Engine trouble. This shall be a common alarm contact indicating
the following conditions. Engine overspeed, engine fail to start, low oil pressure,
high coolant temperature.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
3. Description of Operation : A four positions main switch shall provide selection of

three starting method and one OFF position.
i. OFF position shall shut down engine and alarms under any condition.
ii. AUTO position : a water pressure switch mounted inside the controller shall
provide the engine start on water pressure drop. The automatic starting circuit
shall alternate the two storage batteries after each start attempt. The attempt to
start cycle shall consist of six cranks and five rest periods of 15 seconds duration.
In the event of one battery failure, the starting cycle shall lock itself to the
remaining battery. In case of engine failure, the controller shall stop any further
cranking and energize the ENGINE FAIL TO START alarm. A manual stop
pushbutton shall enable engine shut down, but only after all starting causes have
returned to normal. The automatic Weekly Exercise cycle shall also be
operational in the auto-position. This cycle shall be programmed on the 7 day
time clock. A short opening of the water solenoid valve shall create a momentary
pressure drop and cause automatic engine start. At the end of the programmed
Exercise cycle, engine shall shut down automatically. A manual test switch
located on the time clock shall allow for manual test operation of the weekly
exercise cycle. The 7 day time clock shall hold its time on A/C power failure and
not require resetting.
iii. TEST Position : Engine shall start in the same manner as the above exercise
cycle start. Turning main switch to Auto or Off position shall shut down engine.
iv. MANUAL Position : Start pushbutton Battery 1 or Battery 2, shall override all
automatic starting circuits, and allow for direct manual engine start.
v. Safety Shut Down : Engine overspeed condition shall shut down engine without
time delay and lock out until manually reset.
vi. The controller shall provide the following additional safety features Engine shut
down in case of low oil pressure or high coolant temperature during exercise, test
or optional AC failure operation only.
10.2.12 Jockey Pump set

The Jockey pump capacity and pressure shall be as indicated in the pump schedule on
the drawings.
Pump shall be constructed as follows:

Type : Vertical multi-stage motor driven,
Rotation : Counter-clockwise, viewed down
Motor : TEFC
Motor bracket : Cast type, connecting motor to pump
Diffuser cases : Pressure containing, flow directing
Impellers : Stainless steel
Shaft, l : Stainless steel,
Pump discharge : Flanged type
Control : Definite purpose type, magnetic starter In NEMA II enclosure,
with reset button
Pump controller shall be factory pre-wired and tested. Pressure switch shall sense low
pressure in the fire pump system. Set cut-in pressure 5 PSI above main fire pump cut-in

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
pressure. Set cut-out pressure at system pressure. Provide minimum run timer to
operate the pump for a minimum of 3 minutes.
Across the fine start, H-O-A selector switch.
Control panel to contain a fusible 3-pole disconnect switch, magnetic motor contractor
and thermal overload relays with external reset Enclosure to be wall mounted with
hinged door.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
10.3 Fire Pump Set Unit Responsibility
(This Format should be typed on the approved Manufacturer Letter Head and Orignal
Copy to be submitted to Qatar Civil Defense Department)
UNIT RESPONSIBILITY CERTIFICATE

Project Name: _________________________________________________
Consultant: _________________________________________________
Pump Type: _______________ Capacity: ________ Pressure: __________
Manufacturer Ref. No. (for Fire Pump Set): _________________________
Subject: FIRE PUMP SET
With reference to the above project fire pump set, we would like to confirm the following:
1. Pump / Driver / and Controller provided for this project are listed and certified
individually:
CERTIFIED By CERTIFICATE No.
ITEM MODEL No.
(UL/FM/VDS/Others)
PUMP
Motor Driver
Engine Driver
Motor Controller
Engine Controller
1. The Pump / Driver / Controller supplied from (Manufacturer Name) as whole set
2. Testing for the entire pump set is performed by (Manufacturer Name) in (Country) in
accordance to NFPA 20.
Certified
Testing
Testing By Certificate ATTACHED
Testing Document
Item Company (UL/FM/V No. Testing
Date Controller
& Country DS/Others Document
No..
) with
Full Fire Certifying
Pump Set Body Seal
Assembly
1. Performance test reports for the tested pumps is enclosed.

2. We hereby confirm that the above information is true.
Name: ________________________
Date: ________________________
Company `Stamp:
10.4 Execution

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
1. The fire pumps shall be provided with a supervised isolating valve, flow meter and
throttling valve on the test piping. Test piping shall discharge water to the fire water tank
through a galvanized steel diffuser pipe.
2. Each pump, whether diesel or electric driven shall be complete with suction and
discharge pressure gauges, circulation relief valve, dosed relief cone, automatic air
release valve, drain valves coupling guard and its own control 'panel.
3. Batteries shall be furnished in a dry charge, condition with electrolyte liquid in a separate
container. Electrolyte shall be added and the battery given a conditioning charge at the
time that the engine is put into service. Batteries shall be located so as to be readily
accessible for servicing and at least 300 mm above floor level.
4. The electric motor driven unit shall have the pump. electric motor and control panel
mounted on a common base. The entire unit will be factory tested prior to shipping.
5. The automatic engine control panel and the electric motor driven unit control panel shall
be specifically designed for fire pump service. All wiring between pump, pump devices
and controller shall be factory wired and tested. Wiring between controller and the
building fire alarm system shall be by the fire alarm system contractor. Power wiring for
the electric fire pump controllers shall be by the electrical system contractor.
6. The control panels shall be securely mounted in an enclosure which will protect the
equipment against mechanical injury and fading drops of water. All switches required to
keep the controller in the "automatic" position shall be within the locked cabinet.
Emergency access to the switch shall be by breaking the glass panels.
7. A wiring diagram shall be provided and permanently attached to the inside of the each
enclosure showing exact wiring for the controller, including a legend of identifying
numbers of individual components. AH wiring terminals shall be plainly marked to
correspond with the wiring diagram furnished.
8. Wiring elements of the controllers shall be designed on a continuous-duty basis. All
wiring leading from the panel to the engine and to the batteries shall have adequate
carrying capacity. Such wiring shad be protected against mechanical injury by metal
conduit
9. Each operating component of the controllers shall be marked to plainly indicate an
identifying number referenced to the wiring diagram. The markings shall be located so
as to be visible after installation.
10. Complete instructions covering the operation of the controllers shall be provided and
conspicuously mounted on the controllers.
11. Prior to shipment, the electric pumps and control panels shall be thoroughly shop-tested
as a unit by the pump manufacturer. A characteristic curve showing the pump
performance based upon the results of the shop test shall be submitted to the
Consultant prior to shipment, and shall include the performance of the pump and engine
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
at the set-governor's speed. Absence of these test reports, indicating that the complete
unit has been tested in the factory by the driver, will be ample grounds for the rejection
of the equipment. The contractor shall include in his price the cost and expenses of
having one representative of the Owner from Qatar witness the complete factory test
prior to shipment
10.5 Controls
1. The electric fire pump shall be the lead fire pump. The other diesel fire pump shall be
backup fire pump and will only operate if the lead fire pump cannot maintain system
pressure incase of power supply fails for the duty fire pump.
2. The Jockey pump shall maintain the system pressure.
10.6 Field Acceptance Test
1. The field acceptance test results shall be as good as the manufacturer's certified shop
test characteristic curve for tha pump being tasted within the accuracy limits of the test
equipment.
2. OVERHEATING: The pump shall operate at peak load conditions without objectionable
heating of the bearings or of the prime mover. The operating pump speed shall be the
speed at which the pumping unit would be expected to operate during a fire.
3. The engine shall not show signs of overload or stress and its governor shall properly
regulate the speed.
10.6.1 CONTROLLER
1. The automatic controller shall be put through not less than ten automatic and ten manual
operations.
2. A running interval of at least five minutes at full speed shafts is allowed before repeating
the starting cycle.
3. Automatic operation of the controller shall start the pump from all the provided starting
features, such as pressure switches, valves, etc.
4. The pump shall be in operation not less than one hour (total time) during the foregoing
tests.
5. The pump, driver, and all controls and necessary attachments, specified herein, shall be
purchased under a unit contract Field wiring of remote panels, installation and wiring of
water level indicators and fuel piping and wiring from the main storage tank to the local
tank shall be provided by the Contractor. The pump manufacturer shall assume unit
responsibility and shall provide the services of a qualified Engineer to supervise the

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
installation and alignment of equipment Field tests shall be conducted in the field to
satisfy Local Authorities having Jurisdiction of satisfactory operation of pump driver and
controller. The pump manufacturer's engineer shall be at the job site, supervising the
test. The control manufacturer shall have their representative at the Job site to train
operators in the use of the controls.
6. Spare parts and tools necessary for two years operation, as recommended by the
manufacturer, shall be provided as a part of the contract for the engine. A list of these
spares shall be included in the offer.
7. Provide and install water relief valve and test discharge piping and all discharging water
back; to the fine water tank.
8. Provide and install all water cooling piping, valves, controls for the engine, silencer and
gear box cooling heat exchangers.
9. Contractor shall provide exact head calculations based on shop drawings before final
selection of pumps.
11. FIRE WATER TANKS (BY THE MAIN CIVIL CONTRACTOR)
11.1 General
In the meaning to be in accordance with NFPA 22 and for safety / maintenace reasons,
the firewater supply shall be stored in not less than two tanks. The capacity of both the
tanks shall be as shown on the drawings and in accordance with the NFPA and QCDD
requirements, however not less than 60 minutes duration of the Fire Pump capacity. ie
effective fire water reserve shall be sufficient enough to supply water for fire fighting
operations for the period of 60 minutes when the pump is operating at full load condition.
The construction of the tanks fire water tanks shall be included in the main Contractors
scope.
The instrumentation, regulation and the water feeding line is included in the Contractors
scope, including:
level control systems
level alarms (high & low)
On /off feeding valves.
The piercing and the installation of connection flanges inside the wall of water tank shall
be included in the Contractors scope.
11.2 Execution
1. Fire Water tanks shall be installed by the installers who are trained and approved by the
manufacturer.
2. Extruded rubber sealing strip to be used covering fun width of panel flange providing a
water tight seal.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
3. Commissioning and testing shall be earned out on completion of the installation and
within ten working days of assembly.
4. The testing of panels and sealant shall be as listed by Water Research Centre
conforming to Water Fittings Bylaws Scheme.
5. Fire Water tanks shall be thoroughly deaned and disinfected prior to bringing into
service.
11.3 Water Level Switches & Indicators
A water level indicator and level switches shall be provided in each compartment for
local & remote monitoring of water levels. An alarm facility shall be provided for
connection to the fire pump control panel to indicate low water level and to provide a
signal to fire alarm system for monitoring purpose.
12. INSTALLATION MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
12.1 Piping
12.1.1 General
Pipes and fittings shall be in conformance with the following specifications unless
specified otherwise by the Qatar Civil Defence, QCS and Qatar Electricity and Water
Authority Department. Pipes and Fitting shall be UL listed and/or FM approved and
QCDD approved for the use on fire fighting system.
12.1.2 Piping below Grade

The Pipes and fittings laid below grade shall be of HDPE (High Density Poly Ethylene)
and should be manufactured in the same plant approved by the Factory Mutual. The
manufacturer should have a certified ISO 9001:2008 QMS.
High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipes and fittings should be manufactured in
compliance to the latest issue of AWWA C906 Polyethylene (PE) pressure pipe and
fittings, 4 In. (100mm) Through 63 In.(1600mm) for water Distribution & Transmission.
High density Polyethylene Pipes and fittings (HDPE) PE100 Manufactured for under
ground fire Protection lines, FM approved and listed , SDR 9, Class 200, confirm to
AWWA C 906 and NFPA 24.
Pipes and fittings to be from one manufacturer to meet above standards.
Welding to be butt fusion only, suitable for pipe pressure ratings and each joint should
have separate report showing full details on joint and welding process and result.
Pipes shall be made of PE100; processed according to the quality specifications &
dimensions according to applicable standards; Temperature application range -40C to
60C; colour - black . HDPE pipes and fittings should be suitable for butt fusion welding
techniques.
HDPE Raw material used for manufacturing of pipes and fittings shall be approved by
PE100+ Association. The compound used in the process shall comply with the
specifications in AWWA C-906 & ASTM D3350. Pipes should be produced with 100%
Black virgin material. Compound comes directly from a resin supplier. Using resin +
master batch mixed during extrusion is not allowed.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
The material of the polyethylene pipes and fittings which is in contact with drinking water
shall not constitute a toxic hazard, shall not support microbial growth and shall not give
rise to unpleasant taste or odour, cloudiness or discoloration of the water.
HDPE pipes shall pass a pressure test at 4 times the pressure class at 23 Deg.C for 5
seconds as per FM approval requireemnts which shall be out after manufacturing and
after conditioning:
The internal Pressure of the pipe shall be calculated according to the geometry of the
pipe (External diameter and wall thickness)
The dimensions of the Pipes & segmented butt fusion fittings shall be as per the latest
version of the manufacturer drawings and to be compatible with pipe OD & wall
thickness at the joint.
12.1.3 Inspection and Testing of HDPE pipes & Fittings:

Testing requirements:
The Manufacturer of pipes & fittings shall maintain a complete record of test results
according to the requirements of the applicable standards (AWWA C906 ) and this
specification & should perform the following tests:
12.1.4 For pipes:
Dimensions (Outer Diameter & Wall Thickness) as specified in the applicable standards.
Tensile test Elongation at Break
Resistance to internal Pressure Hydrostatic test.
Density & MFR
Bend back test
For fittings:
Dimensions as specified in applicable standards.
Tensile strength & Hydrostatic pressure test
When required, shall supply copies of all Test certificates for its products conforming to
applicable standards (AWWA C-906 ).
12.1.5 Inspection requirements:
Pipes shall comply with AWWA C906
In case of bulk supplies or bulk procurements (including major Projects), to verify the
compliance with this Specifications, factory inspection by an independent third party
auditor at the cost of the Client / Contractor. The third party auditor shall be of
International reputed and the one opted by client. The auditing and quality testing
procedures would be as per the prevailing internationally accepted codes of testing as
indicated in the document.
Manufacturer shall provide full assistance and co-operation for any such inspection,
when required by Client.
Manufacturer shall ensure that all the applicable codes and standards are available at
their works for Client's reference during their visit to manufacturer's works for
inspection/tests.
12.1.6 Acceptance criteria:
Following requirements are a must for the approval/acceptance of the finished product:
A copy of the raw material manufacturers certificate of quality control testing covering
each batch of raw material used for pipes purchased under this specification,
Pipe wall thickness shall be controlled by continuous scanning using Ultra sonic
Scanning gamma ray .
Successful test performance and acceptable results mentioned in this specification,
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
An acceptable inspection report from a third party inspection above mentioned. (if
applicable)
When a pipe / fitting is rejected, the items manufactured immediately before or after shall
be carefully examined. If further defects are found, the entire batch will be rejected.
12.1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL:

The Manufacturer should ensures that all testing is done as per the Applicable standards
and test method referred.
All test results are recorded. A copy of TEST CERTIFICATE as a compliance of Quality
Assurance and Quality Control shall be submitted with each batch for review and
approval.
12.1.8 MARKING:
All marking complies with AWWA C906 .
All the marking are repeated at least every 1.0 m and displayed on the outside of the
pipe length with the following information.
Standard number,
Manufacturer/Trademark,
Nominal pipe outside diameter (OD) Standard Dimensional Ratio (DR) value,
MaterialDesignation
Pressure rating in bar (i.e. Pressure Class),
Material manufacturers identification (includes plant code, machine, date, month, year,
Shift, Material Code & time.)
The ends of the Straight pipes and coils have Polyethylene wrapping at both ends that
prevent dirt and debris from entering the pipe during handling storage and transport
The pallets shall be suitable for transporting the pipes and fittings from the plant to the
designated location without causing any damage. The pallets shall not contain any
broken planks or extremities that may damage the pipe.
Where pipes are transported by vehicles, the vehicles should have a flat bed and be free
from sharp edges or projections.
Straight lengths should be stacked firm, flat ground to support the weight of the pipes
and any lifting equipment and without being allowed to bend in any direction.
Coils should be stored horizontally just as they are normally delivered. Coils shall not be
stacked higher than 2.5 m.
12.1.9 DOCUMENTATION:
Manufacturer shall furnish the following vendor data as a minimum:
Catalogues of the proposed product,
Dimensional details of pipes and fittings,
Complete details of testing facilities,
Detailed material specification,
Manufacturers drawings, showing fittings dimensions,
Quality assurance procedures in use.
12.1.10 Uniformity
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
Pipes, fittings and other accessories shall be supplied from one manufacturer to ensure
correct and proper jointing between components and uniform chemical and physical
properties of the piping system.
12.1.11 Training, Certification and Installation
Site personnel, involved with PE 100 piping installation, shall undergo training and
Certification from an authorized representative prior to performing any jointing
Operations on site. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer
recommendations.
12.1.12 Piping above Grade
1. Pipes and fittings shall be in conformance with the following specifications unless
specified otherwise by the Authority having jurisdiction. Pipes & Fittings shall be of UL
listed / FM approved and shall be from the same manufacturers and listed for fire
protection system use. Obtain approval of local Authorities before proceeding with the
work.
2. Pipe shall be of Factory Galvanized Seamless steel pipe manufactured as per ASTM A
53 grade B, schedule 40 with electrostatic powder coated painted at factory.
3. When pipes are assembled by screwed fitting or by roll-grooved / cut-grooved, the
minimum thickness for a pressure up to 20.7 bar.
4. Seamless Steel pipes must have factory galvanized internal and external surfaces or
shall be shot blasted and Electrostatic Powder coated RAL 3000 on external surfaces to
prevent corrosion. The threaded extremities must be oil treated to prevent corrosion and
shall have a thickness of not less than 100 microns. The painted pipes shall be subject
to oven baking at 200 Deg.C. The paint powder used shall be UV stabilized suitable for
external weather condition and a certificate from manufacturers must be submitted. The
pipes must be well wrapped so it will not be scratched during installation.
5. Diameters:
Minimum diameter is DN25
6. Pipes bending:
Schedule 40 Steel pipes bending is allowed if bending are executed with no defaults,
no diameter reduction and no significant deviation in the pipes circle symmetry.
The bending minimum radius must be:
6 pipe diameters for a diameter < 2 , and
5 pipe diameters for a diameter > 2 .
7. Pipes marking and identification:
Firewater pipes in galvanised steel shall be marked to indicate its destination.
8. Pipes Drainage:
For sprinkler system, pipe drainage shall be accomplished by sloping pipe to low
point with auxiliary drain as per NFPA13.
9. Special Requirements:

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
Full flanges or plugs, according to the diameter shall be installed on the collectors
extremities to flushing rinsing of the pipes
12.2 Pipe Fittings (Above Grade)
1. Fittings for for piping 50mm and small shall be UL listed and FM approved threaded
galvanised ductile iron with 300 psi pressure rating or cast iron fittings, class 150 to
ANSI B 16.4 or galvanised malleable iron fittings, class 150 to ANSI B 16.3.
2. Fittings for piping larger than 50 mm shall be galvanised mechanical grooved fittings
andmechanical joints. Fittings, gaskets and mechanical couplings shall be UL listed and
FM approved. The fittings shall be suitable for 300 psi working pressure.
3. Pipes welding shall not be carried out on site.
4. The galvanised steel fittings shall comply with
ASTM A 234 : Specification Standard for carbon steel formed accessories;
ANSI B16.5 : Pipes flanges and flanged accessories;
ANSI B16.11 : wrought, screwed or fitted accessories, and
ANSI / ASME B1.20.1 : American standard taper pipe thread (NPT).
Yarn and paste are only to be applied on the male part of the screw thread.
5. Unions and Couplings
Screwed unions shall not be used for pipe grater than DN40. For pipes above,
flanges will be used.
6. Reducers and male/female reducers
A one-piece reduced fitting must be used for each pipe diameter change.
Reduced sleeve for the pipe continuity, and
Male/female reducer for a direction change with reduction (T shape + reducer)
12.3 Supports
1. Pipe hangers and supports must be in accordance to NFPA13.

2. Pipes supports shall be designed to maintain their integrity in case of fire exposure.
3. All underground piping / valves shall be supported with Concrete Anchor Thrust blocks
as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide calculation for the Engineers approval.
4. All Above ground piping / equipments hangers, supports and sway braces shall be
fabricated in accordance with ANSI B 31.1. The Hangers, rod supports and
supporting devices and accessories shall be capable of supporting at least twice the live
loads of the product being supported. All hangers, supports and accessories shall be UL
listed and FM approved make.
5. Hangers shall be adjustable clevis type, of yoke and lower U strap design with cross bolt
and manufactured from galvanised steel. Cross bolt shall have a double locking nuts.
Vertical adjustable supporting rod shall have a load nut below the yoke and a locking nut
above the yoke.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
6. Concrete anchors shall be factory made cadmium plated alloy steel expansion shield
type.
7. Concrete inserts shall be factory made galvanised malleable iron, poured in place type,
screwed or toggle style.
8. Riser clamps shall be galvanised steel bands shaped to tightly fit O.D. of the pipe,
secured with bolts and nuts.
9. Piercing of load supporting system is not permitted.
10. The supporting structure can be directly attached to equipments if the equipment
supplier certifies this supporting feasibility;
11. The welding of pipes on the supports on the pipes is not permitted;
12. Pipes supporting system must be reinforced in order to reduce any movements resulting
from nozzles reaction and therefore preserve the system performance and integrity if
battering ram is used;
13. The maximum length for a non-supported DN 25 pipe is 0.8 meter;
14. When possible, loop-type clamps will be used
15. If spring hangers are used, they shall be installed and located in accordance with NFPA
13 specifications.
16. The Contractor shall take into account the problem of dilatation (of his systems but also
of the buildings) and shall make the coordination with the others Contractors to solve the
support problems.
12.4 Execution
12.4.1 General
The pipe sizes shall be determined by hydraulic calculation with all sections in service.
Pipe flow simulation exercise shall be carried out by the Contractor for each system. The
water velocity shall be limited to 6 metres per seconds. A higher velocity may be allowed
in some isolated pipes, but shall never exceed 10 metres per second.
The sprinkler network will be designed to allow as much as possible a symmetrical
distribution in relation to the supply collector.
12.4.2 Flushing and Testing

Engineer.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
An air tightness test in networks shall be carried out at a 3 bar(g) pressure before the
pressure test (10 h without pressure lost).
department.
shall be included.
to the client.
of this section.
client. All. corrective work shall commence immediately after damage occurs.
The flushing water flow shall be maintained as long as the water coming out of the pipe
is not clear and devoid of any solid matter.
The requiring flushing flows shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 which requires a
flowrate of 3 m/s are given the following flowrates:
1500 L/min for 100 mm pipe;

3300 L/min for 150 mm pipe;
5900 L/min for 200 mm pipe, and
9200 L/min for 250 mm pipe.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
13. CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM (FM-200 / HFC-227ea)
13.1 Introduction
This specification outlines the requirements for a Total Flooding Clean Agent Fire
Suppression System with automatic detection and control. The work described in this
specification includes all engineering, labor, materials, equipment and services
necessary, and required, to complete and test the suppression system.
13.2 Applicable Codes & Standards
The design, equipment, installation, testing and maintenance of the Clean Agent
Suppression System shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements set forth in
the latest edition of the following codes and standards:
1. NFPA No. 2001 - Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems

2. NFPA No. 70 - National Electrical Code
3. NFPA No. 72 - Standard For Fire Alarm System
4. Factory Mutual Approval Guide
5. U.L Listings
6. Requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)
The standards listed, as well as all other applicable codes and standards, shall be used
as "minimum" design standards. Also to be considered are good engineering practices.
13.3 System Requirements
The FM 200 Fire Suppression System installation shall be made in accordance with the
drawings, specifications and applicable codes & standards.
13.4 Scope of work
The Specialist contract shall include the following materials / works in their scope but not
limited to:
1. Design & Engineering of clean Agent fire suppression system;

2. Prepare workshop drawing and technical submittals;
3. Perform Flow calculation;
4. Clean Agent gas storage cylinders filled with gas and all hardware accessories;
5. Cylinder Manifold and discharge piping;
6. Discharge Nozzles;
7. Gas low pressure switch & Gas discarge pressure switch;
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
8. Fire Detection and Alarm system c/w Optical smoke detectors, manual release, Auto /
Manual selector switch, Abort unit, First stage Alarm bell, second stage Alarm sounder,
strobe horn, Gas discharge warning sign and associated cabling etc;
9. Gas release control panel
10. Interlock wiring and conduit for shutdown of HVAC, dampers
11. and/or electric power supplies, relays or shunt trip breakers.
12. Providing Drop curtains for any permanent openings;
13. Integrity Test and Functional test;
14. Training to the client representatives;
15. Provide As Built drawings and Operation & Maintenance Manuals.
The work listed below shall be provided by others, or under other sections of this
specification:
1. 120 VAC or 208/220 VAC power supply to the Fire suppression control panel.
2. Connection to local/remote fire alarm systems, listed central alarm station.
3. 3) Sealing of openings to maintain the protected room enclosure as Air tight.
13.5 Quality Assurance
1. The manufacturer of the Suppression System hardware and detection components shall
have a minimum of 10 years experience in the design and manufacture of similar types
of suppression systems and who can refer to similar installations providing satisfactory
service.
2. The name of the manufacturer, part numbers and serial numbers shall appear on all
major components.
3. All devices, components and equipment shall be new, standard products of the
manufacturers latest design and suitable to perform the functions intended.
4. All equipment shall be U.L listed and/or FM approved.
13.6 Installer
1. The installing contractor shall be trained by the supplier to design, install, test and
maintain Suppression Systems.
2. The installing contractor shall be an experienced firm regularly engaged in the
installation of automatic Clean Agent, or similar, fire suppression systems in strict
accordance with all applicable standards.
3. The installing contractor must have a minimum of eight (8) years experience in the
design, installation and testing of Clean Agent, or similar,fire suppression systems.
A list of systems of a similar nature and scope shall be provided on request.
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
4. The installing contractor shall maintain, or have access to, a Clean Agent recharging
station. The installing contractor shall provide proof of his ability to recharge the largest
Clean Agent system within 24 hours after a discharge. Include the amount of bulk
agent storage available.
5. The installing contractor shall be an authorized stocking distributor of the Clean Agent
system equipment so that immediate replacement parts are available from inventory.
6. The installing contractor shall show proof of emergency service available on a twenty-
four hour, seven-days-a-week basis.
13.7 Submittals
1. The installing contractor shall submit the following information for approval to the local
Fire Prevention Agency, owners Insurance Underwriter, Architect/Engineer, and all other
Authorities Having Jurisdiction before starting installation:
2. Field installation layout drawings scale shall be 1:100m detailing the location of all agent
storage tanks, pipe runs, including pipe sizes and lengths, control panel(s), detectors,
manual pull stations, abort stations, audible and visual alarms, etc.
3. Auxiliary details and information such as maintenance panels, door holders, special
sealing requirements and equipment shutdowns
4. Separate layouts, or drawings, shall be provided for each level, ( i.e.; room, underfloor,
and above ceiling) and for mechanical and electrical work
5. A separate layout or drawing shall show isometric details of agent storage containers,
mounting details and proposed pipe runs and sizes
Electrical layout drawings shall show the location of all devices and include point-to-point
conduit runs and a description of the method(s) used for detector mounting.
Internal control panel wiring diagram shall include power supply requirements and field
wiring termination points.
Graphic Annunciator wiring schematics and dimensioned display panel illustration shall
be provided. (Optional device)
Complete flow calculations shall be provided from a U.L. listed computer program, for all
engineered Clean Agent systems. Calculation sheet(s) must include the manufacturers
name and U.L. listing number for verification. The individual sections of pipe and each
fitting to be used, as shown on the isometrics, must be identified and included in the
calculation. Total agent discharge time must be shown and detailed by zone.
Provide calculations for the battery stand-by power supply taking into consideration the
power requirements of all alarms, initiating devices and auxiliary components under full
load conditions.
A complete sequence of operation detailing all alarm devices, shutdown functions,
remote signaling, damper operation, time delay and agent discharge for each zone or
system.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
14. Clean Agent System Requirements
14.1 System Description & Operation
A) The system shall be a Total Flood Clean Agent Suppression System supplied & installed
by an Authorised by the manufacturer.
B) The system shall provide minimum design concentration of 7.0%, by volume, in all
areas and/or protected spaces, at the minimum anticipated temperature within the
protected area. System design shall not exceed the NOAEL value of 9.0%, adjusted for
maximum space temperature anticipated, unless provisions for room evacuation, before
agent release, are provided.
C) The system shall be complete in all ways. It shall include all mechanical and electrical
installation, all detection and control equipment, agent storage containers, FM 200
agent, discharge nozzles, pipe and fittings, manual release and abort stations, audible
and visual alarm devices, auxiliary devices and controls, shutdowns, alarm interface,
caution/ advisory signs, functional checkout and testing, training and all other operations
necessary for a functional, U.L. Listed and/or F.M. approved FM 200 Clean Agent
Suppression System.
D) Provide two (2) inspections during the first year of service. Inspections shall be made at
6 month intervals commencing when the system is first placed into normal service.
E) The general contractor shall be responsible for sealing and securing the protected
spaces against agent loss and/or leakage during the 10 minute "hold" period.
F) The system(s) shall be actuated by cross zoned photoelectric detectors installed at a
maximum spacing of 250 sq. ft. (23.2 sq. m) per detector, in both the room, underfloor
and above ceiling protected spaces. If the air flow is one air change per minute,
photoelectric detectors shall be installed at a spacing not to exceed 125 sq. ft. (11.6 sq.
m) per detector. (Ref. NFPA No. 72 - current edition)
G) Detectors shall be wired in Sequential Detection method of operation, standard Cross-
Zoned detection, or Single Detector Release, using either a Class "A" or Class "B" wiring
arrangement. No other detection / wiring arrangements will be acceptable.
Automatic operation of each protected area shall be as follows:
1) Actuation of one (1) detector, within the system, shall:
A) Illuminate the "ALARM" lamp on the control panel face.

B) Energize an alarm bell and/or an optional visual indicator.
C) Transfer sets of 5 Amp rated auxiliary contacts which can perform auxiliary
system functions such as:
2) Operate door holder/closures on access doors.
3) Transmit a signal to a fire alarm system.
4) Shutdown HVAC equipment.

D) Light an individual lamp on an optional graphic annunciator.
5) Actuation of a 2nd detector, within the system, shall:
A) Illuminate the "PRE-DISCHARGE" lamp on the control panel face.

B) Energize an predischarge horn or horn/strobe device.
C) Shut down the HVAC system and/or close dampers.
D) Start time-delay sequence (not to exceed 60 seconds). System abort sequence is
enabled at this time.
E) Light an individual lamp on an optional graphic annunciator.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
6) After completion of the time-delay sequence, the HFC-227ea Clean Agent system
shall discharge and the following shall occur:
A) Illuminate a "SYSTEM FIRED" lamp on the control panel face.

B) Shutdown of all power to high-voltage equipment
C) Energize a visual indicator(s) outside the hazard in which the discharge occurred.
D) Energize a "System Fired" audible device. (Optional)
7) The system shall be capable of being actuated by manual discharge devices located
at each hazard exit. Operation of a manual device shall duplicate the sequence
description above except that the time delay and abort functions SHALL be bypassed.
The manual discharge station shall be of the electrical actuation type and shall be
supervised at the main control panel.
14.2 Materials & Equipments
14.2.1 General
The Clean Agent System materials and equipment shall be standard products of the
supplier's latest design and suitable to perform the functions intended. When one or
more pieces of equipment must perform the same function(s), they shall be duplicates
produced by one manufacturer.
All devices and equipment shall be U/L Listed and or FM approved.
14.2.2 Clean Agent System & Distribution
Each system shall have its own supply of clean agent.

The system design can be modular, central storage, or a combination of both design
criteria.
Systems shall be designed in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines.
1. Each supply container shall be located within the hazard area, or as near as possible, to
reduce the amount of pipe and fittings required to install the system.
2. The clean agent shall be stored in Agent Storage Containers. Containers shall be
super-pressurized, with dry Nitrogen, to an operating pressure of 360 psi @ 70 F. (2482
kpa at 21 C). Containers shall be of high-strength alloy steel construction and conform
to NFPA 2001.
3. Clean agent containers with an Impulse valve can be actuated by the following methods
and Solenoid valve is not allowed:
a. Method 1: Electric actuation Single container system with Impulse valve operator
(IVO) & Impulse release Module (IRM
b. Method 2: Electric actuation Multi container system with Impulse valve operator
(IVO) & Impulse release Module (IRM)
c. Method 3: Electric & Pneumatic actuation Two container system with Impulse
valve operator (IVO) & Impulse valve pnuematic operator (IVPO)
d. Method 4: Electric & Pneumatic actuation Multi container system with Impulse
valve operator (IVO) & Impulse valve pnuematic operator (IVPO)
4. Each container shall have a pressure gauge and low pressure switch to provide visual
and electrical supervision of the container pressure. The low pressure switch shall be
wired to the control panel to provide an audible and visual "Supervisory" alarm in the
BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
event the container pressure drops below 288 psi (1986 kpa). The pressure gauge shall
be color coded to provide an easy, visual indication of container pressure.
5. Each container shall have a pressure relief provision that automatically operates when
the internal temperature exceeds 150F. (66C).
6. Engineered discharge nozzles shall be provided, within the manufacturers guidelines, to
distribute the clean agent throughout the protected spaces. The nozzles shall be
designed to provide proper agent quantity and distribution.
a. Nozzles shall be available in pipe sizes 3/8 thru 2.0 (BPS 10mm thru 50mm).
Each size shall be available in 180 and 360 distribution patterns.
b. Ceiling plates, can be used with the nozzles to conceal pipe entry holes through
ceiling tiles.
7. Distribution piping, and fittings, shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
requirements, NFPA 2001 and approved piping standards and guidelines. All distribution
piping shall be installed by qualified individuals using good, accepted practices and
quality procedures. All piping shall be adequately supported and anchored at all
directional changes and nozzle locations.
a. All piping shall be reamed, blown clear and swabbed with suitable solvents to
remove burrs, mill varnish and cutting oils before assembly.
b. All pipe threads shall be sealed with Teflon tape pipe sealant applied to the male
thread ONLY.
14.2.3 Releasing Control Panel
The control panel shall be a SHP (Single Hazard Panel) Control Panel.
The SHP Control System, and its components, shall be UL listed and FM approved for
releasing service and be suitable for clean Agent release service.
The SHP Control System shall perform all functions necessary to operate the system
detection, actuation and auxiliary functions, as outlined.
The SHP Control System shall be capable of providing 7AH or 18AH battery standby
power supplies.
The SHP Control System shall be microprocessor based with hardware and software
integration designed to guarantee reliability.
The SHP Control System shall support Cross Zoned, Sequential, Single Detector
Release and Manual Release detection/actuation methods.
The SHP Control System shall provide the following capabilities and functions:
a. Three (3) Class B (Style Y) indicating appliance circuits rated for 2.0 amps @ 24 VDC.
b. Four (4) Class B (Style A) initiating circuits
c. Optional Class A (Style D) module for initiating circuits
d. Eight (8) Status LEDs plus alpha-numeric display for troubleshooting: AC normal; alarm;
pre-discharge; release; supervisory; trouble; alarms silenced and system abort.
e. Programmable pre-discharge and discharge timers
f. Resettable and continuous auxiliary output power

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
g. Five (5) optional Abort types

h. Intelligent Transistor protection to prevent noise spikes and microprocessor failure from
inadvertently activating release outputs
i. A dedicated Disarm switch for release outputs
j. Dedicated alarm and trouble contacts programmable for alarm, trouble, pre-discharge,
discharge, abort, supervisory or waterflow functions, depending on panel configuration.
k. Two (2) Form C relays, rated at 5 amps, are provided on the SHP panel board.
Installation of the optional SRM4 Relay Module (P/N 10-2176) will provide four (4)
additional 5 amp relays.
l. Multiple input power source - 120 VAC or 208/220 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
m. 2.6 amp @ 24 VDC power supply to operate high current draw horns and strobes.
Capable of allowing expansion to 8 amp external power supply for a total of 10.6 amps
of available power.
n. Available in either Red or Gray finish
14.2.4 Optical Smoke Detector

The detectors shall be spaced and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
specifications and the guidelines of NFPA 72 current edition.
The optical smoke detector shall continuously measures the smoke level in the air, and
gives a proportional output. It shall comply with the requirements of EN54 part 7.
The detector shall be an optical light scattering type sensitive to visible smoke and be
stable under all environmental conditions. The internal test and calibration circuits shall
use the same optical elements as the smoke sensing circuits, to ensure reliability.
A light emitting diode (LED) on the base must illuminate when a detector is in alarm
14.2.5 Manual Release (Electric)

The electric manual release switch shall be a dual action device which provides a means
of manually discharging the Suppression System when used in conjunction with the Fike
SHP Control System.
The Manual Release switch or Manual Pull station shall be a dual action device(s)
requiring two distinct operations to initiate a system actuation.
Manual actuation shall bypass the time delay and abort functions, shall cause the
system to discharge, and shall cause all release and shutdown devices to operate in the
same manner as if the system had operated automatically.
A Manual Release switch shall be located at each exit from the protected hazard and
shall have an advisory sign, provided at each location.
14.2.6 Abort Station

The optional Abort Station shall be the "Dead Man" type and shall be located next to
each manual switch.
The Abort Station shall be supervised and shall indicate a trouble condition at the SHP
Control Panel, if depressed, and no alarm condition exists.
"Locking" or "Keyed" abort stations shall not be permitted.
The Abort Station shall be located adjacent to each manual station.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
14.2.7 Audible and Visual Alarm

Alarm audible and visual signal devices shall operate from the SHP Control Panel.
The Alarm Bell, Alarm Horn and Horn/Strobe devices shall operate on 24 volts Dc power
to allow supervision of the circuit wires.
The alarm bell and horn shall deliver a minimum sound level of 92 decibels at a distance
of 3m.
Horn and strobe light are to operate simultaneous from one power supply with flash rate
of 1-3 flashes per second minimum over the listed input voltage range.
A Strobe device shall be placed outside, and above, each exit door from the protected
space. Provide an advisory sign at each light location.
14.2.8 Caution and Avisory Signs

Provide signs, as required, to comply with NFPA 2001 and the recommendations of the
equipment supplier:
Entrance sign: (1) required at each entrance to a protected space.
Manual Discharge sign: (1) required at each manual discharge station.
Flashing Light sign: (1) required at each flashing light over each exit from a protected
space.
14.2.9 Illuminated Warning Signs

Provide signs, as required, to comply with the QCDD requirements as follows:
"DO NOT ENTER - GAS DISCHARGED" illuminated signs shall be external to the
protected enclosure and mounted above all entrances so as to be visible to any person
entering. The lettering shall be a minimum of 50mm high. It shall be visible at all times of
the day. The illumination shall be activated by a pressure switch fitted to the discharge
piping.
"EVACUATE NOW GAS DISCHARGE" illuminated signs shall be provided above the
exits of the protected enclosure. The lettering shall be a minimum of 50mm high. It shall
be visible at all times of the day. Illumination shall be activated by on commencement of
the discharge time delay.
14.2.10 System and Control Wiring

All system wiring shall be furnished and installed by the contractor.
All wiring shall be installed in electrical metallic tubing (EMT), or conduit, and must be
installed and kept separate from all other building wiring.
All system components shall be securely supported independent of the wiring. Runs of
conduit and wiring shall be straight, neatly arranged, properly supported, installed
parallel and perpendicular to walls and partitions.
The sizes of the conductors shall be those specified by the manufacturer. Color coded
wire shall be used. All wires shall be tagged at all junction points and shall be free from
shorts, earth connections (unless so noted on the system drawings), and crosses
between conductors. Final terminations between the SHP control panel and the system
field wiring shall be made under the direct supervision of a factory trained representative.
All wiring shall be installed by qualified individuals, in a neat and workmanlike manner, to
conform to the National Electrical Code, Article 725, and Article 760, except as
otherwise permitted for limited energy circuits, as described in NFPA 72 - current edition.
Wiring installation shall meet all local, state, province and/or country codes.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
The complete system electrical installation, and all auxiliary components, shall be
connected to earth ground in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
14.2.11 System Inspection and Checkout

After the system installation has been completed, the entire system shall be checked
out, inspected and functionally tested by qualified, trained personnel, in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommended procedures and NFPA standards.
All containers and distribution piping shall be checked for proper mounting and
installation.
All electrical wiring shall be tested for proper connection, continuity and resistance to
earth.
The complete system shall be functionally tested, in the presence of the owner or his
representative, and all functions, including system and equipment interlocks, must be
operational at least five (5) days prior to the final acceptance tests.
a. Each detector shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended procedures, and test values recorded.
b. All system and equipment interlocks, such as door release devices, audible and
visual devices, equipment shutdowns, local and remote alarms, etc. shall function
as required and designed.
c. Each SHP control panel circuit shall be tested for trouble by inducing a trouble
condition into the system.
14.3 Training Requirements
Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide operational training to
each shift of the owners personnel. Each training session shall include system SHP
Control Panel operation, manual and abort functions, trouble procedures, supervisory
procedures, auxiliary functions and emergency procedures.
14.4 Operation and Maintenance
Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide complete operation and
maintenance instruction manuals, four (4) copies for each system, to the owner. All
aspects of system operation and maintenance shall be detailed, including piping
isometrics, wiring diagrams of all circuits, a written description of the system design,
sequence of operation and drawing(s) illustrating control logic and equipment used in the
system. Checklists and procedures for emergency situations, troubleshooting
techniques, maintenance operations and procedures shall be included in the manual.
14.5 AS-BUILT Drawings
Upon completion of each system, the installing contractor shall provide four (4) copies of
system "As-Built" drawings to the owner. The drawings shall show actual installation
details including all equipment locations (i.e.: control panel(s), agent container(s),
detectors, alarms, manuals and aborts, etc.) as well as piping and conduit routing
details. Show all room or facilities modifications, including door and/or damper
installations completed. One (1) copy of reproducible engineering drawings shall be
provided reflecting all actual installation details.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
14.6 Acceptance Tests
1) At the time "As-Built" drawings and maintenance/operations manuals are submitted,

the installing contractor shall submit a "Test Plan" describing procedures to be used to
test the control system(s). The Test Plan shall include a step-by-step description of all
tests to be performed and shall indicate the type and location of test apparatus to be
employed. The tests shall demonstrate that the operational and installation
requirements of this specification have been met. All tests shall be conducted in the
presence of the owner and shall not be conducted until the Test Plan has been
approved.
2) The tests shall demonstrate that the entire control system functions as designed and
intended. All circuits shall be tested: automatic actuation, solenoid and manual
actuation, HVAC and power shutdowns, audible and visual alarm devices and manual
override of abort functions. Supervision of all panel circuits, including AC power and
battery power supplies, shall be tested and qualified.
3) A room pressurization test shall be conducted, in each protected space, to determine
the presence of openings which would affect the agent system concentration levels. The
test(s) shall be conducted using the Retro-Tec Corp. Door Fan system, or equivalent,
with integrated computer program. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 2001.
4) If room pressurization testing indicates that openings exist which would result in
leakage and/or loss of the extinguishing agent, the installing contractor shall be
responsible for coordinating the proper sealing of the protected space(s) by the general
contractor or his sub-contractor or agent. The general contractor shall be responsible for
adequately sealing all protected space(s) against agent loss or leakage. The installing
contractor shall inspect all work to ascertain that the protected space(s) have been
adequately and properly sealed. THE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM INSTALLING
CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SUCCESS OF THE ROOM
PRESSURIZATION TESTS. If the first room pressurization test is not successful, in
accordance with these specifications, the installing contractor shall direct the general
contractor to determine, and correct, the cause of the test failure. The installing
contractor shall conduct additional room pressurization tests, at no additional cost to the
owner, until a successful test is obtained. Copies of successful test results shall be
submitted to the owner for record.
5) Upon acceptance by the owner, the completed system(s) shall be placed into service.
14.7 System Inspections
The installing contractor shall provide two (2) inspections of each system, installed under
this contract, during the one-year warranty period. The first inspection shall be at the six
month interval, and the second inspection at the 12 month interval, after system
acceptance. Inspections shall be conducted in accordance with the manufacturer's
guidelines and the recommendations of NFPA 2001.
Integrity Test must be done by qualified certified Engineer. The installer must have UL
Approved filling station in U.A.E for refilling and maintenance purpose
Documents certifying satisfactory system(s) operation shall be submitted to the owner
upon completion of each inspection.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
14.8 Warranty
All system components furnished, and installed under this contract, shall be guaranteed
against defects in design, materials and workmanship for the full warranty period which
is standard with the manufacturer, but in no case less than one (1) year from the date of
system acceptance.
15. MISCELLANEOUS
15.1 Environment an Hazardous area
All equipment shall be suitable for the hazardous area classification as indicated on the
hazardous area location drawings.
15.2 Earthing
All items shall be securely bonded to earth points. Flexible connections shall be braided
using copper braids.
15.3 Painting
All exposed pipes or support shall be painted. Painting shall be to vendors standard. The
Contractor shall submit details of the standard offered with the quotation.
RALColor shall be selected by the Architect. Sample shall be submitted to the engineer
approval.
Piping shall be marked to indicate its destination (fire water) following NFPA standards
and local rules.
15.4 Passage through Walls of Cables and Pipes
Piercing
The pockets in the concrete wall (or floor slab) to pass cables and pipes of fire protection
systems shall be indicated on specific drawings by the Contractor. If the indications are
supplied after the date defined by the Employer in the work schedule, the extra cost shall
be assumed by the Contractor.
The piercing of the partition walls and the drop ceilings shall be made by the Contractor.
Refilling
The refilling of all the holes made for the passage of fire protection cables and pipes
shall be made by the Contractor.
The refilling of holes in the fire walls shall be made with approved fire sealant. The
system and material used shall prevent fire, smoke, water and toxic fumes from
penetrating wall (or floor).
15.5 Safety signage
All the fire protection systems furnished by the Contractor shall be provided with
adequate marking, in accordance with NFPA standards & Local Regulation.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
Fire fighting equipment must be identified by a special colour and a sign indicating their
placement or by the particular colour of the placement itself or of the access to the place
where they can be found.
Detectors and manual call points shall be permanently marked with a nominated
identification number.
15.6 Commencement & Programme of works
The work covered by this Contract is to be carried out within the period set out in the
tender. The successful Tenderer must allow to coordinate his work within the activities
of other contractors, in particular those engaged in the execution of electrical services,
air conditioning installations, fire sprinkler services installation, and building work, etc.,
as might be applicable.
A detail installation programme will be agreed between the successful tenderer and the
Employer before commencement of work.
15.7 Installation
Tenderers must include for the complete supply, delivery to site, off loading, positioning,
installation and wiring of the plant and equipment and fixings as specified in this
document in running order.
Tenderers are to thoroughly acquaint themselves with site conditions and access.
The installation must comply with the regulations of the "Machinery and Occupational
safety Act" and with the "Standard Regulations for the Wiring of Premises" as amended
to date.
The contractor shall carry out painting of all portions of the installation.
Before painting is undertaken, the work is to be thoroughly cleaned of all rust, scale, etc.,
by brushing with a stiff wire brush wherever necessary.
The work is to be given an undercoat of first quality zinc chromate primer followed, when
thoroughly dry, by two coats of high gloss first quality enamel, in a colour to be decided
on site by the Engineer.
15.8 Testing
The appointed Contractor will be required to carry out periodic and final equipment tests
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The requisite test instruments, properly calibrated
are to be provided by the Contractor.
The installed equipment will be checked and inspected for the compliance with the
Specification and with the following:
The operation and type of equipment installed is to conform fully with the
accepted tender
All labels are to be correctly fixed and the operating instructions are to be
bilingual. The equipment is to be free from scratches, marks etc., and is to be
new.
System /Devices/Componets will be checked for correct operation.
The control unit is to be tested fully. All functions are to be tested and compared
with the detailed operating instructions.
Throughout the testing, inspection and acceptance procedure, the Contractor
shall ensure that the technical staff responsible for the installation be present with
the Engineer.

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
15.9 Acceptance Tests
At the time "As-Built" drawings and maintenance/operations manuals are submitted, the
installing contractor shall submit a "Test Plan" describing procedures to be used to test
the control system(s). The Test Plan shall include a step-by-step description of all tests
to be performed and shall indicate the type and location of test apparatus to be
employed. The tests shall demonstrate that the operational and installation
requirements of this specification have been met. All tests shall be conducted in the
presence of the owner and shall not be conducted until the Test Plan has been
approved.
Upon acceptance by the owner, the completed system(s) shall be placed into service.
15.10 System Inspections
The installing contractor shall provide two (2) inspections of each system, installed under
this contract, during the one-year warranty period. The first inspection shall be at the six
month interval, and the second inspection at the 12 month interval, after system
acceptance. Inspections shall be conducted in accordance with the manufacturer's
guidelines and the recommendations of NFPA.
Documents certifying satisfactory system(s) operation shall be submitted to the owner

upon completion of each inspection.
15.11 Warranty
All system components furnished, and installed under this contract, shall be guaranteed
against defects in design, materials and workmanship for the full warranty period which
is standard with the manufacturer, but in no case less than one (1) year from the date of
the complete system acceptance in all respects. In addition, the specialist systems
installer must guarantee the system against false actuation or leakage due to faulty
equipment, design or workmanship for a period of one year from final acceptance. In the
event of agent leakage or system discharge from any of the above conditions, the
specialist systems installer shall completely recharge and reset the system at no cost to
the owner.
15.12 Spare parts & Tools
A list of spare parts and tools necessary for two years operation as recommended by the
manufacturer shall be provided along with operation and maintenance manual. The
same shall be purchased by the client as required.
15.13 Maintenance
The successful tenderer will be required to maintain the installation in good running
order for a period of 12 months from final delivery.
During this time the contractor shall repair or replace any defective or faulty item free of
charge and make any adjustments necessary to maintain the installation in good running
order.
The contractor shall report to the engineer and to the contractor any items that become
unserviceable through fair wear and tear or damaged beyond the control of the

BA-1003
DEPARTMENT
contractor. The contractor shall immediately submit a detailed quotation for the repair or
replacement of such parts to the client.
All parts shall be guaranteed by the contractor for 12 months after final delivery and he
will be responsible for replacing the defective ones during this period.
15.14 Operation Support
After completion of the installation and when the plant is in running order, the successful
tenderer will be required to instruct an attendant in the operation of the installation until
he is fully conversant with equipment and the handling thereof.
Three copies each of the approved commissioning, maintenance, fault localising and
operating manual, together with full wiring diagrams are to be handed over to the
Employer's representative on site.
As a minimum, the Contractor shall provide a technician for 6 months to demonstrate to
key personnel in the use and testing of the systems and equipment supplied
15.15 Handing Over of Installations
This shall be conducted in accordance with the following:

The Contractor shall firstly satisfy himself that the installation is in accordance with the
specification and any variations that may have been passed during the contract period.
Once he is satisfied that the installation is complete in all respects, he shall apply in
writing to the Engineer for a first delivery inspection.
The Contractor's attention is drawn to the fact that all equipment required for testing of
plant must be at hand and ready for operation upon request during the first delivery
inspection. It must also be noted that every item of equipment included in the contract
will be checked for compliance with the specification with respect to quality and capacity.
Prior to commencement of the first delivery inspection, the Contractor must hand over to
the Engineer one copy each of all wiring diagrams, maintenance, fault localising,
operating manuals of procedure, commissioning data, etc., for his scrutiny and approval.
16. APPROVED SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS
All materials supplied under this contract shall be from one of the manufacturers listed
below. No alternate makes shall be accepted unless all the makers are unavailable.
Materials proposed from listed makes also must fully comply with the detailed
specifications, country of origin, where listed, must be complied.
All First Aid Materials should have at least been certified by two independent
Certification Organizations from International Testing Laboratories & Accredited
Certification Bodies as LPCB/ BSI Kitemark /Vds and or UL/FM.

BA-1003

Part 04 - Plumbing, Mechanical &amp; Firefighting Specifications

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Part 04 - Plumbing, Mechanical &amp; Firefighting Specifications

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

HQ OF GEN.

DIRECTORATE OF BORDERS PASSPORTS,

PART 04 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Section 19 Plumbing and Irrigation Installations

Section 20 Drainage Installation

Section 22 Air Conditioning Installation

Section 23 Fire Fighting Installation

Building Affairs Department PAGE NO: 1/210 VOLUME 3: PART 4 OF 5

PLUMBING AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATIONS

Building Affairs Department PAGE NO: 2/210 VOLUME 3: PART 4 OF 5

SL NO. TITLE OF SPECIFICATIONS

19.1.00 Plumbing General

19.1.02 Site Conditions

19.1.04 Scope of Works

19.1.05 Compliance with Specifications and Regulation

19.1.06 Plumbing System

19.1.08 Contract Drawings

19.1.09 Working Drawings

19.1.10 Co-ordination of Drawings

19.1.11 Material Submittals

19.1.12 Material Inspection

19.1.13 Alternative Materials

19.1.14 Setting Out of Works

19.1.16 Contractor s License

19.1.17 Service Connection & Permits

19.1.18 Damage to Plant and Materials

19.1.19 Protective Finishes

19.1.20 Works Test and Inspection

19.1.21 Operation and Maintenance Manuals

19.1.22 As Built Drawings

19.1.23 Period of Maintenance

Building Affairs Department PAGE NO: 3/210 VOLUME 3: PART 4 OF 5

19.2.00 PLUMBING MATERIALS

19.2.02 Installation, Storage and Protection

19.2.03 Pipe Supports

19.2.04 Pipe Sleeves

19.2.05 Valves and Stop Cocks

19.2.06 Strainers and Drain Cocks

19.2.07 Float Ball Valves

19.2.08 Trench Excavation

19.2.09 Cold Water Services

19.2.10 Pipework Insulation

19.2.11 Cold Water Storage Tanks

19.2.12 Hot Water Service Heaters

19.2.13 Water Filters

19.2.14 Cold Water Supply Booster System

19.2.15 Pressure Reducing Valve

19.2.16 Sterilization of Water Services

19.2.17 Swimming Pool

19.2.18 Chilled Water System for Roof Water Tank

19.2.19 Testing and Commissioning

19.2.20 Schedule of Preferred Manufacturer and Suppliers

Building Affairs Department PAGE NO: 4/210 VOLUME 3: PART 4 OF 5

19.3.00 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS

Wadi Al Banat, Doha, State of Qatar

19.1.02 SITE CONDITIONS

Unless otherwise specified, all the Plumbing Materials & Equipments

Maximum Ambient Temperature: 52 Deg.C (Dry Bulb) in Summer

Maximum Relative Humidity : 100 %

Maximum Wind Velocity : 130 Kms. per Hour

Prevailing Wind : North and North Westerly

Storms : Dusty Sporadic and

Irregular Annual Rainfall : 80mm

The following terms and abbreviations used in these specifications / drawings

Part 04 - Plumbing, Mechanical & Firefighting Specifications

Part 04 - Plumbing, Mechanical & Firefighting Specifications